Volvo | V90 Cross Country | Owner's Manual | Volvo V90 Cross Country 2019 Early Owner's Manual

Volvo V90 Cross Country 2019 Early Owner's Manual
V90
CROSS COUNTRY
O W N ER' S MA N UA L
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo strives to build one of the safest cars in the world. Your
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
requirements.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read
the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual.
The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and
on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other
cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or
medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OWNER'S INFORMATION
YOUR VOLVO
16
Volvo ID
26
Safety
42
Owner's manual in centre display
17
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
26
Safety during pregnancy
42
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
18
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
28
Whiplash Protection System
43
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
20
IntelliSafe-driver support
31
Pedestrian Protection System
44
Volvo Cars support site
21
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
32
Seatbelts
45
Reading the owner's manual
21
Software updates
35
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
46
The owner's manual and the environment
24
Recording data
35
Seatbelt tensioner
47
Terms & Conditions for Services
36
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
48
Customer Privacy Policy
36
Door and seatbelt reminder
49
Important information on accessories
and auxiliary equipment
37
Airbags
50
Driver airbags
51
Installation of accessories
37
Passenger airbag
52
53
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket
38
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag*
Showing the car's identification number
39
Side airbags
55
39
Airbags
56
Safety mode
57
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
57
Child safety
58
Child seats
59
Upper mounting points for child seats
60
Lower mounting points for child seats
60
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
61
Driver distraction
2
SAFETY
Owner's information
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Child seat positioning
62
Child seat mounting
63
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
64
Table for location of i-Size child seats
66
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
67
Integrated child seat*
70
Folding up the seat cushion in the
integrated child seat*
71
Folding down the seat cushion in the
integrated child seat*
72
Instruments and controls in left-hand
drive car
74
Instruments and controls in righthand drive car
75
Driver display
77
Driver display settings
81
Fuel gauge
82
Trip computer
82
Show trip data in the driver display
84
Resetting the trip meter
85
Show trip statistics in the centre display
85
Settings for trip statistics
86
Time and date
87
Outside temperature gauge
87
Indicator symbols in the driver display
88
Warning symbols in the driver display
90
License agreement for the driver display
91
Application menu in driver display
97
Handling the application menu in the
driver display
Messages in the driver display
Activating and deactivating centre display 109
Navigating in the centre display's views
109
Managing subviews in centre display
113
Function view in centre display
116
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
118
Symbols in the centre display's status bar 118
Keyboard in centre display
120
Changing keyboard language in centre display
123
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre display
123
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
125
Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display
125
Changing system units
126
Changing system language
126
98
Other settings in the centre display's
top view
126
99
Open contextual setup in the centre
display
127
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
128
Managing messages in the driver display
100
Handling a message saved from the
driver display
101
Resetting settings in the centre display
128
Overview of centre display
103
Table showing centre display settings
129
Managing the centre display
106
Driver profiles
130
3
LIGHTING
131
Lighting control
146
Windows, glass and mirrors
162
Renaming a driver profile
131
147
132
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
162
Protect driver profile
Adjusting light functions via the centre display
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
132
Adjusting headlamp level
148
Reset sequence for pinch protection
163
Position lamps
149
Power windows
163
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
133
Daytime running lights
149
Operating power windows
164
Message in centre display
134
Dipped beam
150
Using the sun blind*
165
165
Managing messages in the centre display 134
Using main beam
151
Rearview and door mirrors
Handling a message saved from the
centre display
135
Active main beam
151
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
166
Head-up display*
136
Using direction indicators
153
Angling the door mirrors
167
Activating and deactivating the headup display*
137
Active bending lights*
154
Panorama roof*
168
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
154
Operating the panorama roof*
169
Rear fog lamp
155
171
Brake lights
156
Automatic closing of the panoramic
roof's* sun blind
Emergency brake lights
156
Wiper blades and washer fluid
172
Hazard warning flashers
156
Using windscreen wipers
172
Using home safe lighting
157
Using the rain sensor
173
Approach light duration
157
Using the rain sensor's memory function
174
Interior lighting
158
Adjusting interior lighting
160
Settings for head-up display*
138
Voice recognition
139
Using voice recognition
140
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition
141
Voice control of radio and media
Settings for voice recognition
4
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Selecting driver profile
142
142
Using windscreen and headlamp washers 175
Using the rear window wiper and washer
176
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
177
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
CLIMATE
Manual front seat
180
Climate
198
Power* front seat
181
Climate zones
198
Adjusting the power* front seat
181
Climate control - sensors
Storing position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display*
182
Using a stored position for seat, door
mirrors and head-up display*
183
Massage settings* in the front seat
184
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
185
Adjusting* the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
186
Adjusting the side support* in the
front seat
187
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
188
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
189
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
190
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
192
Steering wheel controls and horn
194
Steering lock
194
Adjusting the steering wheel
195
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
215
199
215
Perceived temperature
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated steering wheel*
199
Controlling climate control with voice
recognition
Activating auto climate control
200
216
216
Air quality
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
201
Clean Zone*
201
Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation
217
Clean Zone Interior Package*
202
Activating and deactivating max defroster
217
Interior Air Quality System*
202
219
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
203
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
220
Passenger compartment filter
203
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated windscreen*
Air distribution
204
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
220
Changing air distribution
204
205
Table of air distribution options
Activating and deactivating automatic
starting of the heated rear window
and door mirrors
221
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
207
Climate controls
Regulating fan level for front seat
210
221
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
212
Regulating fan level for rear seat*
222
Regulating temperature for front seat
223
Regulating temperature for rear seat*
223
Synchronising temperature
224
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated front seat*
213
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
213
Activating and deactivating air conditioning
225
Activating and deactivating ventilated
front seat*
214
Parking climate*
226
Preconditioning*
226
5
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
6
Start and switch off preconditioning*
227
Lock confirmation
238
Preconditioning time setting*
228
Lock indication setting
239
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
266
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning*
228
Remote control key
239
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
267
Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning*
229
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
241
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
268
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
230
Settings for remotely controlled and
inside unlocking
243
Automatic locking when driving
269
243
269
231
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate
Climate comfort when parking*
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking*
231
Remote control key range
244
272
245
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
232
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
Programming maximum opening for
power operated tailgate*
273
Ordering more remote control keys
Opening and closing the tailgate with
foot movement*
248
Heater*
233
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
Private locking
248
275
Parking heater*
234
Red Key settings*
249
Activating and deactivating private
locking
275
Additional heater*
235
Detachable key blade
250
Alarm*
276
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of auxiliary heater
235
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
251
Activating and deactivating alarms*
278
Immobiliser
252
Type approval for the remote control
key system
253
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
262
Keyless locking and unlocking*
263
Settings for Keyless entry*
264
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
264
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
265
Reduced alarm level*
279
Double lock*
279
Temporarily deactivating double locks*
280
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
282
Managing speed for the cruise control
297
Speed-dependent steering force
282
298
Electronic stability control
283
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it
in standby mode
Starting overtaking assistance with
adaptive cruise control
313
Sport mode for electronic stability control
284
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
Limitations for overtaking assistance
with adaptive cruise control
314
299
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
in Electronic Stability Control
285
Changing target with adaptive cruise
control
Deactivating cruise control
299
314
Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stability Control
285
Distance Warning*
300
Automatic braking with adaptive
cruise control
315
Head up display for Distance Warning
301
Limitations for adaptive cruise control
316
302
317
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control
286
Activating/deactivating Distance warning
Speed Limiter
287
Setting the time interval for Distance
Warning
302
Change between Cruise control and
adaptive cruise control
Activating and starting the Speed Limiter
Limitations of Distance Warning
303
Symbols and messages for Adaptive
Cruise Control
318
288
Managing speed for the speed limiter
288
Adaptive cruise control*
304
Pilot Assist
320
Deactivate the speed limiter and set
it in standby mode
289
Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision
risk warning
306
Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning
323
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
standby mode
324
290
Head up display for adaptive cruise
control if there is a risk of collision
307
Head-up display for Pilot Assist if
there is a risk of collision
Activating and starting Pilot Assist
Deactivating the speed limiter
325
290
307
Managing speed for Pilot Assist
Limitations for Speed Limiter
326
291
Activating and starting Adaptive
Cruise Control
Automatic speed limiter
308
327
291
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist
Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed
Limiter
Managing speed with Adaptive
Cruise Control
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist
328
293
330
Changing the tolerance for the automatic speed limiter
Setting time interval for adaptive
cruise control
309
Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
294
311
331
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive
Cruise Control
Start overtaking assistance with Pilot
Assist
295
331
295
313
Limitations for overtaking assistance
with Pilot Assist
Cruise control
Overtaking assistance with adaptive
cruise control
Change the target with Pilot Assist
Activating and starting Cruise Control
331
296
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist
332
7
8
Limitations of Pilot Assist
333
BLIS*
364
334
Activate/deactivate BLIS
365
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning from Driver Alert
Control
382
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
Radar unit
336
Limitations of BLIS
366
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
382
Limitations for radar device
337
Recommended maintenance for BLIS
366
Lane assistance
383
Recommended radar device maintenance
340
Messages for BLIS
368
Steering assistance with lane assistance
385
Type approval for radar device
341
Cross Traffic Alert*
369
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
385
Camera unit
345
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
370
386
Limitations for camera unit
346
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
370
Select assistance option for lane
assistance
371
386
349
Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert
Limitations of Lane assistance
Recommended camera device maintenance
387
City Safety™
349
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert
372
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
350
Road Sign Information*
373
374
Steering assistance at risk of collision
390
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
352
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
Lane assistance symbols in the
driver display
389
Parameters and subfunctions for City
Safety
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision risk
390
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
353
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
391
City Safety in cross traffic
355
392
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic
356
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented
Road Sign Information and sign display
375
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation
377
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
377
Steering assistance level in the event
of a run-off risk
357
Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information
378
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of run-off risk
392
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
358
379
359
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of running off the road
393
Limitations of City Safety
Road Sign Information with Speed
Camera Information
Messages for City Safety
362
Limitations of Road Sign Information
380
394
Rear Collision Warning
363
Driver Alert Control
380
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
363
382
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision
risk with oncoming
395
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
STARTING AND DRIVING
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of head-on collision
395
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
396
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
415
Park Assist Pilot*
416
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot
416
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
417
Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot
420
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
421
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance on risk of rear-end collision*
397
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of rear-end collision
398
Symbols and messages for steering
assistance upon risk of collision
399
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
422
Park Assist*
400
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
423
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides
401
Starting the car
426
Switching off the car
427
Ignition positions
428
Selecting ignition mode
429
Alcohol lock*
430
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
430
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
431
Brake functions
431
Foot brake
431
Brake assistance
432
433
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot
402
Braking on wet roads
Limitations of Parking assistance
403
Braking on gritted roads
433
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
404
Brake system maintenance
433
Parking brake
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
434
405
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
434
Park assist camera*
406
Parking cameras' camera views
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
436
407
Park assist lines for parking camera
409
Parking on a hill
436
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot
for parking camera
411
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
436
Starting the park assist camera
412
Automatic braking when stationary
437
Limitations for park assist camera
413
438
Recommended parking camera
maintenance
414
Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill
Help when starting on a hill
438
9
Auto braking after a collision
439
Gearbox
439
Manual gearbox
440
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
441
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
442
Gear selector inhibitor
444
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
444
Kick-down function
10
445
Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving using a function button
460
Hill descent control
460
Activating and deactivating hill
descent control with the function button
461
Towbar*
478
Specifications for towbar*
479
Extendable and retractable towbar*
480
Driving with a trailer
482
462
Trailer stability assist*
483
Preparations for a long trip
463
Checking trailer lamps
484
Winter driving
464
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
485
464
Towing
486
465
Fitting and removing the towing eye
487
489
Economical driving
Driving in water
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
Gear shift indicator
445
Filling fuel
465
Recovery
All-wheel drive
447
Handling of fuel
466
HomeLink®*
490
Drive modes*
447
Petrol
467
Programming HomeLink®*
491
Changing drive mode*
449
Petrol particle filter
468
Using
HomeLink®*
Drive mode ECO
450
Diesel
468
Type approval for HomeLink®*
493
Activating and deactivating drive
mode ECO with the function button
452
Empty tank and diesel engine
469
Compass*
494
Start/Stop function
Diesel particulate filter
452
470
Activating and deactivating the compass*
494
Driving with start/stop function
453
Emission control with AdBlue®
471
Calibrating the compass*
494
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
temporarily
454
Handling AdBlue®
471
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
472
455
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
474
Level control* and shock absorption
457
476
Settings for level control*
459
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
Low speed control
459
Overloading the starter battery
477
Using jump starting with another battery
477
493
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet
498
Playing back DivX®
Audio settings
498
Settings for video
515
Sound experience*
499
Media via Bluetooth®
515
Apps
500
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
515
Downloading apps
501
Media via USB port
516
Updating apps
502
Connecting a device via USB port
Deleting apps
502
Radio
503
Start radio
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
529
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
529
Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones
529
516
Removing devices connected to
Bluetooth
530
Technical specifications for USB devices
517
Managing phone calls
Compatible media formats
530
517
503
Managing text messages
TV*
531
518
Changing radio band and radio station
504
Settings for text messages
532
Using the TV*
519
Searching for radio stations
505
Managing the phone book
532
Settings for TV*
Setting radio favourites
519
505
Settings for phone
533
Settings for radio
520
506
Apple® CarPlay®*
Settings for Bluetooth devices
534
RDS radio
507
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
520
Internet-connected car*
534
Digital radio*
508
522
Connect the car to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-enabled phone
535
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi)
536
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
536
Settings for car modem
537
538
Link between FM and digital radio*
509
Media player
509
Media playback
510
Controlling and changing media
511
Searching media
512
Gracenote®
513
CD player*
513
Video
Playing a video
514
514
Settings for
Apple®
514
CarPlay®*
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
522
Android Auto*
523
Using Android Auto*
524
Settings for Android Auto*
524
Tips for using Android Auto*
525
Phone
525
Sharing Internet access from the car
via a Wi-Fi hotspot
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
526
No or poor Internet connection
539
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
528
Remove Wi-Fi network
539
Wi-Fi technologies and security
540
11
WHEELS AND TYRES
12
User terms and conditions and data
sharing
540
Activating and deactivating data sharing
540
Storage space on hard disk
541
License agreement for audio and media
542
Tyres
554
Emergency puncture repair kit
573
Dimension designation for tyre
555
Using a puncture repair kit
574
Dimension designation for wheel rim
556
577
Tyres' rotation direction
557
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
557
Checking tyre pressure
558
Adjusting tyre pressure
558
Recommended tyre pressure
559
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
560
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring*
561
See tyre pressure statue in the centre display*
563
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
564
When changing wheels
565
Tool kit
565
Jack*
565
Wheel bolts
566
Removing a wheel
567
Fitting the wheels
569
Spare wheel*
570
Taking out the spare wheel
571
Winter wheels
571
Snow chains
572
LOADING, STORAGE AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Passenger compartment interior
580
Tunnel console
581
Volvo service programme
598
Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi
598
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
616
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
617
618
Download Center
599
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
599
Bulb specifications
618
Car status
600
Starter battery
619
Book service and repair
601
Support battery
622
Sending car information to a workshop
602
Symbols on the batteries
623
Raise the car
603
Fuses and central electrical units
624
Opening and closing the bonnet
605
Replacing a fuse
625
Servicing the climate control system
606
Fuses in engine compartment
626
607
629
590
Head-up display when replacing the
windscreen*
Fuses under glovebox
Fuses in cargo area
632
590
Engine compartment overview
Cleaning the interior
636
591
Engine oil
Cleaning the centre display
636
593
Checking and filling with engine oil
Cleaning the head up display*
637
594
Topping up coolant
610
First aid kit*
596
Bulb replacement
612
Warning triangle
596
Removing the plastic cover for bulb
replacement
Electrical sockets
Using electrical sockets
Using the glovebox
Sun visors
Cargo area
Recommendations for loading
Roof load and loading on load carriers
Bag hooks
Load retaining eyelets
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
Fitting and removing cargo cover*
Operating cargo cover*
Fitting and removing safety grilles*
Fitting and removing the safety net*
582
584
585
587
587
587
588
589
590
607
608
609
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining 638
Cleaning the seatbelts
638
613
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
638
Cleaning leather upholstery
639
Exterior lamp positions
613
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
640
Replacing the dipped beam bulb
614
640
Replacing the main beam lamp
615
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
Replacing daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
615
Cleaning the exterior
641
Polishing and waxing
641
13
SPECIFICATIONS
14
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Handwashing
642
Type designations
654
Automatic car wash
643
Dimensions
657
High-pressure washing
644
Weights
659
Cleaning the wiper blades
644
Towing capacity and towball load
660
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and
trim components
645
Engine specifications
662
Cleaning wheel rims
646
Engine oil — specifications
663
Rustproofing
646
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
665
Car paintwork
647
Coolant — specifications
666
Touching up minor paintwork damage
647
Transmission fluid — specifications
666
Colour codes
648
Brake fluid — specifications
666
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
649
Fuel tank - volume
667
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
650
Wiper blades in service position
651
Filling washer fluid
652
Tank capacity for
AdBlue®
667
Air conditioning — specifications
667
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
669
Approved tyre pressures
670
Performance
671
Alphabetical Index
673
OWNER'S INFORMATION
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Owner's information
The car's centre display1
Owner's information is available in several different product formats, both digital and printed.
The owner's manual is available in the car's centre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a
supplement to the owner's manual available in
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse information, amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
In the centre display, drag down
the top view and tap on
Owner's manual. Available
here are options for visual navigation with exterior and interior
images of the car. The information is searchable and is also
divided into categories.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
the car. Available in the app are
video tutorials and options for
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals,
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car ownership. The page is available for most markets.
1A
16
complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual1 in the glovebox that contains information
on fuses and specifications, as
well as a summary of important
and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the most
commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market,
etc. additional owner's information may also be
available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to
order.
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and
handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the printed information then it is always the printed
information that applies.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display
may mean that some owner's information is
not compliant with national or local laws and
regulations. Do not switch to a language that
is difficult to understand as this may make it
difficult to find your way back in the structure
on screen.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
Owner's manual in centre display
A digital2 version of the owner's manual is available in the car's centre display.
The digital owner's manual can be accessed from
the top view, and in some cases the contextual
owner's manual can also be accessed from the
top view.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the top
view in the centre display and tap on Owner's
manual.
The information in the owner's manual can be
accessed directly via the owner's manual homepage or its top menu.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
Owner's manual
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
Top view with button for owner's manual.
2
Applies for most markets.
}}
17
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Contextual owner's manual
Related information
•
Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre
display (p. 18)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
•
Downloading apps (p. 501)
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the centre display top view in the car. The
content is searchable and it is easy to navigate
between different sections.
Top view with button for contextual owner's manual.
The contextual owner's manual is a shortcut to
an article in the owner's manual that describes
the active function shown on the screen. When
the contextual owner's manual is available, it is
shown to the right of Owner's manual in the
top view.
Tapping on the contextual owner's manual therefore opens an article in the owner's manual that
is related to the content that is shown on the
screen. E.g. tap on Navigation Manual – an article that is related to navigation opens.
This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
possible, for example, to access app-specific articles.
18
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
–
To open the owner's manual - drag down the
top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the owner's manual. The options
can be accessed from the owner's manual homepage and from the top menu.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Opening the menu in the top menu
–
Press
in the upper list in the owner's
manual.
> A menu with different options for finding
information is opened:
Homepage
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the owner's
manual.
Categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcategories. The same article can be
found in several appropriate
categories so that it can be
found more easily.
1.
Quick Guide
Press the symbol to access a
page with links to a selection of
articles that can be particularly
useful to read in order to get to
know the most common functions of the car. The articles
can also be accessed via categories, but are collected here for quick access.
Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.
Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview
images of the car. Different
parts are designated with hotspots that lead to articles about
those parts of the car.
Tap on a main category ( ).
> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles
( ) is shown.
3.
Tap on an article to open it.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is
shown.
3.
Tap on the title to open the article.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Favourites
Press the symbol to access the
articles saved as favourites. Tap
on an article in order to read it
in its entirety.
Saving or deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing
at the
top right when an article is open. When an article
has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:
.
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star
again in the current article.
Press Categories.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
2.
2.
Video
1.
Press Exterior or Interior.
> Exterior or interior images are shown with
so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot
leads to articles about the corresponding
part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the
screen to browse among the images.
Press the symbol to view brief
instruction videos for various
functions in the car.
}}
19
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version
of the owner's manual is available in the car as well as other
useful information.
The owner's manual is available as a mobile
app3 from both the App Store and Google Play.
The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
in the owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Using the search function in the top
menu
1.
in the top menu of the owner's
Tap on
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part
of the screen.
2.
Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being entered.
3.
Tap on the article or category to access it.
Related information
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
The owner's manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. The QR code provided
here takes you directly to the
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior and
interior images where different parts of the car
are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which
lead to articles about the area in question. It is
easy to navigate between the different sections
3
20
For certain mobile devices.
The mobile app is available from both the App Store and
Google Play.
Related information
•
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on the
Volvo Cars website and support site.
ments and warranties, amongst other things.
Here there is also information about accessories
and software adapted for your car model.
Support on the Internet
Related information
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
support site is available for most markets.
It contains support for functions such as webbased services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and stepby-step instructions explain different procedures,
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a
mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation there
is the facility to download maps from the support
page.
Owner's manuals as PDF
Owner's manuals are available for download in
PDF format. Select car model and model year to
download the manual as required.
Contact
The support site contains contact details to customer support and your nearest Volvo retailer.
Log in to Volvo Cars website
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is
possible to get an overview of service, agree-
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Reading the owner's manual
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with new functions, get advice
on how best to handle the car in different situations and learn how to make the best use of all
the car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's manual.
The intention of this owner's information is to
explain all of the possible features, functions and
options included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not
intended as an indication or guarantee that all of
these features, functions and options are
included in every vehicle. Some terminology used
may not exactly match terminology used in sales,
marketing and advertising materials.
Development work is constantly underway in
order to improve our product. Modifications may
mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make
modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if problems should arise then the necessary information
about where and how to seek professional help
will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
}}
* Option/accessory.
21
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Options/accessories
Footnote
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
extra equipment).
The owner's manual contains information in certain locations in the form of a footnote at the bottom of the page or at the end of a table. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
asterisk: *.
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
Warning of personal injury
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show menu and
message texts. In the owner's manual the
appearance of these texts differs from the normal
text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
Phone, New message.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning
is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
fatality.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
22
* Option/accessory.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Risk of property damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
position list featured in connection with the
illustration that describes the item.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and location in
the car. The information that applies to your
particular car is available on the respective
decals for your car.
Procedure lists
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
property.
Information
Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual:
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding
illustration.
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series
of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the relative order is of no
relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
•
•
Coolant
Engine oil
Related information
Related information refers to other articles containing closely associated information.
Illustrations and video clips
Illustrations and video clips used in the owner's
manual are sometimes schematic and are
intended to provide an overall picture or example
of a certain function. They may deviate from the
car's appearance depending on equipment level
and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when an article continues on the following
page.
}}
23
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
when an article continues from the previous
page.
Related information
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper originating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or
other controlled sources.
Related information
•
24
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo ID
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives access to a
wide range of services via a single username
and password.
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com
or with Volvo On Call app2, the Volvo ID must
also be registered to the car to enable use of the
various Volvo ID services.
Examples of services:
•
Volvo On Call app* – check the car with your
phone. For example, you can check fuel level,
show the nearest petrol station and lock the
car remotely.
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app
1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download
Centre in the centre display's app view.
•
Send to Car – send addresses from map
services on the Web, directly to the car.
2.
Start the app and register a personal email
address.
•
Book service and repair – register your preferred workshop/dealer on volvocars.com
and book service directly from the car.
3.
Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
automatically registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
NOTE
If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also
changed automatically for other services.
Volvo ID is created from the car, volvocars.com or
the Volvo On Call app1.
When a Volvo ID is registered in the car, several
services will be made available.
Related information
•
•
1
26
Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 26)
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3 using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo
ID.
2.
Enter a personal email address.
3.
Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call
app4
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2.
Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's
start page and enter a personal email
address.
3.
Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car
If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as follows:
1.
If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from Download Centre in the centre
display's app view.
NOTE
To download apps, the car must be connected to the Internet.
2.
Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
email address.
Book service and repair (p. 601)
If you have Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
3.
Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the email address linked to your
Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Downloading apps (p. 501)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 599)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
2 Only applies to certain markets.
3 Available in certain markets.
4 Cars with Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory.
27
YOUR VOLVO
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on
the development of safer and more efficient
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of
the car and takes into account the environmental
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new
product developed must have less impact on the
environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of more effective
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the air
28
products and solutions in order to reduce the
negative impact on the environment.
inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air
outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental
impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means
that environmental laws and regulations in force
are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental
impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes.
Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
YOUR VOLVO
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only
contributes to a reduced impact on the environment, but also means reduced costs for the
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save
money and contribute to a better environment here is some advice:
•
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds
above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph)
and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to
increased energy consumption.
•
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's
recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car.
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops
and uneven speed contribute to increased
fuel consumption.
•
Use preconditioning* before starting in cold
conditions - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather. The engine
reaches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which decreases consumption and
reduces emissions.
Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this
type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept
"Clean inside and out" – a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as
highly efficient emission control. In many cases
the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures
that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the
traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles,
hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order to
be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
are hand-made, such as the seams of the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
substances that cause discomfort in the event of
e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
long service life and low fuel consumption for
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good
environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
is also important that the car is recycled in an
environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
therefore requested to contact a retailer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
}}
* Option/accessory.
29
YOUR VOLVO
||
30
Related information
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 669)
•
•
Economical driving (p. 462)
Start and switch off preconditioning*
(p. 227)
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 24)
•
Air quality (p. 201)
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
IntelliSafe-driver support
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car
safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of systems, both standard and optional, whose purpose is to make a car journey safe, to prevent
injuries and to protect passengers and other
road users.
Support
IntelliSafe includes driver support functions such
as Adaptive cruise control* which helps the driver
to maintain an even speed combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Pilot Assist5 helps the driver to drive the car
between the lane's edge markings using steering
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed,
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver to park in or
leave a parking space.
Other examples of systems that can help the
driver are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
systems.
Prevention
City Safety is a function that can contribute to
preventing accidents. The function can prevent or
mitigate a collision with pedestrians, cyclists,
larger animals or vehicles. Visual, acoustic and
5
brake pulse warnings are given in the event of a
risk of collision to help the driver act in time. If the
driver does not react to the warning and the risk
of collision is assessed as imminent then City
Safety can automatically brake the car.
Lane assistance (LKA) is another example of a
function that can help prevent accidents by helping the driver - on motorways and similar larger
roads - to reduce the risk of the car accidentally
leaving its own lane.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 282)
Active main beam (p. 151)
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Airbags (p. 50)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Pedestrian Protection System (p. 44)
The function Steering aid during increased
collision risk can help the driver reduce the risk
of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or
colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by
actively steering the car back into its lane and/or
swerving.
Protection
With the aim of protecting the driver and passengers, the car is equipped with seatbelt tensioners
which can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and in collisions. The car also has airbags
and inflatable curtains, as well as Whiplash
Protection System (WHIPS), which protects
against whiplash injuries.
A Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is also
available for mitigating a pedestrian's impact with
the car in the event of a frontal collision.
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
* Option/accessory.
31
YOUR VOLVO
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
Information when it is needed, where it
is needed
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet,
use different types of apps and make the car a
Wi-Fi hotspot.
The different displays in the car provide information at the right time. The information is shown in
different locations based on how it should be prioritised by the driver.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online
connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive
navigation structure makes it possible to receive
relevant support, information and entertainment
when it is necessary, without distracting the
driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface between
driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communication possible between you, the car and the outside world.
32
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Head-up display*
The head-up display shows selected information
that the driver should deal with as soon as possible. Such information may, for example, include
traffic warnings, speed information and navigation* information. Road Sign Information and
incoming phone calls are also shown in the headup display. The display is operated via the righthand steering wheel keypad and via the centre
display.
Driver display
12-inch* driver display.
}}
* Option/accessory.
33
YOUR VOLVO
Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore minimal. The screen can even be operated while
wearing gloves.
||
8-inch driver display.
The driver display shows information on speed
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being
played. The display is operated via the two steering wheel keypads.
Centre display
From here, for example, you can control the climate control system, the entertainment system
and seat position*. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system
can be used without the driver
needing to take his/her hands
off the steering wheel. The system can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to, for example, play back a
song, call someone, increase the temperature or
read out a text message.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
34
Head-up display* (p. 136)
Driver display (p. 77)
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 538)
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Software updates
Recording data
So that you as a Volvo customer get the best
experience of your car, Volvo continuously develops the systems in the cars and the services that
you are offered.
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance,
certain information about the vehicle's operation,
functionality and incidents are recorded in the
car.
You can update the software in your Volvo to the
latest version when your car is serviced at an
authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software
update gives you access to new functions and
improvements, as well as previous improvements
included with previous software updates.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or
collision-like situations, such as times when the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
in the road. The data is recorded in order to
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
usually 30 seconds or less.
For more information about released updates and
answers to frequently asked questions, please go
to support.volvocars.com.
NOTE
Functionality after updating may vary depending on market, model, model year and options.
Related information
•
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32)
•
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 599)
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of traffic
accidents or collision-like situations:
•
•
How the various systems in the car worked
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned
•
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
•
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better understand
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. However, other parties, such as the police,
could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to be able to interpret the registered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
number of computers designed to continually
check and monitor the function of the car. They
can record data during normal driving conditions,
but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to
enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for research
and product development with the aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
cars.
}}
35
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a
legal right to access such. Special technical
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
entered into agreements with Volvo have access
to is required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is securely stored and
managed and that its management complies with
relevant legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo retailer.
Terms & Conditions for Services
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo offers services so that you can drive your
Volvo as safely and as comfortably as possible.
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
integrity of everyone visiting our website.
These services include everything from assistance in emergencies to navigation and various
maintenance services.
This policy regards to the handling of customer
data and personal information. The purpose is to
give current, past and potential customers a general understanding of:
Before using the services, it is important for you
to read the Terms & Conditions for Services at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Customer Privacy Policy (p. 36)
•
•
•
•
The circumstances in which we gather and
process your personal data.
The types of personal data we gather.
The reason we gather your personal data.
How we handle your personal data.
This policy can be read in its entirety at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
36
•
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 540)
•
•
Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36)
Recording data (p. 35)
YOUR VOLVO
Important information on
accessories and auxiliary
equipment
WARNING
The driver always bears the ultimate responsibility that the car is used safely and that laws
and regulations in force are followed.
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively
affect the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer
system.
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
Options or accessories described in this manual
are marked with an asterisk. In the event of
uncertainty over what is standard or an option/
accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
It is also important that the car has maintenance and service according to Volvo's recommendations, the owner's information and
the service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual then the printed information always has precedence.
Installation of accessories
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when
associated software is installed in the car's computer system.
•
Volvo original accessories are tested to
ensure that they function with the car systems for performance, safety and emissions
control. In addition, a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician knows where accessories may or may not be safely installed in
your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
before installing any accessories in or on
your car.
•
Accessories that are not approved by Volvo
may not have been specifically tested for use
with your car.
•
Some of the car's performance or safety systems can be negatively affected if you install
accessories that have not been tested by
Volvo, or if you permit someone without
experience of the car to install accessories.
•
Damage that is caused by accessories installed in a non-approved or incorrect way is not
covered by any new car warranty. More warranty information can be found in the service
and warranty booklet. Volvo does not accept
Related information
•
•
•
Installation of accessories (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 38)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
}}
37
YOUR VOLVO
any liability for deaths, personal injury or
costs arising as a result of the installation of
non-original accessories.
||
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of software
or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on
the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer
system.
Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is
under the instrument panel on the driver's side.
38
NOTE
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the consequences if unauthorised equipment is connected to the On-board Diagnostic socket
(OBDII). This socket should only be used by
trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
YOUR VOLVO
Showing the car's identification
number
When contacting a Volvo retailer concerning
your Volvo On Call subscription, for example,
you will need the car's identification number
(VIN6).
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to System System
Information Vehicle Identification
Number.
> The car's identification number is shown.
Driver distraction
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with content-rich entertainment and communications systems. This could be mobile phones with handsfree, navigation systems and audio systems with
lots of functions. You may also have other portable electronic devices for your own convenience.
Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the
driving experience. If they are used in the wrong
way they could distract you.
We wish to give the following warnings regarding
such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for
your safety. Never use a device or function in the
car in such a way that it will distract you from the
task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to
serious accidents. Apart from these general
warnings, we offer the following advice regarding
the new functions that may be in the car:
6
WARNING
The driver is responsible for doing everything
possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their
passengers and other road users. Part of this
responsibility is avoiding distractions such as
carrying out an activity that is not related to operating the car in a driving environment.
•
Never use a hand-held mobile phone
while driving. In some areas it is forbidden
for the driver to use a mobile phone while
the car is moving.
•
If the car is equipped with a navigation
system you must only set and change the
itinerary when the car is parked.
•
Never program the audio system while
the car is moving. Program the radio's
presets when the car is parked and then
use the programmed presets for faster
and simpler use of the radio.
•
Never use laptops or hand-held computers while the car is moving.
Related information
•
Sound, media and Internet (p. 498)
Vehicle Identification Number
39
SAFETY
SAFETY
Safety
WARNING
The vehicle is equipped with several safety systems that work together to protect the vehicle's
driver and passengers in the event of an accident.
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
is switched on during driving and the message SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to
workshop is shown in the driver display, it
means that part of one of the safety systems
does not have full functionality. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop
should be contacted as soon as possible.
The car is equipped with a number of sensors
that react in the event of an accident and activate
different safety systems, such as different types
of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on
the specific accident situation, such as collisions
at different angles, roll-over or driving off the
road, the systems react in different ways to provide the best protection.
It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly
during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers
adjust their seating position.
Seatbelt
WARNING
Never modify or repair the car's various safety
systems yourself. Defective work in one of the
systems can cause malfunction and result in
serious personal injury. Volvo recommends
that an authorised Volvo workshop should be
contacted.
There are also mechanical safety systems such
as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also
constructed so that a large part of the force of a
collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof
and other parts of the body.
If the specific warning symbol is broken
then the general warning symbol is illuminated instead and the driver display
shows the same message.
The car's safety mode may be activated after a
collision if an important function in the car has
been damaged.
42
Safety during pregnancy
Warning symbol in driver display
Related information
The warning symbol is illuminated in
the driver display when the car's electrical system is set in ignition position
II. The symbol is extinguished after
approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is
fault-free.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Safety during pregnancy (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Airbags (p. 50)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Pedestrian Protection System (p. 44)
Safety mode (p. 57)
Child safety (p. 58)
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
Seating position
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-
SAFETY
cle as they drive (which means that they must be
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the
seat with as large a distance as possible between
abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces
the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists
of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion,
as well as a specially designed head restraint in
the front seats.
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the front seats have been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the seats must be replaced. Some of the
seats' protective properties may have been
lost even if they do not appear damaged.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward and the seat cushions move downward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. Its
movement helps to absorb some of the forces
that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
}}
* Option/accessory.
43
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then
any load must be secured to prevent it from
sliding up to the front seat backrest in the
event of a collision.
WARNING
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat,
the corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact with
the lowered backrest or child seat.
Seating position
For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed.
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 363)
Pedestrian Protection System
The Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is a
system which, in certain frontal collisions, contributes to mitigating a pedestrian's impact with
the car.
In certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian, the
sensors in the front of the car react and the system is activated.
When PPS is activated, the following occur:
•
•
The rear section of the bonnet is raised.
An automatic alarm is sent via Volvo On Call*.
The sensors are active at a speed of approx.
25-50 km/h (15-30 mph).
The sensors are designed to detect a collision
with an object that has similar properties to those
of the human leg.
NOTE
There may be objects in the traffic environment that prompt a signal to the sensors that
is similar to a collision with a pedestrian. It is
possible that the system will be activated in
the event of a collision with such an object.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by WHIPS.
44
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change anything
in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front
may cause incorrect function in the system
and lead to serious injury and damage to the
car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms
are used and that only genuine parts are used
for them.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the system yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted. Defective
work in the system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo workshop in the event of any damage to
the front of the car in order to ensure that the
system is intact.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelts
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
PPS has been activated, or a fault
has occurred in the system. Follow
the recommendation given.
}}
45
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
Make sure that all passengers have fastened
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 46)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 49)
1.
Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
•
•
•
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
2.
Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has
locked.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
46
In the front seats the seatbelt can be
adjusted for height.
Putting on seatbelts
Related information
•
•
•
•
3.
Press together the seat mounting and move
the seatbelt up or down.
Position the belt as high as possible without
it chafing against your throat.
SAFETY
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not
function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over
the arm).
4.
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
Taking off seatbelts
1.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract.
2.
If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in
by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
•
•
•
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 49)
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tensioners and electric seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and collisions.
Standard seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard
seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in
the event of a collision with sufficient force in
order to more effectively restrain the occupant.
Electric seatbelt tensioner
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are
equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can
be activated together with the driver support systems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In
critical situations, such as panic braking, driving
off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off
the ground or hits something in the terrain), skidding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.
The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the
occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of
striking the car's interior and improving the effect
of safety systems, such as the car's airbags.
When the critical situation has come to an end,
the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt preten}}
47
SAFETY
||
sioner are restored automatically, but they can
also be restored manually.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
WARNING
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 349)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 363)
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner
The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be
reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner
can be reset manually if the belt remains
extended.
1.
Stop the car at a safe place.
2.
Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset.
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
WARNING
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
•
•
•
48
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 46)
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
(p. 48)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 53)
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Door and seatbelt reminder
Seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear
a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door,
bonnet or lid.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts are
being used in the rear seat. The driver display's graphics are shown when the seatbelts
are in use.
•
Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is
unfastened during a journey by means of a
visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder
will cease once the seatbelt has been put on
again.
Driver display graphics
Visual reminder in the roof console.
A visual reminder is given in the roof console and
by means of the warning symbol in the driver display.
Graphics in the driver display with different types of
warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is
dependent on the vehicle's speed.
The driver display's graphics show which seats in
the car are occupied by belted and unbelted passengers.
The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tailgate or any door is open.
The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
driving time and distance.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display graphics when a belt
is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Front seat
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver
and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if
either of them is not wearing one.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is
not closed properly, the driver display's graphics
show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place
as soon as possible and close the source of the
warning.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's warning symbol illuminates.
}}
49
SAFETY
||
Related information
•
•
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 46)
Airbags
Deployed airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable
curtains for driver and passengers.
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following
is recommended:
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that none, one or more airbags are
deployed.
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it
is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of
components in the car's safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
burns.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located
in the centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter battery. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags may
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
50
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Driver airbags (p. 51)
Passenger airbag (p. 52)
Side airbags (p. 55)
Airbags (p. 56)
SAFETY
Driver airbags
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is
equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee
airbag1 on the driver's side.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
Related information
•
•
Airbags (p. 50)
Passenger airbag (p. 52)
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's
side in the front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help
to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the
driver as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
1
Steering wheel airbag location
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag1 location
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not place or attach any object on the top
or front of the panel where the knee airbag is
stowed.
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
51
SAFETY
Passenger airbag
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on the passenger side
in the front seat.
WARNING
Label for passenger airbag
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Front passenger airbag in front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps
to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the
passenger as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions
the initial collision impact for the occupant. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car.
This is completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
52
Passenger airbag location
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated.
SAFETY
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Activating and deactivating
passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the
car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag
Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated.
Switch
The switch for the passenger airbag is located on
the passenger end of the instrument panel and is
accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
Related information
•
•
•
Airbags (p. 50)
Driver airbags (p. 51)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 53)
ON - the airbag is activated and all front-facing passengers (children and adults) can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children
in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
}}
* Option/accessory.
53
SAFETY
||
Activating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF
(B) to ON (A).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
2.
Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a warning symbol in
the roof console indicate that the airbag
for the front passenger seat is activated.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat when the airbag is activated.
The passenger airbag must always be activated when front-facing passengers (children
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger
seat.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
54
Deactivating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
(A) to OFF (B).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
SAFETY
2.
Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the passenger seat when
the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Child seats (p. 59)
Side airbags
The side airbags on the driver's and passenger
seats act to protect the chest and hips in the
event of a collision.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest
frames of the front seats and help to protect the
driver and passengers in the front seat.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
}}
55
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the side airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
Airbags
WARNING
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
helps to prevent the driver and passengers from
striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only
designed for light coats and jackets (not for
solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine
parts that are approved for fitting within these
areas.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel, since
this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers
may impede the operation of the side airbags.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbags and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
•
56
Airbags (p. 50)
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The
panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the inflatable curtain system
can cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 50)
SAFETY
Safety mode
WARNING
Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged any
of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the
car to normal status after Safety mode See
Owner's manual has been shown.
If the car has been in a collision, the message
Safety mode See Owner's manual may be
shown on the driver display with a warning symbol as long as the display is not damaged and the
car's electrical system is still in working order.
This message means that the car has reduced
functionality.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example.
Starting the car after safety mode
1.
WARNING
Check the general damage situation of the
car and whether any fuel has been leaking.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If there is only minor damage and a check
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be
attempted.
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
WARNING
Related information
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Starting and moving the car after safety
mode (p. 57)
Recovery (p. 489)
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
2.
Switch off the car.
}}
57
SAFETY
||
3.
Then try to start the car.
> The car's electronics carry out a systems
check and then try to resume normal status.
IMPORTANT
If the message Safety mode See Owner's
manual is still shown on the display the car
must not be driven or towed but a vehicle
recovery service must then be used instead.
Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to
control once moving.
Moving the car after safety mode
1.
2.
If the driver display shows the message
Normal mode The car is now in normal
mode after a start attempt, the car can be
carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
58
Related information
•
•
•
Safety mode (p. 57)
Starting the car (p. 426)
Recovery (p. 489)
Child safety
Children must always sit secure while travelling
in the car.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and
attachment devices) which is designed for fitting
in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety
equipment, you obtain the optimum conditions for
a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the
child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to
use.
The equipment that should be used is selected
taking account of the weight and size of the child.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a rearfacing child seat until as late an age as possible,
at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a
front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm
(4 feet 7 inches) tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
SAFETY
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child seats
•
Suitable child seats should always be used
when children are travelling in the car.
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
•
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted
and used correctly.
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
•
•
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
sit on the knee of a passenger.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
Related information
•
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 62)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 53)
Safety (p. 42)
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child seats (p. 59)
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 268)
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
Related information
•
•
•
Child safety (p. 58)
Integrated child seat* (p. 70)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
* Option/accessory.
59
SAFETY
Upper mounting points for child
seats
WARNING
The child seat's upper straps must be routed
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the mounting
point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.
The car is equipped with upper mounting points
for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended
for use with front-facing child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
upper mounting points.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points
NOTE
Lower mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with lower mounting points
for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
seat.
The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child
seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
lower mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
Related information
•
•
60
Child seats (p. 59)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on
the rear of the backrest.
•
The mounting points are located on the rear of
the rear seat's outer seats.
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
The mounting points in the front seat are located
on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX2 mounting points for child seats in the rear seat.
i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child
seats that is based on an international standard.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Child seats (p. 59)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 60)
Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 60)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
The mounting points in the rear seat are located
on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
Related information
•
•
•
•
2
Child seats (p. 59)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 60)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on
the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of the
rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
Names and symbols change depending on market.
* Option/accessory.
61
SAFETY
Child seat positioning
It is important to position the child seat in the
right place in the car and this depends, amongst
other things, on the type of child seat and
whether the passenger airbag is activated.
NOTE
Label for passenger airbag
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is
sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rearfacing child seats can be fitted on the front passenger seat.
62
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
Related information
•
•
•
Child seats (p. 59)
Child seat mounting (p. 63)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
SAFETY
Child seat mounting
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in
springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
3
4
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
NOTE
It is important to remember a number of things
when a child seat is mounted and used, which
depend on where the child seat is positioned.
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
•
A child seat with support legs must not be
fitted in the centre seat.
•
The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for iSize4.
•
The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled
through the hole in the head restraint before
being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
is not possible, follow the recommendations
from the child seat manufacturer.
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the seat
in front after the straps have been fitted in
the lower mounting points. Always remember
to remove the lower straps when the child
seat is not installed.
Installation in the front seat
•
When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
•
When fitting front-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is activated.
•
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
•
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3
accessory.
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
mounting points are used with these3.
•
The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
facilitate child seat installation.
Related information
•
•
Installation in the rear seat
•
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
Child seat positioning (p. 62)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
The accessory range varies depending on market.
Varies depending on market.
63
SAFETY
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
Weight
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
64
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
UA, B
X
UB
UB
UA, B
X
UB
UB
LC
UFA, D
U, LC
U
LC
UFA
UE, F, B*, G, LC
UE
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Group 3
22-36 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
UFA
X
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
UF, H, B*, G
UH
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192); Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type
approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
Volvo recommends: Römer KidFix XP (type approval E1 04301312).
Volvo recommends: Integrated child seat (type approval E5 04220).
Volvo recommends: booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
•
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Related information
•
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 62)
Child seat mounting (p. 63)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 66)
* Option/accessory.
65
SAFETY
Table for location of i-Size child
seats
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R129.
The table gives a recommendation for which iSize child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Type of child seat
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
i-Size child seats
X
X
i-UA
X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Related information
•
•
•
66
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Child seat positioning (p. 62)
Child seat mounting (p. 63)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 67)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
SAFETY
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Weight
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Size classA
Type of child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)B
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child
seats)B
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
ILB, C, XD
X
ILC
X
ILB, C, E, XD
X
ILC
X
}}
67
SAFETY
||
Weight
Size classA
Group 1
9-18 kg
Type of child seat
A
Front-facing child seat
B
Front-facing child seat
B1
Front-facing child seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)B
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child
seats)B
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
X
ILB, E, F, XD
ILF, IUFF
X
ILB, E, XD
X
ILG
X
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). There are no
upper mounting points for child seats here.
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat.
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X3 ISOfix (type approval E5 04200).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
68
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size
classification, the car model must be included
on the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo dealer for information about which iSize/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
SAFETY
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 62)
Child seat mounting (p. 63)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 64)
Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
69
SAFETY
Integrated child seat*
•
The integrated child seats on the outer positions
in the rear seat allow children to sit comfortably
and safely.
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
•
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder
•
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal protection.
The child seat is specially designed to provide
children with good safety, together with the car's
seatbelt. The seat cushion can be raised in two
positions depending on the weight of the child.
The child seat is approved for children who weigh
15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and are at least 95 cm (37
inches) tall.
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on
the shoulder.
Check before driving that:
70
•
the seat cushion is raised to the correct position for the weight of the child
•
the seat cushion in locked in position
Related information
•
•
•
Child seats (p. 59)
Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated
child seat* (p. 71)
Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 72)
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement
of the integrated child seat is only performed
by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not
make any modifications or additions to the
child seat. If an integrated child seat has been
subjected to a heavy load, e.g. in connection
with a collision, then the seat cushion, seatbelt and backrest, or possibly the whole seat,
must be replaced. Even if the child seat
appears to be undamaged, it may not afford
the same level of protection. This also applies
if the seat cushion was in lowered position
during a collision or similar. The seat cushion
must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child seat
are not followed then the child could sustain
serious injury in the event of an accident.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Folding up the seat cushion in the
integrated child seat*
The seat cushion should always be folded up
when the integrated child seat is in use.
The seat cushion can be folded up in two positions. The position that should be used depends
on the weight of the child.
Lower position
Weight
22-36 kg
(50-80 lbs)
Upper position
15-25 kg
(33-55 lbs)
Lower position:
Press the seat cushion backwards to lock.
Upper position, start from the lower position:
Lift the seat cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to
lock.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child seat
are not followed then the child could sustain
serious injury in the event of an accident.
NOTE
Pull the handle forwards and upwards to
release the seat cushion.
Press the button to release the seat cushion.
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from the upper position to the lower position.
From the upper position, the seat cushion
must first be fully lowered into the rear seat,
and then folded up to the lower position.
}}
* Option/accessory.
71
SAFETY
||
Related information
•
•
Integrated child seat* (p. 70)
Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 72)
Folding down the seat cushion in
the integrated child seat*
The seat cushion should be folded down into
the rear seat when the integrated child seat is
not being used.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from the upper position to the lower position.
From the upper position, the seat cushion
must first be fully lowered into the rear seat,
and then folded up to the lower position.
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the seat cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the child
seat's seat cushion before lowering.
NOTE
Before the rear backrest is lowered, the child
seat's seat cushion must be lowered first.
Pull the handle forwards to release the seat
cushion.
72
Related information
•
•
Integrated child seat* (p. 70)
Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated
child seat* (p. 71)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Bonnet opening
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/
closing*, halogen headlamp levelling
Roof console
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media
Gear selector
Start knob
Drive mode control*
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear
fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
74
Parking brake
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Automatic braking when stationary
Driver's door
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Centre and tunnel console
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Instruments and controls in righthand drive car
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/
closing*, halogen headlamp levelling
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Bonnet opening
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Horn
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Roof console
Memories for power front seat*, door mirror
and head-up display* settings
Central locking
Power windows, door mirrors, electric child
safety lock*
Adjusting front seat
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear
fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Lighting control (p. 146)
Head-up display*
Starting the car (p. 426)
Driver display
Driver display (p. 77)
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Gearbox (p. 439)
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Centre and tunnel console
}}
* Option/accessory.
75
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver's door
||
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media
Memories for power front seat*, door mirror
and head-up display* settings
Gear selector
Central locking
Start knob
Power windows, door mirrors, electric child
safety lock*
Drive mode control*
Adjusting front seat
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
76
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
Lighting control (p. 146)
Starting the car (p. 426)
Driver display (p. 77)
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Gearbox (p. 439)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display
The driver display shows information about the
car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators and
indicator and warning symbols. The content of
the driver display depends on the car's equipment, settings and which functions are active at
that time.
The driver display is activated as soon as a door
is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver
display extinguishes after a while if it is not used.
To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:
•
•
•
Depress the brake pedal.
Activate ignition position I.
Open one of the doors.
The driver display is available in two versions, 12inch* and 8-inch.
Driver display, 12-inch*
WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not illuminate on activation/start or be fully or partially illegible, the car must not be used. You
should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display the
information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
safety systems may not be shown. In which
case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
and information.
Location in the driver display:
On the left
In the middle
On the right
Speedometer
Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/ECO gaugeA
Trip meter
Outside temperature gauge
Gear shift indicator
OdometerB
Clock
Drive mode
Cruise control and speed limiter information
Messages, in some cases with graphics
Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information*
Door and seatbelt information
Status of the Start/Stop function
–
Media player
Distance to empty tank
}}
* Option/accessory.
77
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
A
B
On the left
In the middle
On the right
–
Navigation map*
Instantaneous fuel consumption
–
Phone
App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
–
Voice recognition
–
–
CompassA
–
Depends on drive mode selected.
Accumulated mileage.
Driver display, 8-inch
Location in the driver display:
78
On the left
In the middle
On the right
Fuel gauge
Speedometer
Media player
Drive mode
Road Sign Information*
Phone
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
On the left
In the middle
On the right
Cruise control and speed limiter information
Navigation information*
Door and seatbelt information
Clock
Distance to empty tank
Status of the Start/Stopp function
App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Outside temperature gauge
–
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicator and warning symbols
–
OdometerB
–
–
Trip meter
–
–
Indicator and warning symbols
–
–
Voice recognition
–
–
Engine temperature gauge
–
–
Messages, in some cases with graphics
–
–
CompassA
Gear shift indicator
Tachometer/ECO
A
B
gaugeA
Depends on drive mode selected.
Accumulated mileage.
Dynamic symbol
The dynamic symbol in its basic
form.
ferent types of message. An amber or red marker
around the symbol indicates the degree of
severity of a control or warning message. With an
animation, the basic shape can be turned into a
larger image in order to graphically indicate
where a problem is situated or to clarify information.
The centre of the driver display contains a
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif}}
* Option/accessory.
79
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Examples of indicator symbol.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
80
Driver display settings (p. 81)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 90)
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 88)
Trip computer (p. 82)
Messages in the driver display (p. 99)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 98)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display settings
Settings via the centre display
Settings for the driver display's display options
can be made via the driver display's application
menu and via the centre display's settings menu.
Selecting information type
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
Settings via the driver display's app
menu
2.
Press My Car Displays
Display Information.
3.
Select what should be shown in the background:
media
• Show navigation even if no route is
set1.
Selecting theme
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
The app menu is opened and controlled using
the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel.
In the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display from:
•
•
•
•
1
Trip computer
media player
phone
navigation system*.
2.
Tap on My Car
Themes
3.
Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
display:
•
•
•
•
Displays
2.
Driver
• Show no information in background
• Show information for current playing
The figure is schematic - the layout may vary.
Selecting language
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
Tap on System System Languages and
Units System Language to select language.
> A change will affect the language in all
displays.
These settings are personal and are saved automatically to the active driver profile.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver display (p. 77)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 98)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
Display
Glass
Minimalistic
Performance
Chrome Rings.
The map is only shown with the 12-inch driver display*. The 8-inch driver display only shows guidance.
* Option/accessory.
81
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Fuel gauge
Trip computer
The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
fuel level in the tank.
The car's trip computer records vales such as
e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average
speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, information is recorded about both instantaneous and
average fuel consumption. The information from
the trip computer can be shown in the driver display.
Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display:
The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity
of fuel in the tank.
Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display:
The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
quantity of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates the distance to empty tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates the distance to empty tank. Only an
amber-coloured bar remains when the fuel level
is critically low. Refuel the car as soon as possible.
Related information
•
•
•
82
Driver display (p. 77)
Filling fuel (p. 465)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 667)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
•
•
Distance to empty tank
Distance to empty tank
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The trip computer calculates the remaining mileage with the fuel available in the tank.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via
system settings in the centre display.
Trip meter
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset automatically if the car is not used for at least four
hours.
12-inch driver display*.
Average speed
Average fuel consumption.
The odometer records the car's total mileage.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
Trip meter
Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption
There may be a slight deviation if the driving
style has been changed.
Driving time
Odometer
•
•
•
NOTE
Mileage
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
reset.
The following meters are included in the trip
computer:
When the gauge shows "----", there is not
enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
The following information is registered while driving:
•
•
•
•
8-inch driver display.
The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the
remaining drivable fuel quantity.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the
car has at the moment. The value is updated
approximately every second.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it easier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
are in a different unit than that shown in the car's
instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite
unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer.
If the analogue speedometer is graduated in
mph, the digital speedometer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
Related information
•
•
Show trip data in the driver display (p. 84)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 85)
* Option/accessory.
}}
83
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
•
•
•
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 85)
Driver display (p. 77)
Changing system units (p. 126)
Show trip data in the driver display
1.
The trip computer's recorded and calculated values can be shown in the driver display.
Open the app menu in the driver display by
pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must first
be acknowledged before the app menu can
be opened.)
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via
the app menu, you can choose which information
is shown on the driver display.
2.
Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3).
3.
Scroll down to the option buttons to select
which information to show in the driver display:
Distance to empty tank
App menu
•
•
•
Left/right
•
Instantaneous fuel consumption, average
consumption for TM or TA, alternatively,
no display of fuel consumption
•
Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Open and navigate in the app menu2 using the righthand steering wheel keypad.
Up/down
Confirm
Odometer
Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no display of mileage
Select or deselect an option with the O button (4). The change is made immediately.
2
84
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Related information
•
•
Trip computer (p. 82)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 85)
Resetting the trip meter
Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk
switch.
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are displayed graphically in the centre display and provide an overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient driving.
Open the Driver performance
app in app view in order to
show the trip statistics.
Each bar in the diagram symbolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The
bars are filled in from the right as driving progresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
for the current distance.
–
Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
speed and driving time) with a long press on
the RESET button on the left-hand stalk
switch.
The average fuel consumption and total driving
time are calculated since the last time the trip
statistics were reset.
A short press on the RESET button resets
only the mileage.
The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically
when the car has not been used for four or more
hours.
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 82)
}}
85
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Settings for trip statistics
||
Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.
Trip statistics from the trip computer3.
1.
Open the Driver performance app in app
view in order to show the trip statistics.
2.
Press Preferences to
Related information
•
•
Settings for trip statistics (p. 86)
Trip computer (p. 82)
•
change graph scale. Select resolution 1,
10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.
•
reset data after every trip. Performed
when the car has been stationary for more
than 4 hours.
•
reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always reset
simultaneously.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via
system settings in the centre display.
Related information
3
86
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
•
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 85)
•
Trip computer (p. 82)
•
Resetting the trip meter (p. 85)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Time and date
The clock is shown in both the driver display and
the centre display.
Clock location
Automatic time for cars with GPS
When the car is equipped with a navigation system, Auto Time can be selected. The time zone
is then adjusted automatically based on the location of the car. For certain types of navigation
systems, the current location (country) must also
be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time
is not selected, time and data are adjusted with
arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Outside temperature gauge
The outside temperature is shown in the driver
display.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of the
car.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select automatic setting of summer time with Auto. For
other countries, summer time can be set with On
or Off.
Related information
Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.
In the centre display, the clock is located at the
top right of the status bar.
In certain situations, messages and information
may cover the clock in the driver display.
Settings for time and date
–
Select Settings System Date and
Time in the centre display's top view to
change settings for time and date format.
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or
down arrow on the touch screen.
•
•
Driver display (p. 77)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and
8-inch driver display.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is within
the range –5 °C to +2 °C (23 °F to 36
°F) a snowflake symbol is also shown
in the driver display as a warning for
potentially slippery conditions.
The snowflake symbol is also illuminated briefly in
the head-up display, if the car is equipped with
one.
}}
87
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Change the unit for the temperature gauge, etc.
via system settings in the centre display's top
view.
Related information
•
•
Driver display (p. 77)
Changing system units (p. 126)
Indicator symbols in the driver
display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that a system is operating, or
that a fault or abnormal condition exists.
Symbol
Specification
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended, this
information symbol illuminates and
a text appears on the driver display.
The information symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Fault in brake system
The symbol lights up when there is
a fault in the parking brake.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS function.
88
Symbol
Specification
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car stationary
when it has stopped.
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates when tyre
pressure is too low. If there is a
fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
minute and then illuminate with a
constant glow. This may be
because the system cannot detect
or warn of low tyre pressure as
intended.
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
Left and right-hand direction
indicator
The symbol flashes when the direction indicators are used.
Symbol
Specification
The symbol lights up when the
position lamps are switched on.
Fault in the headlamp system
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function
(Active Bending Lights) or if
another fault has occurred in the
headlamp system.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when the
automatic main beam is on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
the automatic main beam is off.
Specification
Main beam On
Rain sensor on
The symbol illuminates when main
beam is on and with main beam
flash.
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
Active main beam on
Position lamps
Symbol
Preconditioning on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on. Position
lamps are switched on.
The symbol illuminates when the
engine block and passenger compartment heater/air conditioning
are preconditioning the car.
Active main beam off
Stability system
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off. Position
lamps are switched on.
A flashing symbol indicates that
the stability system is operating. If
the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in
the system.
Main beam On
The symbol lights up when main
beam and the position lamps are
switched on.
Front fog lamps on
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lamp is switched on.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the
sport mode is activated. Sport
mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then
detects whether the accelerator
pedal, steering wheel movements
and cornering are more active than
in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it
intervenes and stabilises the car.
}}
89
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Symbol
Specification
Lane assistance
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Amber symbol: Lane assistance
warns/intervenes.
Lane assistance and rain sensor
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Rain sensor is on.
AdBlue system
The symbol illuminates when the
AdBlue level is low or in the event
of a fault in the AdBlue system.
Related information
•
•
90
Driver display (p. 77)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 90)
Warning symbols in the driver
display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious
fault or condition exists.
Symbol
Specification
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates
when a fault has been indicated
which could affect the safety
and/or drivability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time. The
warning symbol can also illuminate
in conjunction with other symbols.
Symbol
Specification
Airbags
If the symbol remains illuminated or
illuminates while driving, a fault has
been detected in one of the car's
safety systems. Read the message
in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low. Visit the
nearest authorised workshop to
have the brake fluid level checked
and rectified.
Seatbelt reminder
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates or flashes if
someone in a front seat has not
put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their
seatbelt.
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake
is applied.
A flashing symbol means that a
fault has arisen. Read the message
in the driver display.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level
is normal, contact a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Visit a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Collision risk
City Safety warns of a risk of collision with other vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists or large animals.
Related information
•
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 88)
Driver display (p. 77)
License agreement for the driver
display
A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following text is
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or
developer.
INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Boost Software License 1.0
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person or organization obtaining a copy of
the software and accompanying documentation
covered by this license (the "Software") to use,
reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and
transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative
works of the Software, and to permit third-parties
to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all
subject to the following: The copyright notices in
the Software and this entire statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and the
following disclaimer, must be included in all
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all
derivative works of the Software, unless such
copies or derivative works are solely in the form
of machine-executable object code generated by
a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
}}
91
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4.
Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
92
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3.
Neither the name of the organisation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derive from this
software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
FreeType Project License
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages; some
of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine, various tools and
contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project. This license applies to all
files found in such packages, and which do
not fall under their own explicit license. The
license affects thus the FreeType font
engine, the test programs, documentation
and makefiles, at the very least. This license
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free
software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that this
software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution) o You can use this software for
whatever you want, in parts or full form,
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote
this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this software, with or without
modifications, in commercial products,
provided that all warranty or liability claims
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term
including compiling the project's source code
as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'. This program is referred to as `a
program using the FreeType engine'. This
license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you
}}
93
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
must contact us to verify this. The FreeType
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType project
is copyrighted material, only this license, or
another one contracted with the authors,
grants you the right to use, distribute, and
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate
that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
||
2.
94
Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: o Redistribution
of source code must retain this license file
(`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in
all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based
on the FreeType code, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
be paid to us.
3.
Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
and contributors may not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require,
that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
4.
Contacts There are two mailing lists related
to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation. o devel@freetype.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
FreeType web page, which will allow you to
download our latest development version and
read online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
<david.turner@freetype.org> Robert Wilhelm
<robert.wilhelm@freetype.org> Werner
Lemberg <werner.lemberg@freetype.org>
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998,
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
set of individuals:
Tom Lane
Paul Schmidt
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Tim Wegner
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
which may result from the use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the
possibility of such damage.
Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts
or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
}}
95
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
1.
The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2.
Altered versions must be plainly marked as
such and must not be misrepresented as
being the original source.
3.
This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any source or altered source
distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a product,
acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu
April 15, 2002
MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
96
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1.
The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2.
Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3.
This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
zlib License
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
<copyright holders>
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0,
Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Application menu in driver display
Application menu (app menu) in the driver display provides quick access to commonly used
functions for certain apps.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 77)
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead
of using the centre display. The figure is schematic - the
layout may vary.
The app menu is shown in the driver display and
is controlled using the steering wheel's righthand keypad. The app menu makes it easier to
switch between different apps or functions within
the apps without having to let go of the steering
wheel.
App menu functions
Different apps give access to different types of
functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app
menu:
}}
97
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
App
Functions
Trip computer
Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the
driver display, etc.
Media
player
Selection of active source for
the media player.
Phone
Calling a contact from the call
list.
Navigation
Handling the application menu in
the driver display
–
The application menu (the app menu) in the
driver display is operated with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Press on open/close (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must first
be acknowledged before the app menu can
be opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
selected.
Guide to destination, etc.
Related information
•
•
•
Opening/closing the app menu
Driver display (p. 77)
Navigating and selecting in the app
menu
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
1.
Navigate between the different apps that are
available by tapping on left or right (2).
> Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2.
Browse through the functions for the
selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
3.
Confirm or highlight an option for the function by pressing on confirm (4).
> The function is activated and for some
options the app menu then closes.
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 98)
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of
the most recently selected app are shown first.
Related information
•
•
98
Application menu in driver display (p. 97)
Messages in the driver display (p. 99)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Messages in the driver display
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important service
messages and their meanings.
The driver display can show messages to inform
or assist the driver in the event of different
events.
Message
Stop
Message in the driver
display5.
The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
Message in the driver display4.
Messages can be shown in different parts of the
driver display depending on what other information is currently being displayed. After a while, or
when the message has been acknowledged/
action taken if required, the message disappears
from the driver display. If a message needs to be
saved, it is placed in the Car Status app, which
is opened from the app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons
for acknowledging the message or accepting a
request, for example.
4
5
With 8-inch driver display.
With 12-inch driver display.
safelyA
Specification
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Turn off
engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Service urgent
Drive to workshopA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Regular maintenance
Book time for
maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown before the next
service date.
Regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
}}
99
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Message
Specification
Time for maintenance
Shown at the next service
date.
Regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown when the service
date has passed.
Maintenance
overdue
Temporarily
offA
B
A function has been temporarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.
Related information
100
Messages in the driver display are handled
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Message in the driver display7 and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Left/right
Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A
•
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 100)
•
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 101)
•
Message in centre display (p. 134)
6
7
Managing messages in the driver
display
With 8-inch driver display.
With 12-inch driver display.
Confirm
Message in the driver display6 and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Some messages in the driver display contain one
or more buttons for acknowledging the message
or accepting a request, for example.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
Handling a message saved from the
driver display
Reading a saved message
To read a saved message immediately:
1.
Navigate between the different buttons that
are available by tapping on left or right (1).
–
2.
Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2).
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
To read a saved message later:
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by pressing on confirm
(2), or allow the message to close automatically after a while.
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car Status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message Car
message stored in Car Status application is
shown in the centre display in conjunction with
this.
Related information
•
•
•
Messages in the driver display (p. 99)
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 101)
Press the button to the right of the Car
message stored in Car Status
application message in the centre display.
> The saved message is shown in the Car
Status app.
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.
Messages that are shown in
the driver display and that need
to be saved are added in the
Car Status app in the centre
display. The message Car
message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
1.
Open the Car Status app from the app view
in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom tile of
the home view.
2.
Select the Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
3.
Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
Message in centre display (p. 134)
}}
101
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Managing a saved message
In maximised mode, some messages have two
buttons available to book service or read the
owner's manual.
Related information
To book service for a saved message:
•
–
•
•
Messages in the driver display (p. 99)
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 100)
Message in centre display (p. 134)
In maximised mode for the message, press
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment8 for help in booking service.
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
With Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved message:
–
In maximised mode for the message, press
Owner's manual to read about the message in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
display and shows information linked to
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automatically each time the engine is started.
8
102
Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Overview of centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled from
the centre display. Presented here is the centre
display and its options.
}}
103
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively9.
Function view - car functions that are activated or deactivated with a press. Certain
9
104
functions are also so-called trigger functions,
which means they open a window with set-
ting options. Examples of these include
Camera. Settings for the head-up display*
The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
are also made from the function view, but
adjustments are made using the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Extra subview - recently used apps or car
functions that do not belong in any of the
other subviews. Tap on the subview to
expand it.
Home view - the first view that is shown
when the screen is started.
Climate row - information and direct interaction to set temperature and seat heating for
example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of
the climate row in order to open the climate
view with more setting options.
Application view (app view) - apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) and
apps for embedded functions, such as FM
radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are
shown right at the top of the screen. Network
and connection information is shown on the
left-hand side of the status bar, while mediarelated information, the clock and indication
about on-going background activity are
shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to
access the top view. Settings, Owner's
manual, Profile and the car's saved messages are accessed from here. In some
cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation
Settings) and the contextual owner's manual
(e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be
accessed in the top view.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview
to expand it.
Media - recently used apps associated with
media. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Phone - the phone function can be reached
from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.
•
Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 125)
•
•
•
•
Changing system language (p. 126)
Changing system units (p. 126)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 636)
Message in centre display (p. 134)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 106)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
Function view in centre display (p. 116)
Apps (p. 500)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 118)
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
•
Open contextual setup in the centre display
(p. 127)
•
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Media player (p. 509)
Phone (p. 525)
Climate controls (p. 210)
Switching off and changing the volume of
the system sound in the centre display
(p. 125)
* Option/accessory. 105
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing the centre display
ing apps can be performed by touching the
screen in different ways.
Many of the car's functions are controlled and
regulated from the centre display. The centre
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in
the centre display
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether you press, drag or swipe across it.
Actions such as browsing between different
views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and movProcedure
106
An infrared light curtain just above the surface of
the screen enables the screen to detect a finger
that is just in front of the screen. This technology
makes it possible to use the screen even with
gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different procedures for operating the screen:
Execution
Result
Press once.
Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick succession.
Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map.
Press and hold.
Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map. Press and hold your finger against
the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Procedure
Execution
Result
Drag
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps
or map points on the map. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.
Drag apart
Zooms in.
Drag together
Zooms out.
}}
107
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Returning to home view from another
view
1.
2.
Briefly press the home button below the centre display.
> The last position of the home view is
shown.
NOTE
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it
is possible to scroll in the view.
Using the controls in the centre display
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
108
drag the control to the desired temperature,
•
tap on the desired temperature on the control.
tap on + or − in order to raise or lower the
temperature gradually, or
Related information
Briefly press again.
> All subviews of the home view are set to
their default mode.
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 109)
•
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
(p. 118)
•
Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating centre
display
1.
The centre display can be dimmed and reactivated using the home button beneath the screen.
2.
Give a long press on the physical home button below the screen.
> The screen goes dark except for the climate row, which continues to be shown.
All functions connected to the screen are
still running.
Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was switched off will be shown
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
prompt to perform an action is shown on the
screen.
Home button for the centre display.
The effect of using the home button that the
screen dims and the touchscreen no longer
reacts to touch. The climate row will still be
shown. All functions connected to the screen are
still running, such as climate, audio, guidance*
and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it
is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The
dimming function can also be used to fade the
screen so that it does not disturb while driving.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automatically
when the engine is off and the driver's door is
opened.
Related information
•
•
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 636)
Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 125)
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Navigating in the centre display's
views
There are five different basic views in the centre
display: home view, top view, climate view, application view (app view) and function view. The
screen is started automatically when the driver's
door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view that is shown when the
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview.
An app or car function selected from the app or
function view starts in the respective subview of
the home view. For example FM radio starts in
the Media subview.
The extra subview contains the last used app or
car function that is not associated with any of the
other three areas.
The subviews show brief information about each
different app.
NOTE
When the car is started, the home view's various sub-views show information on the current status of apps.
}}
* Option/accessory. 109
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
Status bar
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from
the top downwards across the screen.
In the top view, access is always available to:
• Settings
• Owner's manual
• Profile
• The car's saved messages.
The activities in the car are shown at the top of
the screen. Network and connection information
is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar,
while media-related information, the clock and
indication that background activity is in progress
are shown on the right.
In the top view, access is given to the following in
some cases:
•
Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation
Settings). Change settings directly in the
top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is running.
Top view
•
Contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation
Manual). Gain access directly in the top view
to articles in the digital owner's manual that
are related to the content displayed on
screen.
Climate view
The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
the screen. The most common climate settings
can be made directly there, such as setting temperature and seat heating*.
Press the symbol in the centre of the
climate row to open the climate view
and gain access to more climate settings.
Press the symbol to close the climate
view and return to the previous view.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on
the home button or at the bottom of the top view
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visible and available for use again.
NOTE
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at
the top of the screen. Open the top view by
110
The top view is not available during starting/
shutdown or when a message is shown on
the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Application view
app view, such as the number of unread text
messages for Messages.
Function view
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the
subview to which it belongs, such as Media.
You can scroll down in the app view, depending
on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
left to right10 across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Application view with the car's apps.
left10
Swipe from right to
across the screen in
order to access the application view (app view)
from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Certain apps show brief information directly in the
10
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
The function view with buttons for different car functions.
Swipe from left to right10 across the screen in
order to access the function view from the home
view. From here you can activate or deactivate
different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping
Aid* and Park Assist*.
}}
* Option/accessory. 111
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Depending on the amount of functions, it is also
possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated or deactivated by
pressing the relevant function button. Some functions (trigger functions) open in a new window
when pressed.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
right to left10 across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Related information
•
Managing subviews in centre display
(p. 113)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 118)
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
•
Open contextual setup in the centre display
(p. 127)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
10
112
Driver profiles (p. 130)
Climate controls (p. 210)
Apps (p. 500)
Function view in centre display (p. 116)
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing subviews in centre
display
Home view consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview. These views can be expanded.
}}
113
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Expanding a subview from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.
114
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Expanding a subview:
–
For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
Press anywhere on the subview. When a tile
is expanded, the extra tile in the home view is
temporarily forced away. The other two tiles
are minimised and only certain information is
shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the
other three tiles are minimised and only certain information is displayed.
The expanded view provides access to the
basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded subview:
–
The subview can be closed in three different
ways.
•
Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
•
Tap on another tile (this tile will then open
in expanded mode instead).
•
Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
When a new subview is opened in full-screen
mode, no information from the other subviews is
shown.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full screen - press on
the symbol.
Press on the symbol to go back
to the expanded mode, or press
the home button at the bottom
of the screen.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. To go back to
the home view's standard view from full screen
mode – press twice on the home button.
Related information
•
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 106)
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 109)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
Opening or closing a subview in full
screen mode
The extra tile11 and the tile for Navigation can
be opened out in full screen mode, with even
more information and more setting options.
Home button for the centre display.
11
Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile.
115
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Function view in centre display
All the buttons for car functions are located in
the function view, one of the centre display's
basic views. Navigate to the function view from
home view by swiping from left to right across
the screen12.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for car
functions; see below:
Type of button
Property
Affects car function
Function buttons
Have on/off positions.
Most buttons in function view are
function buttons.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button.
Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Trigger buttons
Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be
a window to change seat position.
Parking buttons
Have on, off and scan modes.
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
12
116
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
• Camera
• Headrest Fold
• Head-up Display Adjustments
• Park In
• Park Out
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The buttons' different modes
When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a
function or parking button, the function is activated. When a function is activated, extra text
with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and
then the button is shown with the LED indicator
illuminated.
The function is deactivated when the LED indicator is extinguished.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at
certain speeds is shown, for example, when the
button is depressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or deactivate the function.
When a warning triangle is shown in the righthand section of the button there is something not
working as intended.
Related information
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 106)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
117
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
NOTE
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
moving them to the bottom, off the visible
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
apps you use more often.
The apps and buttons for car functions in the
app view and function view respectively can be
moved and organised as desired.
1.
2.
3.
Swipe from right to left13 to access the app
view, or swipe from left to right13 to access
the function view.
Tap on an app or button and hold it down.
> The app or button changes size and
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it.
Drag the app or button to a vacant space in
the view.
The maximum number of rows available for use in
order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move
an app or button outside the visible view, drag it
to the bottom of the view. New rows are then
added, where the app or button can be located.
NOTE
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
Related information
•
•
•
Function view in centre display (p. 116)
Apps (p. 500)
Managing the centre display (p. 106)
An app or button can thus be located further
down and is then not visible in the normal mode
for the view.
Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in
the view.
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in
the centre display's status bar.
The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
status bar.
Symbol
Specification
Connected to the Internet.
Connection to the Internet failed.
Roaming activated.
Signal strength in mobile phone network.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected.
Information sent to and from GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
13
118
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot).
The car then shares the available
connection.
Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Related information
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
•
•
•
•
•
Message in centre display (p. 134)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 516)
Phone (p. 525)
Time and date (p. 87)
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio
channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
* Option/accessory. 119
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Keyboard in centre display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible
make entries using keys. It is also possible to
"draw in" letters and characters on the screen
by hand.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages
from the car, enter passwords or search for articles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can be
made on the screen.
120
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.
}}
121
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Row of suggested words or characters14.
The suggested words are adjusted as new
letters are being entered. Browse among the
suggestions by pressing on the right and left
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
that this function is not supported by all language selections. If not available, the row will
not be shown on the keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard
depend on which language was selected
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.
The button works in different ways, depending on the context in which the keyboard is
used - either to enter @ (when an email
address is entered) or to create a new row
(for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to
enter one capital letter and then continue
with lower-case letters. Another press makes
all letters capital letters. The next press
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters.
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop,
exclamation mark or question mark is a capital letter. The first letter in the text field is
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for
names or addresses, each word automatically
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
password, web address or email address
14
122
Applies to Asiatic languages.
entry, all letters are automatically lower case
unless otherwise set with the button.
Variants of a letter or character
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which in
number mode is shown instead of
, to
to
return to the letter keyboard, or
open the keyboard with special characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The
available characters and word suggestions
(1) vary depending on the selected language.
To make it possible to change languages for
the keyboard, the languages must first be
added under Settings.
Space.
Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes
one character at a time. Hold the button
depressed to delete characters more quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
characters by hand instead.
Pressing the confirmation button above the keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the
entered text. The appearance of the button differs depending on context.
Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
be entered by holding down the letter or character. A box is displayed showing possible variants
of letters or characters. Press the required variant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/
character is entered.
Related information
•
Changing keyboard language in centre display (p. 123)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 123)
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 106)
Managing text messages (p. 531)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
Switching between different languages
in the keyboard
To make it possible to switch between different
languages for the keyboard, the languages must
first be added under Settings.
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the button in the
keyboard is used to switch
between the different languages.
Adding or deleting languages in
settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
languages as the system language. The keyboard
language can be manually adapted without
affecting the system language.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press System System Languages and
Units Keyboard Layouts.
3.
Select one or more languages from the list.
> It is now possible to switch between the
selected languages directly from the keyboard for text input.
If no languages have been actively selected
under Settings, the keyboard retains the same
language as the car's system language.
To change keyboard language with list:
1.
Give a long press on the button.
> A list opens.
2.
Select the required language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the selected
language and other word suggestions are
given.
–
•
•
Applies to certain system languages.
The centre display keyboard allows you to enter
characters, letters and words on the screen by
"drawing" by hand.
Press the button on the keyboard to change from typing
with the keys to entering letters
and characters by hand.
To change the keyboard language without displaying the list:
One short press of the button.
> The keyboard is adapted to the next language in the list without displaying the list.
Related information
15
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre
display
Changing system language (p. 126)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)
Area for writing characters/letters/words/
parts of word.
The text field where the characters or word
suggestions15 appear as they are written on
screen (1).
}}
123
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Suggestions for characters/letters/word/
part of word. It is possible to scroll through
the list.
||
Space. A space can also be created by
entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-written letters (1). See the heading "Entering a
space in the free text field with handwriting
recognition" below.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete the
next character/letter, etc.
Return to the keyboard with regular character input.
Switch off/on sound when entering.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Change text input language.
16
124
Writing characters/letters/words by hand
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of
a word in the area for hand-written letters
(1). Write a word or parts of a word above
each other or on a line.
> A number of suggested characters, letters
or words is shown (3). The most likely
choice is found at the top of the list.
Deleting/changing characters/letters written
by hand
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
2.
Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a
moment.
> The character/letter/word at the top of
the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
the required character, letter or word in
the list.
For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
across the handwriting field (1).
–
There are several options for deleting/
changing characters/letters:
•
Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
•
Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
•
Swipe horizontally from right to left16 over
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
•
Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes
all of the entered text.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing row in the free text field with
handwriting
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
The appearance of the screen in the centre display can be changed by selecting a theme.
Change row by hand by drawing the above character in
the handwriting field17.
Entering a space in the free text field with
handwriting recognition
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car
Themes.
3.
Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
Displays
Display
As a supplement to these appearances, it is possible to choose between Normal and Bright.
With Normal, the screen background is dark and
the text is light. This alternative is the default for
all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in
which the background is light and the text is dark.
This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong daylight.
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
The centre display can be used to change the
volume of the system sound or switch off the
system sound altogether.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Sound
3.
Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen touch
sounds. Drag the control to the desired volume.
System Volumes.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
Audio settings (p. 498)
Related information
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
•
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 109)
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 636)
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right18.
Related information
•
17
18
Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)
For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
125
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing system units
Changing system language
Units settings are defined in the centre display's
Settings menu.
Language settings are defined in the centre display menu Settings.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to System System Languages
and Units Units of Measurement.
3.
Select a unit standard:
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display
may mean that some owner's information is
not compliant with national or local laws and
regulations. Do not switch to a language that
is difficult to understand as this may make it
difficult to find your way back in the structure
on screen.
• Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
Celsius.
Other settings in the centre
display's top view
You can change settings and information for
many of the car's functions via the centre display.
1.
Open the top view by pressing on the tab at
the top or by dragging/swiping from the top
downwards across the screen.
2.
Press Settings to open the settings menu.
• Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Celsius.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to System
and Units.
3.
Select System Language. Languages that
support voice recognition have a voice recognition symbol.
> The language in the driver display, centre
display and head-up display is changed.
• US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahrenheit.
> The units in the driver display, centre display and head-up display are changed.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
Changing system language (p. 126)
Related information
•
•
•
126
System Languages
Top view with button for Settings.
3.
Press on one of the categories and the subcategories to navigate to the required setting.
4.
Change one or more settings. Different types
of setting are changed in different ways.
> The changes are saved immediately.
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
Changing system units (p. 126)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Open contextual setup in the centre
display
2.
Press Navigation Settings.
> A navigation settings page opens.
It is possible to use contextual setup for most of
the car's basic apps so that you can change settings directly in the top view in the centre display.
3.
Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
Press Close or the physical home button
beneath the centre display to close setup view.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
setting option, but not all.
Third party apps
Third party apps are not included in the car's system from the beginning, but are the type that can
be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings
are always made inside the app and not from the
top view.
A subcategory in the settings menu with different types
of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio buttons).
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 129)
Related information
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
•
Downloading apps (p. 501)
Top view with button for contextual setting.
Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing a
specific setting relating to the active function
shown on screen. The apps installed in the car
from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB, are
a part of Sensus and are part of the car's embedded functions. The settings for these apps can be
changed directly via contextual setting in the top
view.
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
When contextual setup is available:
1.
Drag down top view when an app is in
expanded mode, e.g. Navigation.
127
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
Resetting settings in the centre
display
In the event of a change of ownership, user data
and system settings should be restored to factory settings.
It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings
defined in the centre display settings menu.
The settings in the car can be reset at different
levels. Restore all user data and system settings
to the original factory settings in the event of a
change of ownership. In the event of a change of
ownership it is also important to change the
owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
There are two different types of resets for settings in the settings menu:
• Factory reset - clears all data and files and
resets all settings to their default values.
• Reset Personal Settings - clears personal
data and resets personal settings to their
default values.
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
•
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 133)
Press OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
the active profile or Reset for all profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Two types of reset
Related information
•
4.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 129)
Resetting settings
Follow these instructions to reset your settings.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
128
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to System
3.
Select the required reset type.
> A pop-up window is shown.
Factory reset.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Table showing centre display
settings
Subcategories
Subcategories
The settings menu in the centre display has a
number of main categories and subcategories
where settings and information for many of the
car's functions are collected.
Locking
TV*
Parking Brake and Suspension
Video
Wipers
Communication
There are seven main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication,
Climate and System.
Sound
Subcategories
Phone
In turn, each category contains a number of subcategories and setting options. The tables below
show the first level of subcategories. The setting
options for a function or area are described in
more detail in the corresponding section of the
owner's manual.
Tone
Text Messages
Balance
Android Auto*
System Volumes
Apple CarPlay*
Navigation
Subcategories
Bluetooth Devices
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other settings are global, which means they are not linked
to a driver profile.
Subcategories
Wi-Fi
Map
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
Route and Guidance
Car Modem Internet*
My Car
Traffic
Volvo On Call*
Subcategories
Displays
IntelliSafe
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode*
Lights and Lighting
Media
Volvo Service Networks
Subcategories
Climate
AM/FM radio
The main category Climate has no subcategories.
DAB*
Gracenote®
Mirrors and Convenience
}}
* Option/accessory. 129
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
System
Subcategories
Driver Profile
Date and Time
System Languages and Units
Privacy and Data
Keyboard Layouts
Voice Control*
Factory reset
System Information
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 103)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be
adapted according to the driver's personal preferences and can be saved in one or more driver
profiles.
The personal settings are automatically saved in
the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to
a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the
car is adapted to the settings of that specific
driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver
profiles?
Many of the settings defined in the car will be
saved automatically in the active driver profile
unless the profile is protected. In the car, the settings defined are either personal or global. Only
personal settings are saved in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation*, audio and media system,
language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings, can
be changed but are not saved to a specific driver
profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles.
They remain the same regardless of which driver
profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to add
additional languages to the keyboard, these
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved
to a specific driver profile - the settings are
global.
Personal preferences
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre display brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by
this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X the brightness setting is a personal setting.
Related information
•
•
•
Selecting driver profile (p. 131)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 132)
•
•
Protect driver profile (p. 132)
•
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 129)
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 133)
Global settings
The global settings and parameters are not
changed when changing between driver profiles.
130
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Selecting driver profile
When the centre display has been started, the
selected driver profile is shown at the top of the
screen. The driver profile last used is the one
that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It
is possible to change to another driver profile
after the car has been unlocked. However, if the
remote control key has been linked to a driver
profile then this is what is selected when the car
is started.
There are two options for changing to another
driver profile.
4.
Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Renaming a driver profile
It is possible to change the name of the different
driver profiles used in the car.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press System
3.
Select Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
4.
Tap in the box Profile Name.
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to
change the name. Tap on
to close
the keyboard.
5.
Save the name change by pressing Back or
Close.
> The name has now been changed.
Related information
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 130)
•
•
Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 132)
Option 1:
1.
Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
in the top of the centre display when the display has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
2.
Select the driver profile required.
3.
Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Driver Profiles.
NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space, as
the profile name will not then be saved.
Option 2:
Related information
1.
Drag down the top view in the centre display.
2.
Press Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
•
•
3.
Select the driver profile required.
Selecting driver profile (p. 131)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)
131
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Protect driver profile
Related information
In some cases it is preferable not to save various
settings defined in the car to the active driver
profile. In this case, it is possible to protect the
driver profile.
•
NOTE
Protecting a driver profile is only possible
when the car is stationary.
To protect a driver profile:
132
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press System
3.
Select Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
Driver Profiles.
4.
Select Protect Profile to protect the profile.
5.
Save your profile protection option by pressing Back/Close.
> When the profile is protected, settings
defined in the car will not be saved automatically to the profile. Instead, your
changes must be saved manually by
pressing Save current settings to the
profile. When the profile is unprotected,
on the other hand, your settings will be
saved automatically to the profile.
Driver profiles (p. 130)
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile.
The driver profile along with all of its settings will
then be automatically selected every time the car
is used with that specific remote control key.
The first time the remote control key is used, it is
not linked to any specific driver profile. When the
car is started, the Guest profile will automatically
be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually without
linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
profile does not need to be selected when that
specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a driver
profile
NOTE
Connecting a remote control key to a driver
profile is only possible when the car is stationary.
First select the profile to be linked to the key, if
the profile to be linked is not already active. The
active profile can then be linked to the key.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
2.
Press System
3.
Select the desired profile. The display returns
to the home view. The Guest profile cannot
be linked to a key.
4.
Drag down the top view again and tap on
Settings System Driver Profiles
Edit Profile.
5.
Driver Profiles.
Select Connect key to link the profile with
the key. It is not possible to link a driver profile to a different key than the one currently
being used in the car. If there are multiple
keys in the car, the message More than one
key is found, put the key you want to
connect on backup reader will be displayed.
6.
Press OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile
and will remain linked as long as the
Connect key box is not unticked.
Related information
•
•
•
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.
Driver profiles (p. 130)
NOTE
Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
Remote control key (p. 239)
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press System Factory reset
Personal Settings.
3.
Select one of the options Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Reset
Related information
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 130)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
> When the message Profile connected
to key is shown, the key and the driver
profile are linked.
133
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Message in centre display
The centre display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of different
events.
Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the form
of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have
higher priority than messages shown in the status bar and require acknowledgement/action
before they disappear. Messages that need to be
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
display.
Managing messages in the centre
display
Messages in the centre display are handled in
centre display views.
Related information
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 134)
•
Handling a message saved from the centre
display (p. 135)
•
Messages in the driver display (p. 99)
Message in the centre display's top view.
Message in the centre display's top view.
The centre display shows messages that are of
lower priority for the driver.
Some messages in the centre display have a button (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for
e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to
the message.
Most messages are shown above the centre display's status bar. After a while, or when any
required action related to the message has been
taken, the message disappears from the status
bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or a button for activating/deactivating a function linked
to the message.
134
•
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
–
Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
Handling a message saved from the
centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
–
Close the message by tapping on it, or allow
the message to close automatically after a
while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
Related information
•
Message in centre display (p. 134)
Handling a message saved from the centre
display (p. 135)
Messages in the driver display (p. 99)
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted
automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information
•
•
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned
in the top view in the centre display.
•
•
Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/
deactivating a function linked to the message.
For messages without buttons:
–
2.
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.
•
Message in centre display (p. 134)
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 134)
Messages in the driver display (p. 99)
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view
of the centre display.
Reading a saved message
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
> A list of saved messages is shown. Messages with an arrow to the right can be
maximised.
135
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Head-up display*
The head-up display supplements the car's
driver display and projects information from the
driver display onto the windscreen. The projected image can only be seen from the driver position.
NOTE
The driver's ability to see the information in
the head-up display is impaired by the following:
•
•
use of polarising sunglasses
•
•
objects on the display unit's cover glass
a driving position which means that the
driver is not sitting centred in the seat
unfavourable light conditions.
IMPORTANT
Incoming phone calls.
The head-up display shows warnings and information relating to speed, cruise control functions,
navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road
Sign Information and incoming phone calls can
also be shown in the head up display.
The display unit from which the information is
projected is located in the instrument panel.
To avoid damage to the display unit's cover
glass - do not store any objects on the cover
glass and make sure that no objects fall down
onto it.
Examples of what can be shown in the display.
Speed
Cruise control
Navigation
Road signs
A number of symbols can be shown temporarily
in the head-up display, e.g.:
If the warning symbol illuminates - read
the warning message in the driver display.
If the information symbol illuminates read the message in the driver display.
136
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The snowflake symbol illuminates in
the event of a risk of icy conditions.
NOTE
Certain visual defects may cause headaches
and a feeling of stress during the use of the
head-up display.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 137)
•
•
Cleaning the head up display* (p. 637)
Activating and deactivating the
head-up display*
The head-up display can be activated and deactivated when the car has been started.
Head-up display when replacing the windscreen* (p. 607)
Press the Head-up Display
button in the centre display
function view. An indicator in
the button illuminates when the
function is activated.
City Safety in the head-up display
In the event of a collision warning, the information
in the head-up display is replaced by a graphic
for City Safety. This graphic is illuminated even if
the head-up display is switched off.
Related information
•
•
Settings for head-up display* (p. 138)
Head-up display* (p. 136)
The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the
driver's attention.
* Option/accessory. 137
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Settings for head-up display*
Adjust the settings for the head-up display's projection onto the windscreen.
Adjusting brightness and vertical
position
Selecting display options
Select functions to be shown in the head-up display.
1.
Press the Head-up Display Adjustments
button in the centre display function view.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
2.
Press My Car Displays
Display Options.
Adjust the brightness and vertical position of
the projected image in the driver's field of
vision using the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
3.
Select one or more functions:
•
•
•
•
Confirm
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions. The
brightness is also affected by the adjustment of
the brightness in the car's other displays.
Settings can be defined when the car has been
started and a projected image is shown on the
windscreen.
Head-Up
Lowering the position
The height position can be stored in the memory
function for the power* front seat using the keypad in the driver's door.
Show Navigation
Show Road Sign Information
Show Driver Support
Show Phone.
The setting is saved as a personal setting in the
driver profile.
Reducing the brightness
Increasing the brightness
Raising the position
138
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Calibrate the horizontal position
Related information
The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display
unit is replaced. Calibration means that the projected image is rotated clockwise or anticlockwise.
•
•
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Select My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options Head-Up Display
Calibration.
3.
Calibrate the image's horizontal position with
the steering wheel's right keypad.
Rotate anticlockwise
Rotate clockwise
Confirm
•
•
Head-up display* (p. 136)
Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 137)
Driver profiles (p. 130)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
Voice recognition19
The driver can use voice recognition to control
certain functions in the media player, Bluetoothconnected phone, climate system and Volvo's
navigation system*.
Voice commands offer additional convenience
and assist the driver to not be distracted so that
he or she can concentrate on driving, the road
and the traffic situation.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and
complying with all applicable rules of the road.
Voice control system microphone
Voice control is done in dialogue form with the
user saying commands and receiving verbal
}}
* Option/accessory. 139
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
responses from the system. The voice recognition
system uses the same microphone as Bluetoothconnected devices, and the voice recognition
system's responses are given via the car's speakers. In some cases, a text message is also shown
in the driver display. Functions are controlled
from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Settings are made via the centre display.
Using voice recognition20
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. Download updates for optimal performance from support.volvocars.com.
Remember the following:
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Depress the steering wheel
button for voice recognition
to activate the system and
initiate a dialogue using voice
commands.
•
Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a
normal tempo.
•
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands
during this time).
•
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, windows
and panoramic roof* closed.
Using voice recognition (p. 140)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 141)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 200)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 142)
Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:
•
•
by saying "Cancel".
with a long press on the voice recognition
.
button on the steering wheel
Example of voice recognition control
Press
, say "Call [Forename] [Surname]
[number category]" - dials the selected contact
from the phone book. If the contact has several
phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the
right category must be referred to.
So press
Mobile".
and say "Call Robin Smith
Commands/phrases
The following commands are always available for
use:
•
•
•
"Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction
in the ongoing dialogue.
"Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
"Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system
replies with the commands available in the
current situation, a prompt or an example.
Commands for specific functions such as phone
and radio are described in specific sections.
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice recognition
when the
system voice is speaking and say the next command.
19
20
140
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Digits
The number commands are stated differently
depending on the function to be controlled:
•
•
•
Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number, e.g.
zero three one two two four four three
(03122443).
House numbers can be spoken individually
or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22).
For English and Dutch, several groups can
be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twentytwo (22 22). For English, double or triple can
be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can
be given within the range 0-2300.
Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight
point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point
two or hundred four point two (104.2).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
21
22
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition21
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or
dictate brief messages with voice control commands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice
recognition command must include contact information that is entered in the phone book. If a
contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone
numbers then the number category can also be
stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin
Smith Mobile".
Press
mands:
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 141)
"Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
from the phone book.
•
"Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
•
•
"Recent calls" - displays the call list.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 200)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 142)
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Using voice recognition (p. 140)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 200)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 142)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
and say one of the following com-
•
Voice recognition (p. 139)
this function to work, the car must be connected to the Internet.
"Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which
message should be read out.
"Message to [contact]" users are requested to say a brief message. The message is
then repeated aloud and the user can
choose to send22 or revise the message. For
Applies to certain markets.
Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
* Option/accessory. 141
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Voice control of radio and media23
Commands for radio and media player device
control are shown below.
Tap on
mands:
•
"Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
•
"Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
•
"Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
song.
•
"Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
album.
•
"Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel*24.
•
"Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
the selected radio channel.
•
"Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected
radio frequency in the current frequency
band. If no radio source is active, the FM
band is started by default.
•
•
23
24
142
and say one of the following com-
"Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" starts the selected radio frequency in the
selected frequency band.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
"Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
Settings for voice recognition25
"Radio AM" - starts AM radio.
Settings for the voice control system are
selected here.
"DAB " - starts DAB radio*.
"TV" - starts playback from TV*24.
"CD" - starts playback from CD*.
System
Voice Control
"USB" - starts playback from USB.
Settings can be made within the following areas:
"iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
"Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Bluetooth-connected media source.
• Repeat Voice Command
• Gender
• Speech Rate
"Similar music" — plays back music similar
to the music currently playing back from USB
devices.
Select audio settings under:
Related information
•
•
•
Settings
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Using voice recognition (p. 140)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 141)
•
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 200)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 142)
Audio settings
Settings Sound
Voice Control
System Volumes
Language settings
Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language list .
Changing the language also affects menu, message and help texts.
Settings System System Languages
and Units System Language
"Radio" - starts FM radio.
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
25
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Using voice recognition (p. 140)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 141)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 200)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Audio settings (p. 498)
Changing system language (p. 126)
Applies to certain markets.
143
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
Lighting control
The different lighting controls are used to control
both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand
stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior
lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using
a thumbwheel on the instrument panel.
Headlamp levelling1 is also adjusted using a
thumbwheel on the instrument panel.
Exterior lighting
Position
Specification
Position
Daytime running lights.
Specification
Daytime running lights and position
lamps in daylight.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position lamps in
weak daylight or darkness, or when
the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
Daytime running lights and position
lamps.
Position lamps when the car is
parked.A
The Active main beam function can
be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Dipped beam and position lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be
moved to
position from another position to switch on
only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
Volvo recommends that
when the vehicle is driven.
mode is used
When the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II, the following functions are available
for the rotating ring's different positions:
1
146
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
WARNING
The car's audio system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
LED2
A car with
headlamps* has automatic headlamp
levelling and therefore does not have the thumbwheel
for headlamp levelling.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 147)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interior lighting (p. 158)
Position lamps (p. 149)
Using direction indicators (p. 153)
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
Several light functions can be adjusted and activated via the centre display. For example, active
main beam, home safe lighting and approach
light.
Using main beam (p. 151)
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
Dipped beam (p. 150)
2.
Press My Car
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 154)
3.
Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting
and then the function that needs to be
adjusted.
Rear fog lamp (p. 155)
Active bending lights* (p. 154)
Lights and Lighting.
Brake lights (p. 156)
Related information
Emergency brake lights (p. 156)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 156)
•
Lighting control (p. 146)
Active main beam (p. 151)
Using home safe lighting (p. 157)
Approach light duration (p. 157)
Using direction indicators (p. 153)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 126)
Function view in centre display (p. 116)
Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling1
2
1
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
* Option/accessory. 147
LIGHTING
Adjusting headlamp level
Load case
Thumbwheel
position
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
1
Headlamp levelling3 is adjusted using one of the
thumbwheels in the instrument panel.
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
headlamp level. Lower the beam if the car is
heavily laden.
1.
Keep the engine running or the car's electrical system in ignition position I.
2.
Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
headlamp level.
The position in which the thumbwheel should be
set for a number of load cases is shown below.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
220 kg load in the cargo area.
Thumbwheel in position 0
148
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
Related information
•
Thumbwheel in position 1
Load case
Thumbwheel
position
Only driver.
0
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
0
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
1
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
3
Driver and maximum load in the
cargo area.
Examples of thumbwheel position.
Lighting control (p. 146)
2
LIGHTING
Position lamps
Position lamps can be used so that other road
users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The
position lamp is switched on with the rotating
ring on the stalk switch.
position from another position to switch on only
the position lamps instead of other lighting.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on. The driver should
.
turn to a position other than
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside,
the rear position lamps come on (if not already
switched on) to warn road users approaching
from behind. This takes place irrespective of the
position of the rotating ring or the ignition position of the car's electrical system.
Daytime running lights
The car has sensors that detect the light conditions in the surroundings. The daytime running
lights are switched on when the rotating ring on
,
or
the stalk switch is in position
as well as when the car's electrical system
is in ignition position II. In position
, the
headlamps change automatically to dipped
beam in weak daylight or darkness.
Related information
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the
position - the
position lamps are switched on (number plate
lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition position
II then the daytime running lights are switched on
instead of the front position lamps. When the
rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps
are switched on regardless of the ignition position of the car's electrical system.
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 146)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb, front (p. 615)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating
ring can be moved to the position lamp
}}
149
LIGHTING
||
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL4) are
switched on when the car is driven in daylight.
The car automatically changes lighting from daytime running light to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also
takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring
position, dipped beam is activated
in the
automatically in weak daylight or darkness or
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II.
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
mode for tunnel detecswitch must be in
tion to work.
Related information
WARNING
•
•
•
•
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
Lighting control (p. 146)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Daytime running lights (p. 149)
Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 614)
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 146)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Dipped beam (p. 150)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb, front (p. 615)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated automatically if:
•
•
•
the front fog lamps* are activated
the rear fog lamp is activated
the front and rear fog lamps are activated
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the
position, dipped beam is always activated when
the car's electrical system is in ignition position II.
4
150
Daytime Running Lights
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Using main beam
Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk
switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting
and should be used when driving in the dark for
better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle
other road users.
Deactivate by moving the stalk switch backwards.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Related information
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 146)
Active main beam
Active main beam is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from
oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in
front, and then switches from main beam to
dipped beam.
Active main beam (p. 151)
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 615)
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to
main beam flash position. Main beam comes
on until the stalk switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in
5 or
. Activate main
position
beam by moving the stalk switch forwards.
5
When dipped beam is activated.
Active main beam is activated with the rotating ring on
the stalk switch in position
.
The function can also take streetlights into
account. Main beam is reactivated when the camera sensor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles
or vehicles ahead.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx.
12 mph) or higher.
}}
151
LIGHTING
||
If active main beam is deactivated while main
beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to
dipped beam.
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
When active main beam is activated, the symbol
illuminates with a white glow in the driver
display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the
main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light
beam shines with slightly more than dipped
beam.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights from vehicles in front.
Car with LED6 headlamps*
If the active main beam has the on/off functionality7 then the lighting returns to main beam about
a second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
If the active main beam has adaptive functionality7 then, unlike what happens during conventional dimming, the light beam continues to illuminate with main beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the
6 LED (Light
7 Depending
152
If this symbol is shown in the driver display, together with the message Active
High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching between
main and dipped beam must be performed manually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still
position. The
symbol extinbe in the
guishes when these message are shown.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards
oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both
sides of the vehicle.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Limitations for active main beam
The camera sensor on which the function is
based has limitations.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable
e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain.
When active main beam becomes available again,
or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,
symbol illuthe message goes out and the
minates.
WARNING
Active main beam is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are
favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.
Emitting Diode)
on the car's equipment level.
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Related information
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 146)
Using main beam (p. 151)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Using direction indicators
NOTE
The car's direction indicators are operated with
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is
moved.
•
This automatic flashing sequence can be
stopped by moving the stalk switch
immediately in the opposite direction.
•
If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Related information
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. If the function is
deactivated via the centre display, the lamps
will flash once.
•
•
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 156)
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 147)
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 616)
153
LIGHTING
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide
maximum illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED8 headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level.
The function is only active in weak daylight or
darkness and only when the car is moving and
dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
The front fog lamps emit a stronger beam than
dipped beam and are therefore additionally
effective in fog.
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be deactivated/activated via the centre display's function view.
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Related information
•
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively.
Active bending lights follow steering wheel movements to provide maximum illumination in bends
and junctions and can thereby provide the driver
with improved visibility.
The function is activated automatically when the
car is started. In the event of a fault in the funcsymbol illuminates in the driver
tion, the
display at the same time as the driver display
shows an explanatory text.
8
154
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 147)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 154)
Button for front fog lamps.
The rear fog lamps can only be switched on when
the car's electrical system is in ignition position II
and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in
position
,
or
.
Press the button to activate and deactivate. The
symbol illuminates in the driver display
when the front fog lamps are switched on.
The front fog lamps switch off automatically when
the car is switched off or when the rotating ring
position.
on the stalk switch is set to the
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
NOTE
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Cornering lights*
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than
the normal rear lights and should only be used in
reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or
dust so that other road users have an early warning of a vehicle ahead.
The front fog lamps can include the cornering
lights function, which temporarily illuminates the
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction
the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or
in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
Press the On/Off button. The
symbol in
the driver display illuminates when the rear fog
lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when:
•
the car is switched off or when the rotating
ring on the stalk switch is set to the
position
•
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
off.
The function is activated in weak daylight or darkness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
or
position and the speed of the
the
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx.
20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be activated and deactivated via the centre display.
The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car,
on the driver's side.
Related information
•
ignition position II is active and the rotating
ring on the stalk switch is in position
or
•
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
on.
•
•
•
•
•
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
Lighting control (p. 146)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Rear fog lamp (p. 155)
Active bending lights* (p. 154)
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 147)
Related information
•
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 146)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 154)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 618)
* Option/accessory. 155
LIGHTING
Brake lights
Emergency brake lights
Hazard warning flashers
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. It is also switched on when
the car is braked automatically by one of the
driver support systems.
The function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a
constant glow.
Hazard warning flashers warn other road users
by means of all of the car's direction indicators
being activated simultaneously. The function can
be used to give a warning in the event of traffic
hazards.
Related information
•
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 156)
Brake functions (p. 431)
The emergency brake lights are activated during
heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at
high speeds.
After the driver brakes to a low speed and then
releases the brake, the brake light returns to normal glow.
The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at
the same time. These flash until the driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again or
switches off the car's hazard warning flashers.
Related information
•
•
•
156
Brake lights (p. 156)
Foot brake (p. 431)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 156)
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully that
the emergency brake lights are activated and the
speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to
flash after the emergency brake lights have stopped flashing and are then deactivated automatically when the car drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed.
LIGHTING
NOTE
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
flashers may vary between countries.
Related information
•
•
Using home safe lighting
Approach light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
Approach lighting is switched on when the car is
unlocked and is used to switch on the car's
lighting at a distance.
To activate the function:
The function is activated when the remote control
key is used for unlocking. At which point, position
lamps, exterior handle lighting*, number plate
lighting, interior roof lamps, floor lamps and cargo
area lighting are switched on. If a door is opened
within the activation time, the time for the lighting
in the outside handles* and the interior lighting
will be extended.
Emergency brake lights (p. 156)
1.
Switch off the car.
Using direction indicators (p. 153)
2.
Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
toward the instrument panel and release.
3.
Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, a symbol illuminates in the driver display and position lamps,
exterior handle lighting* and number plate lighting are switched on.
The length of time that home safe lighting
remains on can be set via the centre display.
Related information
•
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 147)
The function can be activated and deactivated via
the centre display.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 147)
•
•
Using home safe lighting (p. 157)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Approach light duration (p. 157)
* Option/accessory. 157
LIGHTING
Interior lighting
The interior is equipped with several different
types of lighting to improve the experience. This
includes, reading lamps, glovebox lighting and
ground lighting.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes
from when:
•
the car has been switched off and its electrical system is in ignition position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but it has not
been started.
Front roof lighting
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Rear roof lighting
The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
which is also used as passenger compartment
lighting.
Reading lighting
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing
the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the button in the roof console.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
With the automatic system activated, the light
indicator in the button illuminates and the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and
off according to the following.
Reading lamps above the rear seat.
Passenger compartment lighting:
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
•
illuminates when the car is unlocked and
when it is switched off
•
extinguishes when the car is started and
when it is locked
•
comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed
•
remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side
doors is open.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting
158
In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units,
one on each side of the roof.
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Decor lighting
Related information
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
The ambient light is switched on when you open
the doors and is switched off when the car is
locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be
adapted in the centre display and also precisely
adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument
panel.
•
•
•
•
Sun visor mirror lighting*
Ambience lights*
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Glovebox lighting
The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is
switched on and off respectively when the cover
is opened or closed.
Ground lighting*
The ground lighting is switched on or off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
Door sill lighting
The door sill lighting is switched on or off when a
door is opened or closed.
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on or
off when the tailgate is opened or closed.
The lighting in the tailgate can be manually
switched on and off using a button attached to
the lamp*. Note that the lamp is off when the tailgate is opened if it was off when the tailgate was
closed.9
There is also a torch* recessed into the righthand side panel in the cargo area.9
9
Adjusting interior lighting (p. 160)
Lighting control (p. 146)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 580)
The car is equipped with LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These
lights are switched on when the car is running.
The ambience light can be adapted in the centre
display and also precisely adjusted using the
thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in storage compartments in
doors
The lighting in the storage compartments in the
doors is switched on when you open the doors
and is switched off when the car is locked. The
brightness can be precisely adjusted using the
thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in the tunnel console's front
cup holder
The lighting in the front cup holders is switched
on when the car is unlocked and is switched off
when the car is locked. The brightness can be
precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the
instrument panel.
Only applies to Volvo Ocean Race.
* Option/accessory. 159
LIGHTING
Adjusting interior lighting
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used. The
interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and certain light
functions can also be adjusted via the centre
display.
The thumbwheel on the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering wheel, is used to
adjust the brightness of the
display light, control light, ambient light and ambience light*
Adjusting ambient decor illumination
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3.
2.
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Choose between By Temperature and By
Colour in order to change the colour of the
light.
With the By Temperature option, the light
changes according to the set passenger
compartment temperature.
Choose between the following settings:
•
Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
•
Under Ambient Light Level, select from
Reduced and Full.
Adjusting ambience light*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is running.
160
Changing the brightness of the lights
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
With the By Colour option, the Theme
Colours subcategory can be used to adjust
further.
Related information
•
•
•
Interior lighting (p. 158)
Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 147)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
•
The car contains controls for windows, glass
and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are
laminated.
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 175)
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
•
Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 219)
Laminated glass
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
All power windows and sun blinds* have pinch
protection which is deployed if they are blocked
by any object while opening or closing.
The windscreen has laminated glass, and laminated glass is available as an option for certain
other glass areas. Laminated glass is reinforced,
which provides better protection against breakins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass.
In the event of blocking, the movement stops and
then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm
(approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or
to full ventilation position).
It is possible to force pinch protection when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is formed,
by continuing to press the control in the same
direction.
If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a
reset sequence can be tested.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is
laminated1
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
162
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 162)
Panorama roof* (p. 168)
Power windows (p. 163)
Related information
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 165)
•
Using the sun blind* (p. 165)
Head-up display* (p. 136)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)
•
•
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 163)
Operating power windows (p. 164)
Using the sun blind* (p. 165)
Panorama roof* (p. 168)
Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Reset sequence for pinch
protection
If a problem occurs with the electrical functions
for the electric windows, a reset sequence can
be tested.
Power windows
WARNING
The power windows are operated using the control panels in each respective door. The driver's
door has controls for operating all windows and
also to activate the child safety locks.
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
•
•
If a problem persists, or if it concerns the panoramic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop2.
•
Reset the power window
1. Start with the window in closed position.
2.
Then operate it in the manual position 3
times upwards to closed position.
> The system is initiated automatically.
Related information
•
•
•
2
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 162)
Operating power windows (p. 164)
Using the sun blind* (p. 165)
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the
controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or
windows from being opened from the inside.
Controls for rear windows.
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Related information
•
•
•
Operating power windows (p. 164)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 162)
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 163)
Controls for front windows.
The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory. 163
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Operating power windows
WARNING
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door.
Check that children or other passengers are
not at risk of crushing when all the windows
are closed with a remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle.
The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
•
•
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Operating the power windows.
Operating with auto. Move one of the controls up or down to the end position and
release it. The window runs automatically to
its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used, the
ignition position must be I or II. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the
car has been switched off and after the ignition
has been switched off - although not after a door
has been opened. Only one control panel can be
operated at a time.
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
164
NOTE
Operating without auto. Move one of the
controls gently up or down. The power windows move up or down as long as the control
is held in position.
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph),
but they can be closed.
The driver always bears responsibility for following traffic regulations in force.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Power windows (p. 163)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 162)
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 163)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 241)
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Using the sun blind*
Rearview and door mirrors
The sun blinds are built into each rear door.
The rearview mirrors and door mirrors are used
to give the driver better visibility to the rear.
Rear door – manually operated
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is adjusted easily by
angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror
can be fitted with HomeLink*, automatic dimming* and compass*.
Door mirrors
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear to be further away
than they actually are.
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Hook with associated catch
–
Pull up the sun blind and attach it to the
hook in the upper door frame.
The window can still be opened and closed with
the sun blind up.
Related information
•
•
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 162)
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 163)
Power windows (p. 163)
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door control panel. There
are also a number of automatic settings that can
be linked to the memory function buttons for the
power seat*.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
HomeLink®* (p. 490)
Compass* (p. 494)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 166)
Angling the door mirrors (p. 167)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
* Option/accessory. 165
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Automatic dimming is always active while driving, apart
from when gearbox reverse position is selected.
Manual dimming
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a
control in the mirror's lower edge.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior
rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change takes place gradually.
Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior
rearview mirror and the door mirrors.
Related information
•
•
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 165)
Angling the door mirrors (p. 167)
To change dimming sensitivity:
Control for manual dimming.
1.
Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2.
Return to normal mode by moving the control
towards the windscreen.
The control for manual dimming is not available
on mirrors with automatic dimming.
166
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Mirrors and Convenience.
The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors
- one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects
ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor
detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
For the door mirrors to be equipped with automatic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must
also be equipped with automatic dimming.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Angling the door mirrors
To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door
mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the
driver. There are a number of automatic settings
that can also be linked to the memory function
buttons for the power seat*.
Using controls for door mirrors
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
Folding in rearview mirrors electrically*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces.
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2.
Release them after approximately 1 second.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
retracted position.
Angling during parking3
A door mirror can be angled down for the driver
to view the side of the road when parking, for
example.
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Note that the button may need to be pressed
twice, depending on whether it was already preselected. The button flashes when the door mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is disengaged, the door mirror automatically starts to
return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches
its original position after approx. 8 seconds.
Resetting to neutral
Automatic angling during parking3
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be reset electrically to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending*
to work correctly.
With this setting, the door mirror is automatically
angled down when reverse gear is selected. The
folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted.
You can make the door mirror return to its original position by pressing the L or R button twice.
Controls for door mirrors.
1.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door control panel. Ignition
position must be at least I.
Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down
the L and R buttons simultaneously.
1.
2.
Fold them out again by pressing the L and R
buttons simultaneously.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
1.
3.
Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
3.
Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled.
2.
Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3 Only
in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Mirrors and Convenience.
}}
* Option/accessory. 167
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
Automatic retraction when locking*
Panorama roof*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
control key, the door mirrors can be automatically
retracted/extended.
The panorama roof is divided into two glass sections. The front section can be opened vertically
at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizontally (open position). The rear section is fixed
roof glass.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate/deactivate.
Mirrors and Convenience.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a
sun blind made of perforated fabric and located
under the glass roof to provide extra protection
from factors such as strong sunlight.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 165)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 166)
•
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
168
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
IMPORTANT
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
•
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system
must be in ignition position I or II.
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch
surfaces or damage strips.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Wind deflector
Operating the panorama roof*
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control in the roof panel and both are
equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
raised when the panorama roof is in the open
position.
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
4
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 169)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 171)
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 162)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 241)
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
IMPORTANT
•
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch
surfaces or damage strips.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system
must be in ignition position I or II.
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are
not at risk of crushing when all the windows
are closed with a remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle.
IMPORTANT
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
The movement of the roof is stopped if the control is released during manual operation, or when
the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the
maximum opening or closing position. The move-
}}
* Option/accessory. 169
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
ment of both panoramic roof and sun blind are
also stopped if the roof control is operated again
in the opposite direction to the current direction
of movement.
Open and close ventilation position
Fully open and close the panoramic
roof using the roof control
The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also
equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises
with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can
be tested.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can be
opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
panoramic roof must be fully closed before
the sun blind can be fully closed.
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the control upward once.
Close by pressing the control downward
once.
When the ventilation position is selected the front
glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
selected, then it opens automatically approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
Operation, manual mode
Operation, automatic mode
Manual operation
1. To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the position for manual opening.
2.
Open the panoramic roof to comfort position
- press the control backwards a second time
to the position for manual opening.
3.
Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third
time to the position for manual opening.
The sun blind follows automatically if the panoramic roof is closed from ventilation position.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the manual closing position instead.
170
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2.
Open the panoramic roof to comfort position
- press the control backwards a second time
to the position for automatic opening and
release.
3.
Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third
time to the position for automatic opening
and release.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the automatic closing position instead.
•
•
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 162)
Automatic closing of the panoramic
roof's* sun blind
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
With this function, the sun blind is closed automatically 15 minutes after the car has been
locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in
order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car's upholstery from
sun-fading.
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 241)
The function is deactivated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated or
deactivated in the centre display.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car
–
To open - press the control rearward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
–
To close - press the control forward/downward to the automatic operation position
twice and release.
Related information
•
•
Panorama roof* (p. 168)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 171)
Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
Automatic operation - rapid opening or
closing
The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened
or closed simultaneously:
NOTE
The sun blind is also closed when all windows
are closed using the remote control key or
keyless opening* with a door handle.
Related information
•
•
•
Panorama roof* (p. 168)
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 169)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 162)
}}
* Option/accessory. 171
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Using windscreen wipers
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 241)
Together with the washer fluid, the wipers are
used to improve visibility as well as headlamp
pattern.
The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen.
Different settings for the windscreen wiper are
made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch.
The washer nozzles are heated* automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from
freezing.
Information indicating that the washer fluid needs
topping up appears in the driver display when
there is approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remaining.
Related information
•
•
172
Using the rain sensor (p. 173)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 175)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 177)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 174)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 176)
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 651)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 650)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 649)
Right-hand stalk switch.
Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency.
Single sweep
Lower the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time unit
with the thumbwheel when intermittent
wiping is selected.
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)
Using the rain sensor
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 174)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 176)
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the
right-hand stalk switch.
Continuous wiping
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the wipers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Wiper blades in service position (p. 651)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 650)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 649)
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen and rear window is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Related information
•
•
•
Right-hand stalk switch.
Rain sensor button
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
is shown in the driver display.
symbol
Using the rain sensor (p. 173)
Activating the rain sensor
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 175)
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the electrical system in ignition position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position for
a single sweep.
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 177)
}}
173
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen.
sor button
Related information
•
Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 175)
•
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward.
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 177)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 176)
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
or moving the stalk switch
sensor button
up to another wiper program.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when
wiper blades are set in service position. The rain
sensor is reactivated when service mode has
been deactivated.
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 174)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 651)
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen.
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The memory function for the rain sensor can be
activated in such a way that the rain sensor button does not need to be depressed each time the
car is started:
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 650)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 649)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)
Related information
•
•
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running
or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the driver
display extinguishes.
174
Wipers.
Using the rain sensor (p. 173)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 175)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 177)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 176)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 651)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 650)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 649)
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the
windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and
headlamp washers are started using the righthand stalk switch.
Starting windscreen and headlamp
washers
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
Headlamp washing*
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at a defined interval when the headlamps are switched on.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the
symbol, is shown in the driver display, then
the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is
switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it. The headlamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is
switched on.
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
–
Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to start the windscreen and
headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has
been released.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 173)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 177)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 174)
}}
* Option/accessory. 175
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 651)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 650)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 649)
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear
window. Washing/wiping is started and settings
are changed by means of the right-hand steering
wheel stalk switch.
Activating the rear window wiper and
washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper motor is equipped with
overheating protection which means that it is
switched off if it overheats. The rear window
wiper works again after a cooling-down
period.
Select
for intermittent wiping with the
rear window wiper.
–
Select
for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch forward to start rear window washing
and wiping.
Related information
•
•
176
Using the rain sensor (p. 173)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 175)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 177)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 174)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Wiper blades in service position (p. 651)
•
•
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 650)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 649)
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates rear window wiping. The
function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate wiping when reversing.
Wipers.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 173)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 175)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 176)
•
•
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 174)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 651)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 650)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 649)
177
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Change the backrest inclination by turning
the control knob.
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Related information
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion* by pumping up/down.1
Change the length* of the seat cushion by
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting
the handle and adjusting the distance to the
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back2.
1
2
180
•
•
•
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Only applies to the driver's seat.
Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Power* front seat
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The power
seat can be moved forwards/backwards and
upwards/downwards. The front edge of the seat
cushion can be raised/lowered as well as
adjusted in length* and the backrest inclination
can be changed. The lumbar support* can be
adjusted upward/downward/forward/backward.3
The seat can be adjusted for a period of time
after unlocking the door without the engine running. Seat adjustment can always be performed
when the engine is running. Adjustment can also
be performed for a period of time after the
engine has been switched off.
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
Adjusting the power* front seat
Set the preferred seat position using the control
on the front seat's seating section. To set the
various comfort functions, turn the multifunction
control4 up/down.
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
IMPORTANT
The power seats have overload protection
that is triggered if any seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, remove the object and
then move the seat again.
Related information
•
•
•
3
4
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards.
Not available in cars with two-way lumbar support*.
The illustration shows the controls from a car with fourway lumbar support*. Cars with two-way lumbar support*
do not have the rotatable multifunction control.
In cars with four-way lumbar support*, turn
the multifunction control4 up/down to set the
different comfort functions. In cars with twoway lumbar support*, use the round button to
adjust the lumbar support forward/backward.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by
adjusting the control up/down.
}}
* Option/accessory. 181
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
||
Move the seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest inclination by adjusting
the control forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be lowered fully forward.
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
Storing position for seat, door
mirrors and head-up display*
You can store the position for power* seat, door
mirrors and head-up display* in the memory buttons.
Store two different positions for the power* seat,
the door mirrors and the head-up display* using
the memory buttons. The buttons are located on
the inside of one of the front doors or both*.
Related information
•
•
•
182
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Button M for storing settings.
Memory button
Memory button
Storing a position
1.
Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display
to the desired position.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
2.
Press and hold the M button depressed. The
light indicator in the button illuminates.
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Using a stored position for seat,
door mirrors and head-up display*
3.
Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in the
selected memory button, an acoustic signal can be heard and the light indicator in
the M button extinguishes.
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
•
•
Angling the door mirrors (p. 167)
If the positions for the power* seat, the door mirrors and the head-up display* have been stored,
they can be activated simply by using the memory buttons.
Settings for head-up display* (p. 138)
Using a stored setting
If none of the memory buttons is depressed
within three seconds then the M button extinguishes and no storing takes place.
The seat, the door mirrors or the head-up-display
must be readjusted before a new memory can be
set.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
A stored setting can be used with the front door
either open or closed:
Open front door
– Depress one of the memory buttons 1 ( )
or 2 ( ) with a short press. Power seat,
door mirrors and head-up display move and
then stop at the positions stored in the
selected memory button.
}}
* Option/accessory. 183
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
Closed front door
– Hold one of the memory buttons 1 ( ) or 2
( ) depressed until seat, door mirrors and
head-up display stop in the positions that are
stored in the selected memory button.
If the memory button is released, the movement
of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
be stopped.
WARNING
•
Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on the
power seat control panel.
•
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
184
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
•
•
Angling the door mirrors (p. 167)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Massage settings* in the front seat
Both the multi-function control on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display.
Settings for head-up display* (p. 138)
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
Settings for massage
The following setting options are available for
massage:
• On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch
on/off the massage function.
• Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage
programs. Select between Swell, Tread,
Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
• Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
Both the multi-function control on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display.
High.
• Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and
Fast.
Restarting massage
The massage function is deactivated automatically after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the function is performed manually.
–
Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre
display, to restart the selected massage program.
> The massage program restarts. If no
action is taken, the message remains
shown in the top view.
Adjusting massage settings in the front
seat
The front seat has massage in the backrest. The
massage is performed by air cushions that can
massage with different settings.
The massage function can only be activated
when the car's engine is running.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
1.
Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control
upwards/downwards. The
seat settings view will be shown in the centre
display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 185
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
2.
Select Massage in the seat settings view.
3.
To choose between the different massage
functions, select either directly in the centre
display or by moving the cursor up/down
/
using the multi-function control's upper
lower
button. Change the setting in the
selected function directly in the centre display, by pressing the arrows, or by using the
/rear
multi-function control's front
button.
Adjusting* the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
2.
Depending on equipment level selected, seat
cushion length is adjusted either using the multifunction control* on the side of the seat's seat
cushion, or manually using a control on the front
of the seat cushion.
Select Cushion extension in the seat settings view.
•
Press the front section of the four-way
to extend the seat cushion.
button
•
Press the rear section of the four-way
button
to retract the seat cushion.
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion using the multifunction control
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion manually
Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat
cushion.
Control for seat cushion adjustment.
1.
1.
Grip the handle
on the front of the seat
and pull upwards.
2.
Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
3.
Release the handle and make sure that the
seat cushion has reached the correct position.
Related information
•
•
•
•
186
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Activate the multi-function control by turning
upwards/downwards. The
the control
seat settings view will be shown in the centre
display.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the side support* in the
front seat
2.
Increase comfort in the front seat by adjusting
the sides of the backrest.
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
Select Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.
•
Press the front section of the four-way
.
button to increase side support
•
Press the rear section of the four-way
button to decrease side support .
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to provide side support. Both the multi-function control
on the seat and the centre display can be used in
order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display.
Activate the multi-function control by turning
. The seat settings view
the it up/down
will be shown in the centre display.
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
To adjust the side support:
1.
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
* Option/accessory. 187
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
The lumbar support is adjusted using a control
on the side of the seat cushion.
The lumbar support is adjusted using the multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar support*, or using the round button in cars with twoway lumbar support*. The control is located on
the side of the seat's seating section. Depending
on the equipment level selected, the lumbar support can be adjusted forward/back and up/down
(four-way lumbar support) or forward/back (twoway lumbar support).
2.
Adjust the lumbar support in the car
using the four-way lumbar support
Adjust the lumbar support in the car
using the two-way lumbar support
1.
1.
Press the front section
of the round button to increase lumbar support.
2.
Press the rear section
of the round button to decrease lumbar support.
Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.
•
/down
Press the round button up
to move the lumbar support upwards/
downwards.
•
Press the front section
of the button
to increase lumbar support.
•
of the button to
Press the rear section
decrease lumbar support.
Multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar support*.
Activate the multi-function control by turning
upwards/downwards. The
the control
seat settings view will be shown in the centre
display.
Control in cars with two-way lumbar support*.
188
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
•
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 189)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
the driver's seat.
Activating the function
The function is activated via the function view in
the centre display:
Press the Adjust Passenger
Seat button to activate.
Move the passenger seat forward/backward
by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Adjust passenger seat
From activation of the function, the driver must
adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If
no adjustment is made within this time the function is deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the
controls on the driver's seat:
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 180)
Power* front seat (p. 181)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
Storing position for seat, door mirrors and
head-up display* (p. 182)
•
Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors
and head-up display* (p. 183)
•
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 185)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 186)
}}
* Option/accessory. 189
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
•
•
Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
parts. The two parts can be folded forward individually.
WARNING
•
Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
away. Take care when adjusting the seat.
Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can
lead to trapping injuries.
•
When loading long objects, they must
always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
•
Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
•
For cars with automatic gearbox, set the
gear selector in P to prevent it from being
moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
190
IMPORTANT
The seat cushion on the integrated child
seat* must be in the lowered position before
lowering the rear seat backrest.
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
The through-load hatch in the rear seat must
be closed before lowering.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
be fully folded forward.
Lowering the backrest in a car using
electronically-controlled lowering*
If the car is equipped with electronic lowering of
the rear seat, you can lower the seat using the
buttons located in the cargo area. It is also possible to fold down the rear seat using handles on
the top of the seat.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
Pay attention that people are not at risk of
being trapped during the automatic folding of
the rear seat. Since this takes place automatically on the press of a button, no one must be
on or too close to the rear seat.
3.
The backrests release from the locks. The
head restraints are lowered first, then the
backrests are lowered automatically to horizontal position.
Lowering the backrests using handles in the
rear seat
Lowering the backrests manually
If the car only allows the rear seat to be folded
down manually, fold down the right and left-hand
sides of the seat with the handles in the rear
seat.
Lowering the backrest using buttons in the
cargo area
Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in
the rear seat.
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must
be stationary and the tailgate open. Ensure that
there are no occupants or objects in the rear
seat.
1.
Lower the centre seat's head restraint manually.
2.
Hold the button for folding depressed. The
buttons are marked L and R for left and
right-hand backrest sections respectively.
Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in
the rear seat.
Lower the centre seat's head restraint manually.
Lower the centre seat's head restraint manually.
Pull the handles located on the car's left and
right-hand backrests forwards to fold down
the left and right-hand part of the rear seat
respectively.
> The backrests release from the locks. The
head restraints are lowered first, then the
backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position.
Pull the handles located on the car's left and
right-hand backrests forwards to fold down
the left and right-hand part of the rear seat
respectively.
3.
The backrest disengages from the lock and
needs to be lowered manually to the horizontal position.
}}
191
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
Raising the backrest
Raising the backrest to upright position is carried
out manually:
1.
Move the backrest up/back.
2.
Press the backrest until the lock engages.
3.
Raise the head restraints manually.
4.
If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
•
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 275)
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward
visibility.
Adjust the head restraint for the centre
seat
WARNING
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head restraints
in the rear seat are locked properly after
being folded up.
The head restraints of the outer seats must
always be raised when there are passengers
on any of the rear seats.
The centre seat's head restraint must be
adjusted according to the passenger's height so
that, if possible, the whole of the back of the
head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.
Related information
192
•
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
(p. 192)
•
Private locking (p. 275)
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Fold down the rear seat's outer head
restraints using handles
For cars with electronically controlled folding*, the
outer head restraints can be folded using han.
dles on the top side of the seat, see figure
For cars without electric folding, the head
restraints are fixed.
To lower the head restraint, the button (see illustration) must be depressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down.
Press the Headrest Fold button to activate/deactivate lowering.
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
whole of the back of the head if possible.
Fold down the rear seat's outer head
restraints via the centre display*
The outer head restraints can be retracted via the
centre display's function view. You can lower the
head restraints in ignition position 0.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
Related information
•
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 190)
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position
after being folded up.
* Option/accessory. 193
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Steering wheel controls and horn
Horn
The steering wheel houses the horn and controls for e.g. the driver support systems and
voice recognition.
Steering lock
The steering wheel lock makes it difficult to steer
the car if it is stolen, for example. A mechanical
noise can be perceived when the steering lock
is locked or unlocked.
Activating the steering lock
The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the
steering lock will be activated automatically after
a while.
The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel.
Related information
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
•
•
Steering lock (p. 194)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
Controls for driver support systems5.
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in
an automatic gearbox.
Controls for voice recognition and menu,
message and phone handling.
5
194
Deactivating the steering lock
The steering lock is deactivated when the car is
unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked,
the steering wheel lock will be deactivated as
long as the remote control key is in the passenger compartment and the car is started.
Related information
•
•
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 194)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
Speed Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
positions.
regulated according to the car's speed in order to
give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
Adjusting the steering wheel in a car without
a knee airbag
Adjusting the steering wheel in a car with a
knee airbag
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth.
The steering wheel is adjusted in different ways
depending on whether or not the car is equipped
with knee airbag6.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must never
be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is
6
1.
Pull the lever backwards to release the steering wheel.
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
1.
Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel.
2.
Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
2.
Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3.
3.
Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you move
the lever back.
Push the lever forwards to secure the steering wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you
move the lever back.
Related information
•
•
•
Steering lock (p. 194)
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 194)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 195
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
Climate
Climate zones
The car is equipped with electronic climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment.
The number of climate zones that the car is divided into governs the options for setting different
temperatures for different parts of the passenger
compartment.
All climate control system functions are controlled from the centre display and physical buttons in the centre console.
2-zone climate
4-zone climate*
Some functions for the rear seat can also be
controlled from the climate controls* at the rear
of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
198
Climate zones with 4-zone climate.
Climate zones (p. 198)
With 4-zone climate the temperature in the passenger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides in both the front and
rear seat.
Climate control - sensors (p. 199)
Perceived temperature (p. 199)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 200)
Parking climate* (p. 226)
Heater* (p. 233)
Air quality (p. 201)
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
Related information
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the passenger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides.
•
Climate (p. 198)
Air distribution (p. 204)
Climate controls (p. 210)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Climate control - sensors
The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the climate in the car.
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also
an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate
control system air intake.
Sensor location
Related information
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the interior rearview mirror.
Outside temperature sensor - in the righthand door mirror.
•
•
Climate (p. 198)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate
in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual temperature.
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically perceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
the same temperature on both sides.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 198)
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instrument panel.
Temperature sensor for the passenger compartment - by the physical buttons in the
centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
* Option/accessory. 199
CLIMATE
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition1
•
"Air condition on"/"Air condition off" activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
Voice recognition commands for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature, activate a heated seat* or change fan level.
•
"Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" activates/deactivates the air circulation.
•
"Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
- activates/deactivates defrosting of windows
and door mirrors.
•
"Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster.
Press
mands:
•
"Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of commands.
•
"Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
•
"Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature
setting one step.
"Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deactivates
the heated windscreen*.
•
"Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature for all climate zones in the car
with the temperature set for the driver's side.
"Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the
heated rear window and door mirrors.
•
"Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/deactivates the heated steering wheel*.
•
"Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
step.
•
•
•
"Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
•
"Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes
the desired air flow.
•
"Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes
the air flow to Max/Off.
•
•
"Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" raises/lowers the fan level one step.
"Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
•
•
"Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate
regulation.
"Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" raises/lowers the setting for the heated
seat* one step.
1
200
and say one of the following com-
•
"Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat
ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat
ventilation*.
•
"Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for
the ventilated seat* one step.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Climate (p. 198)
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Using voice recognition (p. 140)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 142)
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger compartment and the air cleaning system ensure that
the air quality in the passenger compartment is
high.
•
•
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)
Clean Zone*
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
The Clean Zone function checks and indicates
whether or not all conditions have been met for
good air quality in the passenger compartment.
Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment
and the cargo area are removable and easy to
remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
Air cleaning system
In addition to the passenger compartment filter,
Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air
Quality System* also help to maintain high air
quality in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
•
Climate (p. 198)
The indicator is visible in the climate view in
the centre display.
The indicator is visible in the climate row
when the climate view is not open.
If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
have been met, this is indicated by the text
changing colour to blue.
Conditions that are checked:
•
•
That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
That all side windows and the panorama
roof* are closed.
Clean Zone* (p. 201)
}}
* Option/accessory. 201
CLIMATE
||
•
•
•
That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
System* is activated.
That the ventilation fan is activated.
That the air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good. It only indicates that the conditions for good air quality have been met.
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Interior Air Quality System*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises
a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and
asthma-inducing substances.
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully automatic air quality system that separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
contaminants in the passenger compartment.
The following is included:
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and groundlevel ozone.
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 201)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked with
the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged
automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened.
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old.
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
The fully automatic air quality system Interior
Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information
•
•
•
•
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
to prevent misting.
Air quality (p. 201)
Clean Zone* (p. 201)
In the event of misting, the defrost functions
for windscreen, side windows and rear window should be used.
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)
Related information
•
•
•
202
Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 203)
Air quality (p. 201)
Clean Zone* (p. 201)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
•
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
The air quality sensor is part of the fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS).
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor
should be activated/deactivated.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deactivate the air quality sensor.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment
is cleaned with a filter.
Replacing the passenger compartment
filter
To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Related information
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Related information
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 201)
Clean Zone* (p. 201)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
* Option/accessory. 203
CLIMATE
Air distribution
Changing air distribution
The climate control system distributes the
incoming air via a number of different vents in
the passenger compartment.
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required.
Automatic and manual air distribution
With auto-regulated climate control running the
air distribution takes place automatically. If necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents
Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable,
which means that you can open/close the vent to
aim the air flow.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger compartment.
With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument
panel and one on each of the door pillars
between the front and rear doors.
The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the
rear of the tunnel console.
Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
and centre console
Related information
204
Climate (p. 198)
•
•
•
Changing air distribution (p. 204)
•
Table of air distribution options (p. 207)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 205)
Air distribution - air vents in the floor
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press one or more of the air distribution buttons in order to open/close the corresponding air flow.
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
•
•
Air distribution (p. 204)
Opening, closing and aiming the air
vents
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 205)
Some air vents in the passenger compartment
can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
•
Table of air distribution options (p. 207)
If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side windows then misting can be eliminated.
Related information
Opening and closing the air vents
Air vents for the front seat:
If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in
a hot climate, a comfortable environment is
obtained in the passenger compartment.
Air vent knob2.
–
Turn the knob in order to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the marking
on the knob is in vertical position.
2
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
}}
205
CLIMATE
||
Air vents for the rear seat:
Aiming the air vents
The air vent's thumbwheel2.
The air vent's lever2.
–
2
206
Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to
aim the air flow from the nozzle.
Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close
the air flow from the nozzle.
–
The longer the white lines on the thumbwheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.
Related information
•
•
•
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
Air distribution (p. 204)
Changing air distribution (p. 204)
Table of air distribution options (p. 207)
CLIMATE
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required. The following options are available for
setting.
Air distribution
Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents.
Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from
other air vents.
Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air
vents.
Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
}}
207
CLIMATE
||
208
Air distribution
Purpose
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air
flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the
floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument
panel and air vents at the floor.
Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
CLIMATE
Related information
•
•
Air distribution (p. 204)
•
Changing air distribution (p. 204)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 205)
209
CLIMATE
Climate controls
Main climate
In addition to the climate row's functions, other
main climate functions can also be controlled in
the Main climate tab.
The climate control system's functions are controlled from physical buttons in the centre console, the centre display and the climate controls
at the rear of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in centre console
Temperature controls for driver and passenger side.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as heated
steering wheel*.
Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mirrors.
Climate row in centre display
The most common climate functions can be
regulated from the climate row.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated climate settings.
Climate view in centre display
One tap on the centre button in the climate row
gives access to the climate view.
Depending on equipment level, the climate view
can be divided into several tabs. Change between
the tabs by swiping left/right or by pressing the
respective heading.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting
the windows and door mirrors.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
Controls for air distribution.
210
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Climate controls at rear of tunnel
console*
Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone climate, the control is shared with the rear
seat).
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
Rear climate control*
All climate functions for the rear seat can be
regulated in the Rear climate tab.
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Fan controls for rear seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
2nd row climate - Controls for climate functionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear
seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Parking climate*
The car's parking climate control can be regulated in the Parking climate tab.
Locking/unlocking button on the climate
panel.
If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at
the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated
rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear
of the tunnel console for controlling these.
The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent
unintentional change of fan speed and temperature. When the screen is locked, only the seat
controls* and the unlocking button are shown.
After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature
can be changed via the climate panel and all
}}
* Option/accessory. 211
CLIMATE
||
selected climate settings are shown. The screen
locks automatically after a period of inactivity.
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
Related information
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
•
•
212
Climate (p. 198)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 212)
2.
Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
WARNING
•
Activating and deactivating heated rear seat*
(p. 213)
•
Activating and deactivating ventilated front
seat* (p. 214)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 215)
•
•
Activating auto climate control (p. 216)
Related information
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
(p. 216)
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 217)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 219)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
•
•
•
•
Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 221)
Regulating fan level for rear seat* (p. 222)
Synchronising temperature (p. 224)
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1.
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated front seat* (p. 213)
Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel, the button
for heated seats is immediately available in
the climate row.
Activating and deactivating air conditioning
(p. 225)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated front seat*
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seat from the rear seat
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
With 2-zone climate:
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start in the event of low
ambient temperature.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seat from the front seat*
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level
to activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger seat.
4.
Select Low, Medium or High to select level
after the function has been activated.
Related information
•
•
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console.
–
Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in
the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for Rear climate.
2.
Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 212)
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels: Off, High, Medium
and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
button show the set level.
}}
* Option/accessory. 213
CLIMATE
||
With 4-zone climate*:
Activating and deactivating
ventilated front seat*
The seats can be ventilated to provide increased
comfort in a hot climate, for example.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the
cooler the passenger compartment air becomes.
The system can be activated when the engine is
running.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
Seat heating indication and controls on the climate
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
–
1.
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel
console's climate panel to switch between
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the screen in the
climate panel shows the set level.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or heated steering wheel, the button for ventilated seats is immediately available in the
climate row.
2.
Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
seats in order to change between the four
levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 210)
Related information
•
214
Climate controls (p. 210)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated steering wheel* (p. 215)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated steering
wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated steering wheel should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature.
1.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level to activate/deactivate automatic start
of heated steering wheel.
Press the driver's side steering wheel and
seat button in the climate row of the centre
display in order to open the controls for seat
and steering wheel.
4.
Select Low, Medium or High to select level
after the function has been activated.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or ventilated seats, the button for heated
steering wheel is immediately available in the
climate row.
•
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1.
2.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 215)
Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change between
the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
* Option/accessory. 215
CLIMATE
Activating auto climate control
2.
With auto climate control activated, multiple climate functions are controlled automatically.
Give a short or long press on AUTO.
•
Short press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically.
Long press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically, temperature and fan speed
are changed to standard settings: 22 °C
(72 °F) and level 3 (level 2 in the rear
seat3).
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated
and the button illuminates.
•
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
Temperature and fan speed can be changed
without deactivating the automatically-regulated climate control system. The automaticallyregulated climate control system is deactivated when the air distribution is changed
manually or when maximum defroster is activated.
Auto-regulation button in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
Related information
•
3
216
The air recirculation button in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Climate controls (p. 210)
For cars with 4-zone climate*.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long
then there is a risk of misting on the insides
of the windows.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate air recirculation
when max defroster is activated.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
air recirculation (p. 217)
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment.
Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and
ice from windows.
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When the
timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically
switched off after 20 minutes.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre console
There is a physical button in the centre console
for quick access to max defroster.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster can
only be activated individually from the climate
view in the centre display.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
(p. 216)
Physical button in the centre console.
Cars without heated windscreen:
–
Press the button.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
}}
* Option/accessory. 217
CLIMATE
||
Cars with heated windscreen:
–
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
•
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre display
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button.
Max defroster button in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, activates air conditioning and changes the
fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.
When max defroster is deactivated, the
climate control system returns to the previous settings.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
218
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 210)
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre display
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove
mist and ice from the window.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre console
NOTE
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated windscreen.
If the heated windscreen is activated when
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the
engine then the engine will be restarted.
Related information
The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.
Physical button in the centre console.
–
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
•
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
•
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated windscreen* (p. 220)
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
* Option/accessory. 219
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated
windscreen*
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door
mirrors
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove
mist and ice from the window.
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated windscreen should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic
start activated, heating will start when there is a
risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window.
The heating switches off automatically when the
windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
1.
Activating and deactivating heated rear
window and door mirrors from centre
console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated rear window and door
mirrors.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated windscreen.
Activating and deactivating heated rear
window and door mirrors from centre
display
The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in
the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press Rear.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 219)
Related information
Physical button in the centre console.
–
220
Press the button.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
•
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 221)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic starting of the heated
rear window and door mirrors
Regulating fan level for front seat4
NOTE
The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled fan speeds for the front seat.
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means that
the fan speed may change even though the
fan level is the same.
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated rear window and door mirrors should be
activated/deactivated when the engine is started.
With automatic start activated, heating will start
when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone.
Related information
•
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
2.
Press Climate.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
window and door mirrors.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
3.
Related information
•
4
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
Climate controls (p. 210)
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
221
CLIMATE
Regulating fan level for rear seat*
The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled fan speeds for the rear seat.
Regulating the fan level for the rear
seat from the rear seat
1.
Regulating the fan level for the rear
seat from the front seat
NOTE
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means that
the fan speed may change even though the
fan level is the same.
Press the unlocking button on the tunnel
console climate panel to access the controls.
Related information
•
The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the
climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for Rear climate.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.
The rear seat's fan level can be switched off
by tapping on 2nd row climate.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
222
Climate controls (p. 210)
Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
NOTE
The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if
the fan level for the front seat is in position
Off.
The rear seat fan speed can only be switched
off from the climate view in the centre display.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Regulating temperature for front
seat5
Regulating temperature for rear
seat*
The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the front seat's climate zones.
The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the rear seat's climate zones.
Regulating temperature for rear seat
from front seat
Temperature control.
2.
Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
•
Temperature buttons in the climate row.
1.
drag the control to the desired temperature, or
press +/− to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature.
•
Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button in the centre display's climate row to
open the controls.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for Rear climate.
2.
Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button to open the control.
Related information
•
5
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
Climate controls (p. 210)
}}
* Option/accessory. 223
CLIMATE
Synchronising temperature
||
The temperature in the car's different climate
zones can be synchronised with the temperature
set on the driver's side.
Temperature control.
3.
Regulate the temperature by means of the
following:
•
Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of
the tunnel console.
2.
drag the control to the desired temperature
press +/− to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature.
•
NOTE
Regulating temperature for rear seat
from rear seat
1.
Press the left or right-hand side </> buttons
on the tunnel console's climate panel in
order to lower/raise the temperature gradually.
> The temperature changes and the screen
in the climate panel shows the set temperature.
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Press the unlocking button on the tunnel
console climate panel to access the controls.
Related information
•
224
Climate controls (p. 210)
Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
controls.
1.
Press the driver's side temperature button in
the centre display's climate row in order to
open the controls.
2.
Press Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature for all zones in the car is
synchronised with the temperature set for
the driver's side and the synchronisation
symbol is shown adjacent to the temperature button.
The synchronisation is stopped by means of a
further press on Synchronise temperature or
by means of changing the temperature settings
for a climate zone other than the driver's.
CLIMATE
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
NOTE
Close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air conditioning when the fan control is in Off position.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 210)
The air conditioning button in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
When the air conditioning is activated, the
climate control system automatically controls starting and switching off as
required.
* Option/accessory. 225
CLIMATE
Parking climate*
Related information
Parking climate control is a generic term for various functions that improve the passenger compartment climate when the car is parked, e.g.
preconditioning.
•
•
•
•
Climate (p. 198)
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Climate comfort when parking* (p. 231)
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 232)
Preconditioning*
Preconditioning of the car before driving can
reduce wear and energy needs during a journey.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
the timer.
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
•
The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
up both the passenger compartment and the
engine.
•
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort
temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
Related information
•
•
Functions belonging to the parking climate control are
controlled from the Parking climate in climate view in
the centre display.
226
•
Parking climate* (p. 226)
Start and switch off preconditioning*
(p. 227)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Start and switch off
preconditioning*
Preconditioning heats* the passenger compartment and engine or airs the passenger compartment before driving. The function can use direct
start from the centre display or a mobile phone.
Start and switch off from car
Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in
the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Press Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off
and the button is illuminated/extinguished.
6
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the passenger compartment.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
senger compartment by blowing in air from outside.
The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the car remote start function
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)6 via the Volvo On
Call* app.
Related information
•
•
•
Parking climate* (p. 226)
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Starting from the app*
Start of preconditioning and information about
the selected settings can be managed from a
device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Preconditioning heats* the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature or ventilates the pas-
Certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 227
CLIMATE
Preconditioning time setting*
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning
is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
for:
•
•
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning*
The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
8 time settings.
Adding a time setting
A time on a single date
A time on one or more days of the week, with
or without repetition.
228
NOTE
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 229)
•
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 230)
Tap on Date to set the time for a single date.
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more
days of the week.
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)
•
Press Add timer.
> A pop-up window is shown.
It is not possible to add a time setting if there
already are 8 settings entered for the timer.
Delete a time setting in order to be able to
add a new one.
4.
Related information
•
•
3.
With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by
ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
weekly.
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
5.
With Date: Select the date for preconditioning by scrolling the date list with the arrows.
With Days: Select the days of the week for
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for
the days of the week.
6.
Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
7.
Tap on Confirm in order to add the time setting.
> The time setting is added to the list and is
activated.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Editing a time setting
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Press the time setting that is to be changed.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Edit the time setting in the same way as
described in "Adding a time setting" above.
•
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 229)
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning*
•
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 230)
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
can be activated or deactivated based on need.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping
on the timer button to the right of the setting.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Related information
•
•
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
}}
* Option/accessory. 229
CLIMATE
||
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 230)
Removing time setting for
preconditioning*
•
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)
A time setting for preconditioning that is no
longer required can be deleted.
•
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 229)
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Press Edit list.
4.
Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
> The icon changes to the text Delete.
5.
Press Delete to confirm.
> The time setting is removed from the list.
Related information
•
•
230
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Climate comfort when parking*
The climate in the car's passenger compartment
can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if
the engine needs to be switched off but the
driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car
and maintain the level of climate comfort.
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking*
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual heat
in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F).
Climate comfort retention maintains the climate
in the passenger compartment after driving. The
function can use direct start from the centre display.
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
via direct start.
NOTE
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
•
Residual heat from the engine, in a cold climate, heats the passenger compartment to
comfort temperature.
•
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
•
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
•
•
Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking
climate tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the Parking climate tab.
3.
Press Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/
extinguishes.
Climate comfort when parking* (p. 231)
Parking climate* (p. 226)
Starting and switching off climate comfort
when parking* (p. 231)
* Option/accessory. 231
CLIMATE
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.
Symbol
Messages relating to parking climate control can
also be displayed in a device which has the Volvo
On Call* app.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
Message
Specification
Parking climate
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Service required
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
Parking climate
Limited Charge level too low
A
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a workshopA to check the function.
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill
the vehicle's fuel tank.
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Start the car.
The running time for parking climate control is limited when the state of charge in the starter battery is
low. Start the car.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
232
Parking climate* (p. 226)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Heater*
The heater helps the engine and passenger
compartment reach the correct temperature
before and during driving.
The heater has two subfunctions:
•
Parking heater - heats the passenger compartment an engine, if necessary, when the
parking climate control's preconditioning is
activated.
•
Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary, during driving.
NOTE
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery.
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low,
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Check in the driver display that the
heater is switched off. This symbol
is lit when it is working as a parking
heater.
Related information
NOTE
Battery and charging
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.
Fuel and refuelling
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal.
NOTE
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
battery if the heater needs to be used.
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
•
•
•
Climate (p. 198)
Parking heater* (p. 234)
Additional heater* (p. 235)
The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel
tank.
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
heater is switched off automatically and the driver
display shows a message.
* Option/accessory. 233
CLIMATE
Parking heater*
NOTE
The parking heater heats the passenger compartment and engine as necessary before driving
if the car's preconditioning is activated.
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be
used.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of
the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
starter battery if the parking heater needs to
be used.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*:
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined
with short journeys may discharge the battery
and impair starting.
If the heater is used on a regular basis, then
the car should be driven for the same amount
of time that the heater is used in order to
ensure that the car's battery is recharged with
the same amount of energy as consumed by
the parking heater. The parking heater is used
for a maximum of 40 minutes each time.
The heater's maximum running time is
40 minutes.
234
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
WARNING
If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of
smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds coming from the parking heater, switch off the
heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo
recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair.
The parking heater starts automatically if the
parking climate's preconditioning* is activated
and the passenger compartment needs to be
heated up.
It switches off automatically when a set timer
time or the heater's maximum run time expires, or
if the car is restarted.
•
Related information
•
•
Heater* (p. 233)
Additional heater* (p. 235)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Additional heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger
compartment and engine while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the
front right-hand wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal.
•
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
auxiliary heater (p. 235)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of auxiliary heater
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger
compartment and engine while driving.
It is possible to set whether automatic start for
the additional heater should be activated/deactivated.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press Climate.
3.
Select Additional Heater to activate/deactivate automatic start of the additional heater.
NOTE
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while the
car is being driven.
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off.
Volvo recommends that the automatic start
for the additional heater should be switched
off for short driving distances.
Related information
•
Additional heater* (p. 235)
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be
used.
Related information
•
•
Heater* (p. 233)
Parking heater* (p. 234)
* Option/accessory. 235
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Lock confirmation
Lock and alarm indicator
When the car is locked or unlocked the direction
indicators confirm that locking or unlocking was
correctly performed.
Indication in lock buttons
Front door
Exterior indication
Locking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors1.
Unlocking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the
door mirrors1.
All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to
indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed
with only the driver's door closed2, the car will be
locked but lock indication with hazard warning
flashers will only occur after all doors, tailgate
and bonnet have been closed.
1
2
238
The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
show the status of the alarm system.
Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the
car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pulsating flashes.
Other indication
The home safe lighting and approach light functions also provide indication of locking and
unlocking.
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
of either front door indicates that all doors are
locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extinguish in both doors.
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
In rear door*
Lock indication setting
Remote control key
It is possible to select how the car confirms
locking and unlocking in the centre display settings menu.
The remote control key locks and unlocks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote
control key needs to be inside the car for it to be
started.
Locking response:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Tap on Visible Locking Feedback to select
when the car should give a visible response:
at Lock, Unlock, Both, or to switch off the
function.
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
for one of the doors indicates that the door in
question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its
lamp will extinguish while the others will continue
to illuminate.
Related information
•
•
•
3
Lock indication setting (p. 239)
Approach light duration (p. 157)
Using home safe lighting (p. 157)
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Locking.
Indication with retractable door mirrors*:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function.
Mirrors and Convenience.
Related information
•
Lock confirmation (p. 238)
Remote control key3, on left, and button-less key (Key
Tag)*, on right.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting since the car is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as standard.
The key must be in the front part of the passenger compartment, e.g. in the driver's pocket or the
runnel console cup holder, for it to be possible to
start the car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 239
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Keyless locking and unlocking of doors, tailgate
(Passive Entry*) is also available as an option.
The key then has a range extending in a semicircle with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet)
out from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre
(3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively.
Remote control key buttons
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the button
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators
and the horn. The function can be turned off
with the same button once it has been active
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after
3 minutes.
With keyless starting and keyless locking and
unlocking, the remote control key can be located
anywhere in the passenger compartment or the
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start
the car.
Each one of the remote control keys included
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with
unique settings for the car. When a key with a
certain profile is used, the car's settings are
adapted according to the profile.
Button-less key (Key Tag)
For cars equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking*, a slightly smaller, lighter and buttonless key (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same
way as the normal remote control key when it
comes to keyless starting and locking and
unlocking. The key is waterproof to a depth of
approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes.
It has no detachable key blade and the battery
cannot be replaced.
matically when the button is held depressed.
The tailgate is also closed with a long press
– acoustic warning signals sound.
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
left-hand side and three on the right-hand side3.
Locking - Pressing the button locks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also
arms the alarm*.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
power windows and panoramic roof* are deenergised by always taking the remote control
key with you when you leave the car.
Press and hold to close all of the windows
and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the
alarm.
A longer press opens all windows simultaneously. This total airing function can be used,
for example, to quickly air the car in hot
weather.
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and
disarms its alarm. On cars with power operated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto-
3
240
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
•
•
A remote control key or Key Tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the car
is locked and the alarm is armed using
another valid key. The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated. The deactivated
key is reactivated when the car is
unlocked.
A Red Key left in the car will be deactivated even when the car is locked using
Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the
car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or by
pressing the key's unlock button.
Interference
Remote control key functions for keyless starting
and keyless locking and unlocking* can be disrupted by electromagnetic fields and screening.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close to
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers preferably no closer than 10-15 cm
(4-6 inches).
4
If there is still interference - use the remote control key's detachable key blade to unlock and
then place the key in the backup reader in the
cup holder to disarm the car.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
to each other in the cup holder can cause
interference with each other.
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
The buttons on the remote control key can be
used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.
Locking with the remote control key
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 241)
Remote control key range (p. 244)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 245)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Immobiliser (p. 252)
Remote control key4.
–
Press the remote control key
lock.
button to
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 132)
}}
* Option/accessory. 241
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
The driver's door must be closed in order for the
lock sequence to be activated5. If any of the other
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not
locked and their alarms armed* until they are
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are
activated when all the doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked.
NOTE
•
•
A remote control key or Key Tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the car
is locked and the alarm is armed using
another valid key. The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated. The deactivated
key is reactivated when the car is
unlocked.
A Red Key left in the car will be deactivated even when the car is locked using
Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the
car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or by
pressing the key's unlock button.
Related information
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is
open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is
closed and the car is completely locked6.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
charged - in which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade.
Locking when the tailgate is open
Unlocking with the remote control key
–
Press the remote control key
unlock.
button to
Automatic relocking
•
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 243)
•
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key (p. 243)
•
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable
key blade (p. 251)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 245)
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
When the remote control key does not
work
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt.
If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
5
6
242
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking then all side doors must be closed.
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Settings for remotely controlled and
inside unlocking
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
It is possible to select different sequences for
remotely controlled unlocking.
It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by pressing a button on the remote control key.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car Locking
Interior Unlock.
3.
Select option:
1.
The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
Remote and
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed while the doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
• All Doors
Lightly grasp the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle to open
the tailgate.
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
• Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
the doors requires two presses on the
remote control key's unlock button.
The settings made here also affect central
unlocking via opening handles from the inside.
Use the remote control key
tailgate and disable the alarm.
If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes then it is relocked and the
alarm is re-armed.
button to unlock the
2.
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 241)
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 266)
With the power operated tailgate option* Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the
button
remote control key's
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the doors remain locked and their
alarm functions armed.
Related information
•
button.
Press the remote control key's
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes in order to show
that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 241)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 269)
* Option/accessory. 243
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work properly it needs to be within a certain distance from
the car.
cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres
(5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre
(3 feet) from the tailgate.
The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key
blade.
The remote control key's functions for e.g. locking/unlocking that are activated by pressing on
or
have a range that extends approx.
20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
For keyless
use7
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
NOTE
For manual use
If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again.
•
If the remote control key is removed
from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered
by the system's antennas.
For keyless use, a remote control key or the button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir7 Only
244
•
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
Antenna locations for the start and lock systems (p. 265)
applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
The battery in the remote control key needs to
be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not apply
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery varies depending on how often the vehicle/key
is used.
The battery in the button-less key8 (Key Tag)
cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Opening the key and changing the
battery
IMPORTANT
A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
must be deleted from the car since it is still
possible to use it to start the car via back-up
start.
The battery for the remote control key should be
replaced if:
the information symbol illuminates and
the message Car key battery low
See Owner's manual is shown in the
driver display
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
(65 feet) of the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt.
8
This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).
}}
* Option/accessory. 245
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Turn the key, move the button to the side
and slide the back shell a few millimetres
upwards.
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the battery cover anticlockwise until the markings
meet at the OPEN text.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
246
The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up.
Avoid touching the remote control key's battery contacts with your fingers.
Reposition the rear side's shell and press
it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
properly positioned and securely attached.
Place the battery in the holder with the
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch.
Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
}}
247
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Ordering more remote control keys
||
The car is supplied with two remote control keys.
A button-less key is supplied if the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered.
Turn the remote control key over and refit
the front side's shell by pressing it down until
a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
A total of twelve keys can be programmed and
used for one single car. If additional keys are
ordered, additional driver profiles are added - one
per new remote control key. This also applies for
the key tag.
Red Key - restricted remote control
key*
A Red Key makes it possible for the car's owner
to set limitations for certain of the car's properties. The limitations are intended to encourage
the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when
being loaned out.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
remote control keys must be taken to the workshop. The code of the missing key must be
erased from the system as a theft prevention
measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car
can be checked via driver profiles in the centre
display's top view, select Settings System
Driver Profiles.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's
maximum speed, set speed reminders and determine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume.
In addition, some of the car's driver support systems will always be active. Other functions of the
key are the same as those of a normal remote
control key.
One or more Red Key can be ordered from a
Volvo retailer. A total of eleven keys with restrictions can be programmed and used for a single
car - at least one must be a normal remote control key.
248
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
The restrictions are intended to act as measures
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young drivers, valet parking or a workshop. The holder of a
Red Key cannot change settings defined for it –
a regular remote control key is required for this.
Related information
•
•
Red Key settings* (p. 249)
Red Key settings*
The holder of a regular remote control key can
define settings for Red Key. Certain driver support functions are always active.
1.
2.
Remote control key (p. 239)
Speed reminder (On/Off):
• Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
•
Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
•
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Press System Driver Profiles Red
Key.
> The following settings can be defined:
Driver support functions
• Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise
Control
• Reduced Maximum Volume
• Max Speed Limit
• Speed Limit Warning
Adaptive cruise control*:
• Setting at first use: Longest intervals
Reduced max. volume (On/Off):
• Setting at first use: On
Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
Lane assistance (LKA)*
Distance Warning*
City Safety
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
Road Sign Information*
Related information
•
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 248)
Speed limiter (On/Off):
• Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)
•
Setting during first use is 120 km/h
(75 mph)
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
The driver display shows the symbol
and message
Red key Speed limitation cannot
be exceeded.
* Option/accessory. 249
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Detachable key blade
Detaching the key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of functions can be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
•
•
•
the left-hand9 front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key.
all doors are emergency-locked.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks
can be activated and deactivated.
Return the key blade to its intended position
in the remote control key after use.
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward
until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Related information
The button-less key10 (Key Tag) does not have a
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the
detachable key blade from the normal remote
control key.
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable
key blade (p. 251)
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
9 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.
10 Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking
250
option (Passive Entry*).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
5.
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade
can be used to unlock the car from the outside e.g. if the remote control key's battery has
become discharged.
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
clockwise in step (3).
Unlocking
Pull out the handle.
> The door opens.
Switching off the alarm*
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key
blade and is then opened, the alarm is triggered.
2.
Then turn the start knob clockwise and
release it.
> The control automatically returns to its
starting position - the alarm signal stops
and the alarm switches off.
Locking
It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
has become discharged.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
them being opened from outside.
Pull out the front door handle on the lefthand side11 to its end position so that the
lock cylinder become visible.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade is pointing straight back.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
position. Remove the key from the lock cylinder and release the handle so that the rear
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.
11
This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
1.
Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the bottom of the
cup holder in the tunnel console.
}}
* Option/accessory. 251
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Immobiliser
•
A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with activated manual or electric child safety locks
cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in
this way can only be unlocked with the
remote control key or central locking button.
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents an unauthorised person
from starting the car.
||
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the
child safety locks.
–
Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote control key. Insert the key blade in
the hole for lock reset and press the key in
until it bottoms, approx. 12 mm (0.5 inches).
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the inner
door handle must be opened.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key.
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol
Related information
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 278)
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
Message
Specification
Car key not
found
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting place the key on
the key symbol in
the cup holder and
try again.
See
Owner's
manual
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 245)
Related information
•
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
Ordering more remote control keys (p. 248)
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock
button on the remote control key or with the central locking button on the driver's door.
252
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Type approval for the remote
control key system
Type approval for the car's remote key system
can be seen in the following tables.
Lock system keyless start (Passive
Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry*)
For more information about type approval, see
support.volvocars.com.
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For
supplementary type approval numbers, see following
tables.
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this
VO3-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other
relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED).
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Jordan
TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia
P1614120100
Argentina
CNC ID: C-14771
}}
* Option/accessory. 253
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
Brazil
MT-3245/2015
Indonesia
Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015
Malaysia
RAAT/37A/1215/S(15-5198)
Mexico
IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates
ER37847/15
DA0062437/11
254
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Namibia
TA-2016-02
South Africa
TA-2014-1868
Remote control key
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
Jordan
TRC/LPD/2015/104
}}
255
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico
IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia
256
TA-2015-102
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Oman
Serbia
}}
257
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
South Africa
TA-2015-432
The United Arab
Emirates
Key Tag
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany
Jordan
258
TRC/LPD/2015/107
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico
IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia
TA-2015-103
}}
259
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Oman
Serbia
260
Type approval
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
South Africa
TA-2015-414
The United Arab
Emirates
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 239)
261
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless and touch-sensitive
surfaces*
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking, it is sufficient to have the remote control key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
making it more convenient to open the car if your
hands are full.
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensitive
surface is activated at a time. Gripping the
handle while touching the lock surface risks
giving double commands. This means that the
requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not
be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
Related information
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 264)
Touch-sensitive surfaces
Door handle
The outside of the door handles contains a
recess for locking, while the inside contains a
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
262
Tailgate
The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure
plate that is only used for unlocking.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless locking and unlocking*
–
The car is locked and unlocked from the outside
using the door or tailgate handles if the car is
equipped with keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry)*.
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range for locking and unlocking to
work.
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for
unlocking only.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
Keyless locking
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
All side doors must be closed to be able to lock
the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be
open when locking the car with a side door handle.
Touch the marked surface towards the rear
on the outside of a door handle after the
door has been closed, or press the lock12
button on the bottom edge of the tailgate
before closing it.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen starts
to flash to indicate the car is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the
touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door
handle and hold it there until all of the side windows and the panoramic roof have been closed.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is
open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is
closed and the car is completely locked.
If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
12
Applies with power operated tailgate*.
}}
* Option/accessory. 263
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Keyless unlocking
–
Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised
pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to
unlock the car.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen extinguishes to confirm the car is unlocked open the doors or tailgate as usual.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
Settings for Keyless entry*
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
It is possible to select different sequences for
Keyless entry.
For keyless unlocking of the tailgate, all you have
to do is have the remote control key in a pocket
or bag, for example.
1.
2.
Tap on My Car
Unlock
3.
Select option:
Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 264)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 264)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
Locking
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
Keyless
• All Doors
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
• Single Door
Related information
•
•
•
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
- unlocks selected door.
Related information
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
To open the tailgate:
1.
Press gently on the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle.
> The lock is released.
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range behind the car for unlocking to
work.
264
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
2.
Lift by the outside handle in order to fully
open the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not
come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the
keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock
system13 and therefore has a number of built-in
antennas positioned at different locations in the
car.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
•
Remote control key range (p. 244)
It is also possible to unlock the tailgate handsfree with a foot movement under the rear
bumper, see separate section.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 263)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
Antenna locations.
Under the cup holder in the front section of
the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door14
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door14
In the cargo area14
Remote control key range (p. 244)
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 273)
* Option/accessory. 265
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
Alternative unlocking method
Locking using a button in the front door
–
The doors and tailgate can be locked and
unlocked from inside using the central locking
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
the rear doors each lock their own rear door.
Press the
button - both front doors must
be closed.
> All doors and the tailgate are locked.
Locking using a button in the rear door*
Central locking
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side
door15.
–
Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the
front door.
Unlocking using a button in the front
door
–
13
14
15
266
Press the
button to unlock all side doors
and the tailgate.
Pull the opening handle on one of the side
doors and release.
> Depending on the settings in the remote
control key, either all doors will be
unlocked or only the selected door will be
unlocked and opened.
To change this setting, tap on Settings
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock in the centre display's top
view.
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their respective rear door.
Unlocking the rear door
–
Pull the opening handle.
> The rear door is unlocked and opened.
The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Related information
•
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 243)
•
Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the
car (p. 267)
•
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 268)
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside by
pressing a button on the instrument panel.
1.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 266)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 269)
Brief press on the
button on the instrument panel.
> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubberised pressure plate.
2.
With the power operated tailgate option* button on the instruLong press on the
ment panel.
> The tailgate opens.
* Option/accessory. 267
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
2.
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
There is an electric* and a manual lock.
Activating and deactivating electrically*
The electric child safety locks can be activated
and deactivated in all ignition positions higher
than 0. Activation and deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the
car, provided that no door is opened.
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
Symbol
When the electric child safety lock is active then
the rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the driver's
door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
Message
Specification
Rear child
lock Activated
Child safety
locks are activated.
Rear child
lock Deactivated
Child safety
locks are deactivated.
Activating and deactivating manually
To deactivate the locks:
–
Button for electric activation and deactivation.
1.
Start the car or choose an ignition position
higher than 0.
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
When the car is switched off, the current setting
is stored – if the child safety locks are activated
when the car is switched off, the function will
continue to be activated next time the car is
started.
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with manual door locks.
–
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
268
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Automatic locking when driving
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
when the car starts to move.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
To change this setting:
2.
Press My Car
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 266)
3.
Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to
deactivate or activate this function.
•
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Related information
Related information
•
Locking.
Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate
The car's tailgate can be opened and closed
electrically.
Opening
Choose one of the following options to open the
power operated tailgate:
–
Long press on the remote control key's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 266)
}}
* Option/accessory. 269
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
–
Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
–
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate to close.
–
Closing
–
Light press on the tailgate handle.
> The tailgate closes automatically – the tailgate remains unlocked.
Choose one of the following options to close16
the power operated tailgate:
NOTE
16
270
•
The button is active 24 hours after the
hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it
must be closed manually.
•
If the flap has been open for more than 30
minutes, it will close at a slow speed.
A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
–
–
–
Long press on the
button on the remote
control key.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
Closing and locking16
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be
closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically – the
tailgate and doors are locked, and the
alarm* is armed.
–
Long press on the
button on the instrument panel.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
Cancel opening or closing in one of the following
ways:
•
•
•
Press the button on the instrument panel.
•
Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath
the outside handle.
•
Using a foot movement*.
NOTE
•
One of the car's remote control keys must
be within range for locking and unlocking
to work.
•
When using keyless* locking or closing,
three signals will sound if the key is not
detected sufficiently close to the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be damaged and stop working correctly.
16
Cancel opening or closing
A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
Press the remote control key's button.
Press the closing button on the underside of
the tailgate.
The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops.
The tailgate can then be operated manually.
If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position,
the next activation will open the tailgate.
Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening or closing then the
pinch protection is activated.
•
During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
sounds.
•
During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds
and the tailgate returns to the programmed
max. position.
}}
* Option/accessory. 271
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
WARNING
Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
as trapping may have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Related information
•
Programming maximum opening for power
operated tailgate* (p. 272)
•
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 273)
•
Remote control key range (p. 244)
Programming maximum opening for
power operated tailgate*
Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low roof
height.
To adjust max. opening:
1.
Pre-tensioned springs
Open the tailgate - stop it in the open position.
NOTE
It is not possible to program an opening position lower than half-open tailgate.
2.
button on the underside of
Press the
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two short acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been saved.
To reset max. opening:
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate.
WARNING
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
power operated tailgate. They are pre-tensioned with high pressure and can cause
injury if opened.
272
–
Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position – press and hold the
button on the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
that the set position has been cleared.
The tailgate will then assume its maximum
position when opened.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
•
If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
about 2 minutes.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 269)
Opening and closing the tailgate
with foot movement*
To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when
your hands are occupied, it can be opened and
closed by means of a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with
a foot movement.
The function with both opening and closing of
the tailgate is also available when the car is
equipped with power operated tailgate*.
NOTE
The foot-operated tailgate function is available in two versions:
•
•
The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range behind the car (approx. 1 metre (3
feet)) for opening and closing to be possible. This
also applies to an already unlocked car in order
to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash.
Opening and closing with foot movement
Only unlocking with foot movement (lift
up the tailgate manually to open it)
Note that the function for opening and closing with foot movement requires power operated tailgate*.
}}
* Option/accessory. 273
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Opening and closing with foot
movement
Do not leave your foot positioned under the car
during the kicking motion. This could cause activation to fail.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 262)
Cancelling opening or closing with foot
movement
– Make one slow forward kicking motion when
opening or closing is in progress in order to
stop the movement of the tailgate.
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 269)
•
Remote control key range (p. 244)
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or closing.
If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position,
the next activation will open the tailgate.
Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.
–
Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper. Then
take a step back. The bumper must not be
touched.
> A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening or closing is activated - the tailgate is opened/closed.
If the tailgate is in open position, it is
closed17 on activation via foot movement.
If several kicking motions take place without an
approved remote control key being located
behind the car, opening will not be possible until
after a certain delay.
17
274
NOTE
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the system may be activated in a car wash or similar
if the remote key is within range.
Applies to cars with power operated tailgate*.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Private locking
The tailgate can be locked with the private locking function which prevents it from being
opened, e.g. when the car is taken in for service,
left at a hotel or similar.
The private locking function
button is located in the centre
display function view. Depending on the current status of the
lock, Private Locking
Unlocked or Private Locking
Locked is shown.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 275)
Activating and deactivating private
locking
2.
Private locking is activated with a function button
in the centre display and an optional PIN code.
NOTE
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to be
activated.
Enter the desired security code.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready for activation.
If the system has been reset then the above procedure needs to be repeated.
Activate private locking
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
Enter the security code before using for
the first time
A security code needs to be selected during the
first time the function is used. It can then be used
to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN
code has been lost or forgotten. The security
code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN
codes set for the private locking function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
To create a security code:
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2.
Enter the code to be used in order to unlock
the tailgate after locking and tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of
locking takes place by means of a green
indicator being shown by the button in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
}}
275
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Deactivate private locking
Related information
1.
•
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
Private locking (p. 275)
Alarm*
The alarm provides audible and visual warnings
if anyone enters the car without a valid remote
control key or manipulates the starter battery or
alarm siren.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
> A pop-up window is shown.
2.
Enter the code that was used for locking and
tap on Confirm.
> The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of
unlocking takes place by means of the
green indicator by the button in the function view extinguishing.
•
•
•
•
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened18
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
a tilt detector*)
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals
NOTE
If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if
the wrong PIN code has been entered more
than three times, the security code can be
used to deactivate the private locking.
NOTE
If private locking is activated and the car is
unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On
Call* app, private locking will be deactivated
automatically.
18
276
When the alarm has been triggered, the following
happens:
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times18.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Alarm indicator
ment - air currents are also registered. For this
reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with
a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the
passenger compartment heater is used.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.
To avoid this:
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the
alarm system's status:
•
•
LED not lit – alarm not armed.
•
After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED
flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds
or until ignition position I has been activated
- the alarm has been triggered.
The LED flashes once every other second –
alarm is armed.
Movement and tilt sensors*
Movement and tilt sensors react to movements
inside the car, if the window is broken or if anyone tries to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle
away.
•
Close the window and panoramic roof when
leaving the car.
•
If the passenger compartment or parking
heater is to be used – direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they do not point
upwards in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 278)
Reduced alarm level* (p. 279)
Double lock* (p. 279)
Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt sensors.
Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors
when the car is being transported on a ferry or
train as these movements may affect the car and
trigger the alarm.
In the event of an alarm system fault
If there is a fault in the alarm system,
the driver display shows the symbol
and the message Alarm system
failure Service required. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the
event of movement in the passenger compart-
* Option/accessory. 277
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating alarms*
Deactivate the alarm
The alarm is armed when the car is locked.
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows:
Arming the alarm
•
press the remote control key's unlock button
•
grip one of the door handles or press on the
tailgate's rubberised pressure plate19.
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:
•
press the remote control key's lock button
•
touch the marked surface on the outside of
the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised
pressure plate19.
If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/
unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*, the
button on the underside of the tailgate can
also be used to lock the car and arm the car
alarm.
Deactivate the alarm without a functioning
remote control key
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if
the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the
remote control key's battery is dead.
1.
Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
3.
Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Switching off a triggered alarm
Press the remote control key's unlock button
or set the car in ignition position I by turning
the start knob clockwise and then releasing.
–
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Automatic arming and rearming of the
alarm
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car
being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is
relocked at the same time.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
2.
A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once every
two seconds when the car is locked and the alarm is
armed.
19
278
Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.
In certain markets, the alarm is armed automatically after a certain delay after the driver's door
has been opened and closed without being
locked.
Only applies to a car with keyless locking and unlocking* (Passive Entry).
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
To change this setting:
Reduced alarm level*
Double lock*
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
A reduced alarm level means that the movement
and tilt sensors are temporarily switched off.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Select Passive Arming Deactivation to
deactivate the function temporarily.
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry.
Double lock means that all opening handles are
disengaged mechanically, which prevents door
opening from the inside when the car is locked
from the outside.
Locking.
Related information
•
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display
function view to switch off the
movement and tilt sensors
when subsequently locking the
car.
Alarm* (p. 276)
Double locks are activated with the remote control key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*.
Double locks are activated with a delay of about
10 seconds after the doors have locked.
If a door is opened within the delay time then the
sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.
NOTE
At the same time, the double lock function is
deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible.
•
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
reduced alarm level must be reactivated.
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Related information
•
•
Alarm* (p. 276)
Double lock* (p. 279)
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On
Call* app when double locks are activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with
the detachable key blade, the alarm will be triggered.
}}
* Option/accessory. 279
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the double lock in order
to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Related information
•
Temporarily deactivating double locks*
(p. 280)
•
Alarm* (p. 276)
Temporarily deactivating double
locks*
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then the
double lock function should be deactivated, to
allow unlocking from the inside.
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to deactivate the double lock function
temporarily.
This also means that the alarm's movement and
tilt detectors* are switched off.
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the centre display and double locks are temporarily
deactivated in the subsequent locking of the car.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are
deactivated immediately, but when double locks
are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for
a maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
double lock function must be deactivated again.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
•
•
280
Double lock* (p. 279)
Alarm* (p. 276)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
The car is equipped with different driver support
systems which can assist the driver in different
situations, either actively or passively.
For example, the systems can help the driver to:
•
•
•
•
maintain a set speed
maintain a certain time interval to the vehicle
ahead
prevent a collision by giving a warning to the
driver and braking the car
help the driver to park.
Some of the systems are fitted as standard while
others are options – which alternative applies is
market dependent.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
282
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 363)
Speed-dependent steering force
BLIS* (p. 364)
Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 369)
Road Sign Information* (p. 373)
Driver Alert Control (p. 380)
Lane assistance (p. 383)
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
Park Assist* (p. 400)
Park assist camera* (p. 406)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
On motorways the steering feels firmer. When
parking and at low speed steering is light and
requires only a slight effort.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled - during this time the power
steering operates with reduced power and
turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance, the driver display shows a
message as well as a STEERING WHEEL
symbol.
Automatic speed limiter (p. 291)
Cruise control (p. 295)
Distance Warning* (p. 300)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Radar unit (p. 336)
Camera unit (p. 345)
City Safety™ (p. 349)
WARNING
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions
and steering assistance system are not available.
In such a situation, the driver display shows
the Power steering failure message, combined with a STEERING WHEEL symbol.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Change the steering force level*
Electronic stability control
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive
modes" section and see the description at the
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading
"Selectable drive modes".
Electronic Stability Control (ESC1) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's
traction.
For the car models without a drive mode control
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of
steering force is instead made via the centre display's top view and the following search path:
Settings My Car
Steering Force
Drive Modes
Steering force selection cannot be accessed during a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Drive modes* (p. 447)
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Lane assistance (p. 383)
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
The driver display shows this
symbol when the ESC system
is engaged.
Braking from the ESC system
may be heard as a pulsing
sound, and the car may accelerate more slowly than expected when applying
the throttle.
The ESC system consists of the following subfunctions:
•
•
•
•
Stability function2
Spin control and traction control system
Engine Drag Control
Trailer stability assist
WARNING
•
The stability system ESC is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
ESC is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Stability function2
The function checks the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
Spin control and traction control system
The function is active at low speed and brakes
the drive wheels that spin so that additional traction shall be transferred from the drive wheels
that are not spinning.
The function also prevents the driving wheels
from spinning against the road surface during
acceleration.
1
2
Electronic Stability Control
Also known as Active Yaw Control.
}}
* Option/accessory. 283
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Engine Drag Control
•
Engine Drag Control (EDC3) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
braking when driving in low gear on slippery road
surfaces.
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control (p. 286)
Sport mode for electronic stability
control
•
Trailer stability assist* (p. 483)
The ESC6 system is always activated — it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can
select ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a
more active driving experience.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
Trailer stability assist*4
Trailer stability assist (TSA5) stabilises a car towing a trailer in situations where they begin snaking. Also see section "Trailer stability assist" for
more information.
With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction
selected, intervention from ESC is reduced and
the car is allowed to skid more and greater control than normal is thus transferred to the driver.
When ESC Sport Mode is selected, ESC can be
considered as deactivated, despite the function
continuing to help the driver in many cases.
NOTE
NOTE
The TSA function is deactivated if ESC Sport
Mode is activated.
With the ESC Sport Mode function
selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA7) is
deactivated.
Related information
•
Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 284)
•
Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Electronic Stability Control (p. 285)
•
Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stability Control (p. 285)
3 Engine Drag Control
4 Trailer stability assist is included
5 Trailer Stability Assist
6 Electronic Stability Control
7 Trailer Stability Assist
284
ESC Sport Mode also provides maximum traction if the car has become bogged down or is
driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or
deep snow.
when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Towbar* (p. 478)
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
in Electronic Stability Control
Limitation for sport mode in
Electronic Stability Control
The ESC8 system is always activated — it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can
select sport mode, which allows for a more
active driving experience.
There are certain limitations associated with the
ESC9 system's subfunction ESC Sport Mode
being activated.
The Sport mode is activated/
deactivated in the centre display's function view.
–
Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in the
function view.
> Sport mode is activated/deactivated - a
green/grey indicator is displayed in the
button.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the following functions is
activated:
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control
Pilot Assist.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
The driver display indicates activated
ESC Sport Mode by displaying this
symbol with a constant glow until the
function is deactivated or the engine is
switched off. The next time the engine is started,
the ESC system is back in its normal mode again.
Related information
•
8
9
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory. 285
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
electronic stability control
Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
A number of symbols and messages regarding
electronic stability control (Electronic Stability
Symbol
Message
Specification
Constant glow for
approx. 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow.
Sport mode is selected.
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced.
ESC
Temporarily off
ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
See the message in the driver display.
ESC
ESC system disengaged.
Service required
•
•
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the
ing the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
286
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed Limiter
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the speed limiter to standby mode
A speed limiter (SL10) can be likened to a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the
speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set maximum speed by the speed limiter.
: Reduces stored maximum speed
Marker for stored max speed
Related information
•
•
•
Managing speed for the speed limiter
(p. 288)
•
Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in
standby mode (p. 289)
•
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby
mode (p. 290)
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
WARNING
•
•
Buttons and symbols for functions11.
: Activates the speed limiter from
standby mode and resumes stored maximum
speed
: Increases the stored maximum speed
: From standby mode - activates the
speed limiter and stores current speed
10
11
•
The Speed Limiter function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The driver must always pay attention to
traffic conditions and take action if the
Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suitable speed.
Limitations for Speed Limiter (p. 291)
Activating and starting the Speed Limiter
(p. 288)
•
•
•
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 290)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 291)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 295)
•
Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter
(p. 293)
•
Changing the tolerance for the automatic
speed limiter (p. 294)
The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Speed Limiter
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
287
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating and starting the Speed
Limiter
mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h
(20 mph).
The speed limiter function (SL12) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed.
–
When the speed limiter is in standby mode
symbol is shown - press the
and the
steering wheel button
(2).
> The Speed Limiter starts and the current
speed is stored as the maximum speed.
Set the speed limiter in standby mode
Managing speed for the speed
limiter
The speed limiter (SL13) can be set to different
speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
Related information
•
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym(4).
bol/function for speed limiter
> Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter
is set in standby mode.
Start the Speed Limiter
The speed limiter cannot be activated until after
the engine has been started. The lowest maxi12
13
288
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Change a set speed with short presses on
(1) or
the steering wheel buttons
(3) or by pressing and holding them.
•
Short presses: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
Deactivate the speed limiter and set
it in standby mode
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter (SL14) can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
The speed limiter can also be temporarily deactivated and overridden with the accelerator pedal
without the speed limiter first having to be set in
standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation.
In which case, proceed as follows:
1.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it to interrupt acceleration when the
desired speed has been reached.
> In this mode, the speed limiter is still activated and the driver display's symbol is
therefore WHITE.
2.
Fully release the accelerator pedal when the
temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then engine-braked automatically to below the last stored maximum
speed.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in
standby mode:
–
14
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver can
exceed the maximum speed setting.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
Speed Limiter
289
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
standby mode
–
The speed limiter (SL15) can be reactivated after
having been temporarily deactivated and placed
in standby mode.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The Speed Limiter indicators and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply
its current speed as the maximum speed.
Deactivating the speed limiter
The speed limiter (SL16) can be deactivated.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby
mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button
(1).
> The driver display's speed limit markings
change colour from GREY to WHITE - the
car's speed is then limited again by the
last stored maximum speed.
or
15
16
290
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
To deactivate the cruise control:
1.
(2).
Press the steering wheel button
> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator
for speed limiter (4) are switched off which deletes the set/stored maximum
speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
3.
Press the steering wheel button
again.
> Another function is activated.
Related information
•
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
(2)
Limitations for Speed Limiter
On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s
braking effect may be inadequate and hence the
stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this
case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed
limit exceeded in the driver display.
NOTE
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
Automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) function
helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum
speed to the speed shown on the road signs.
The Speed Limiter function (SL17) can be
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The automatic speed limiter uses speed information from the Road Sign Information (RSI) function to automatically adapt the car's maximum
speed.
Related information
•
17
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
}}
291
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
•
•
•
292
The ASL function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the driver display show which speed
limiter function is active:
Symbol
See also the heading "Limitations for
Road Sign Information".
ASL
Meaning
Greenish yellow
ASL is active
Grey
✓
Even if the driver clearly sees the speedrelated road sign, the speed information
from the Road Sign Information (RSI)
function to ASL may be incorrect – in
such cases the driver must intervene
him/herself and accelerate or brake to a
suitable speed.
ASL is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
SL
Colour of sign
symbol
✓
Amber/Orange
A
✓
Sign symbolB after "70" = ASL is activated.
A
B
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the meaning of the symbol's colour.
The ASL symbol
The sign symbol (displayed alongside
the stored speed, "70", in the centre of
the speedometer) can be shown in
three colours with the following meanings:
ASL has been set in
standby mode
ASL is in temporary standby
mode - e.g. due to a traffic
sign not being read.
Related information
•
•
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter
(p. 293)
•
Changing the tolerance for the automatic
speed limiter (p. 294)
•
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 295)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Automatic
Speed Limiter
NOTE
•
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL) can
be activated and deactivated as a supplement to
the speed limiter (SL).
Activate ASL
The Speed Sign Assist button is located in the function
view of the centre display.
To activate the automatic speed limiter:
1.
2.
Press the Speed Sign Assist button.
> ASL is set in standby mode, a green indicator appears on the button, and the
driver display shows a sign symbol in the
centre of the speedometer.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI18 is not
activated.
•
To remove road sign information from the
driver display, you must deactivate both
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
•
When the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
warnings are given from RSI. RSI must
also be activated in order to receive
warnings.
Related information
•
•
•
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 291)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information (p. 374)
Deactivate ASL
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:
–
Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in
the function view.
> ASL is deactivated and the button's indication becomes GREY - SL is activated
instead.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL the car will no
longer follow the signed speed limit but only
the maximum speed stored in memory.
18
Road Sign Information – RSI
293
DRIVER SUPPORT
Changing the tolerance for the
automatic speed limiter
–
The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL) can
be set for different tolerance levels.
It is possible to increase/decrease the signed
speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a
signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the
driver can instead choose to allow the car to
maintain 75 km/h (47 mph).
Press the steering wheel button
(1)
until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the
speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h
(47 mph).
> After which, the car uses the selected tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs
passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).
•
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information (p. 374)
The tolerance is followed until a road sign
with a lower or higher speed is passed then the car follows the new signed
speed limit instead and the tolerance is
deleted from the memory.
If the Road Sign Information*20 function is
activated, the signed speed limit will also
be shown with a coloured indicator on the
speedometer.
The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the
speed setting is in the speed limiter.
NOTE
Buttons and symbols for
The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
functions19.
Related information
•
•
19
20
294
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 291)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Road Sign Information - RSI
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for automatic speed
limiter
Automatic speed limitation (ASL) takes place
using speed information from the RSI21 function
- not from the speed limit road signs that the car
passes.
Cruise control
The cruise control (CC) helps the driver maintain
an even speed, resulting in more relaxed driving
on motorways and long, straight roads in regular
traffic flows.
Overview
If RSI21 cannot interpret and provide speed information to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby
mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the
driver must intervene and brake to a suitable
speed.
: Reduces stored speed
Marker for stored speed
The car's current speed
Stored speed
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI21 function can once again interpret and provide speed
information to the ASL.
See also the section "Limitations for Road Sign
Information".
Related information
•
•
•
•
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 291)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 295)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information (p. 374)
Buttons and symbols for functions22.
: Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates cruise
control and stores current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode
21
22
Road Sign Information - RSI
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 295
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
The cruise control function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate
driving – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
•
Cruise control is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control (p. 317)
Activating and starting Cruise
Control
The cruise control function (CC23) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Set cruise control in standby mode
Related information
296
•
Activating and starting Cruise Control
(p. 296)
•
Managing speed for the cruise control
(p. 297)
•
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in
standby mode (p. 298)
•
Reactivating Cruise Control from standby
mode (p. 299)
•
Deactivating cruise control (p. 299)
To set cruise control in standby mode:
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the symbol/function
(4).
> The symbol is shown and the cruise control can then be activated.
Activating/starting cruise control
In order to start the Cruise control from the
standby mode, the car's current speed must be
DRIVER SUPPORT
30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed
that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).
Managing speed for the cruise
control
•
To start the cruise control:
Cruise control (CC24) can be set to different
speeds.
If the driver increases the car's speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
(1), the speed stored will be
the car's speed when the button is depressed,
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator
pedal at the moment when the button is
depressed.
–
With the symbol/function
displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Cruise Control starts and the current
speed becomes the stored speed.
Setting/changing the stored speed
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 295)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model and market.
–
Change a set speed with short presses on
(1) or
the steering wheel buttons
(3) or by pressing and holding them.
•
•
23
24
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
Short presses: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less
frequent application of the foot brake. On a
downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable
to start moving a little faster and limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this case the driver
can temporarily disable foot brake application by
Cruise Control.
To do so, proceed as follows:
–
Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway
down and release.
> Cruise Control will disengage its automatic foot braking and then uses engine
braking only.
}}
297
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Cruise control dependence on drive
mode
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it
in standby mode
The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed
may vary depending on the selected drive
mode25.
Cruise control (CC26) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
Eco Cruise cruise control with ECO drive
mode
In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelerations and decelerations become smoother compared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and
environmental economy. This can cause the car's
speed to be temporarily above or below the set
speed.
Deactivate Cruise Control and set in
standby mode
Related information
•
•
•
25
26
298
Cruise control (p. 295)
Drive modes* (p. 447)
Drive mode ECO (p. 450)
•
•
•
the foot brake is used
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the gear selector is moved to N position
the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer
than 1 minute
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
See supplementary information in "ECO drive
mode" under "Cruise control Eco Cruise".
Cruise control Dynamic Cruise
In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accelerations and decelerations are felt more strongly
and seem more direct compared to other modes.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode if:
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To set cruise control in standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver
must then manually control the speed.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
•
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
engine speed is too low/high
brake temperature is too high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 295)
See supplementary information in the section "Drive modes".
Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
Cruise control (CC27) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
To start cruise control from standby mode:
–
Reactivating cruise control from
standby mode
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the current speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise Control — CC can be deactivated.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 295)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To start cruise control from standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button
(1).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the most recently stored speed again.
or
27
Cruise Control
}}
299
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Related information
•
•
Cruise control (p. 295)
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control (p. 317)
Buttons and symbols for functions28.
To deactivate cruise control:
The Distance Warning30 function can assist the
driver to notice that the time interval to the vehicle ahead may be too short.
However, the requirement is that the car is
equipped with a Head-up display to be able to
show Distance Warning, which is then displayed
with a symbol on the windscreen as long as the
time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preselected value.
Distance warning is active at speeds
above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the
vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No
distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
1.
(2).
Press the steering wheel button
> Cruise control is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol for cruise con-
•
trol
(4) is extinguished - which
deletes the set/stored speed.
Distance Alert is only available on cars
that can display information on the windscreen with a Head-up Display.
•
Distance warning is deactivated during
the time the adaptive cruise control or
Pilot Assist is active.
3.
28
29
30
300
Distance Warning*29
Press the steering wheel button
again.
> Another function is activated.
(2)
NOTE
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
Distance Alert
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the
preset value – the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.
Head up display for Distance
Warning31
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
In cars equipped with head up display*, a symbol is shown on the windscreen for as long as
the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the preset value.
Related information
•
Head up display for Distance Warning
(p. 301)
•
Activating/deactivating Distance warning
(p. 302)
•
Setting the time interval for Distance Warning (p. 302)
•
Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 303)
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 300)
Head-up display* (p. 136)
Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen32.
However, this presupposes that the Show Driver
Support function is activated via settings in the
car's menu system; see the section "Head up
display" for how this works.
31
32
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 301
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating/deactivating Distance
warning33
Setting the time interval for
Distance Warning34
The Distance Warning function can be deactivated.
The Distance Warning function can be set with
different time intervals.
On/Off
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
Press the Distance Alert button in the centre display function view.
•
GREEN button indication - Distance Warning
is activated.
•
GREY button indication - Distance Warning
is deactivated.
Related information
33
34
302
Decrease time interval
The same symbol is also shown when the adaptive cruise control function is activated.
Distance Warning is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
•
Control for time interval.
Distance Warning* (p. 300)
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval.
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
Limitations of Distance Warning35
•
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
The Distance Warning function may have limitations in certain situations.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
The set time window is also used by the
adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist
functions.
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action in an
unexpected traffic situation.
Related information
•
35
Distance Warning* (p. 300)
The Distance Warning function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The vehicle's size may affect the ability to
detect, e.g. motorcycles, which could
mean that the warning lamp illuminates at
a shorter time window than set or that the
warning is temporarily absent.
•
Extremely high speeds can cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter time window than that set due to limitations in
radar unit range.
•
Distance Warning is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
WARNING
•
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 300)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
* Option/accessory. 303
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control*
(ACC36)
The adaptive cruise control
helps the
driver to maintain an even speed combined with
a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
An adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.
is clear again the car returns to the selected
speed.
WARNING
•
The adaptive cruise control function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
•
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead37.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and
radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is adapted automatically via the
preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road
36
37
304
The adaptive cruise control is not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
NOTE
This function can come as either Standard or
an Option depending on the market.
Adaptive Cruise Control regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used to adjust the speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any
vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain
the speed set and stored by the driver. This also
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead
increases and exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
•
Adaptive Cruise Control can follow another
vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gearbox:
•
The Adaptive Cruise Control can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Adaptive Cruise Control
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
Overview
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
•
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver is always
responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead.
Controls
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle at the preset
time interval
•
The adaptive cruise control does not
brake for humans or animals, and not for
small vehicles such as bicycles and
motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
•
Do not use the adaptive cruise control in
demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with
a lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Buttons and symbols for functions37.
: Activates the adaptive cruise control
from standby mode and resumes stored
speed
: Increases the stored speed
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
: From standby mode - activates the
adaptive cruise control and stores current
speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the adaptive cruise control to
standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
37
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 305
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 307)
Adaptive Cruise Control and
Collision risk warning
•
Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 308)
•
Setting time interval for adaptive cruise control (p. 309)
The adaptive cruise control can warn the driver if
the distance to the vehicle ahead suddenly
becomes too short.
•
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 311)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control (p. 313)
•
Starting overtaking assistance with adaptive
cruise control (p. 313)
•
Limitations for overtaking assistance with
adaptive cruise control (p. 314)
Speed of vehicle ahead.
•
Current speed of your car.
Changing target with adaptive cruise control
(p. 314)
•
Automatic braking with adaptive cruise control (p. 315)
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control
(p. 316)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control (p. 317)
•
Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 318)
Driver display
Indication of speeds37.
Stored speed
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise
control".
Related information
•
Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk
warning (p. 306)
•
Head up display for adaptive cruise control if
there is a risk of collision (p. 307)
37
38
306
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Audio and symbol for collision warning38.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the
capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be
braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise
control is capable of and the driver does not
DRIVER SUPPORT
brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are
activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.
WARNING
Head up display for adaptive cruise
control if there is a risk of collision
Activating and starting Adaptive
Cruise Control
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing symbol.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC40) must first be
activated and then started if it is to control the
speed and distance.
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar unit has detected hence a warning may not be given, or it may
be given with a certain delay.
•
Setting the adaptive cruise control in
standby mode
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen39.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Immediately after the engine is started the Adaptive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set
it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as
follows:
–
Related information
•
•
39
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Head-up display* (p. 136)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Press steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to
scroll to the symbol/function
(4).
> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive
Cruise Control is set in standby mode.
}}
* Option/accessory. 307
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Starting/activating the adaptive cruise
control
–
In order to start the ACC the following requirements apply:
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
With the symbol/function
(4) displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(1).
> Adaptive cruise control starts and the current speed is stored, which is shown in
figures in the centre of the speedometer.
Managing speed with Adaptive
Cruise Control
The adaptive cruise control (ACC41) can be set
to different speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
The time interval is only
adjusted to the vehicle ahead
by the ACC when the distance
symbol shows two vehicles.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model and market.
: Increases the stored speed.
: Reduces stored speed.
Stored speed.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
40
41
308
Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
–
Change a set speed with short presses on
(1) or
the steering wheel buttons
(2) or by pressing and holding them.
•
•
•
Short presses: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (3) has moved to the
desired speed.
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car's speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
(1), the speed stored will be
the car's speed when the button is depressed,
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator
pedal at the moment when the button is
depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
Setting time interval for adaptive
cruise control
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC42) can be
set to different time intervals.
Manual gearbox
The Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
The lowest programmable speed for the adaptive
cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
The same symbol is also shown when the Distance Warning function is activated.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front
at a pre-set time interval.
When only one car is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Automatic gearbox
Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) even though it is capable of following another
}}
* Option/accessory. 309
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
Select one of the following options:
•
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
• Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy,
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
• Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set
•
If the adaptive cruise control does not
seem to respond with a speed increase
when activated, it may be because the
time window to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time window.
||
Control for time interval43.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary significantly in certain situations in
order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when
the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.
42
43
310
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action in an
unexpected traffic situation.
Select how ACC shall maintain the
distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can select different driving styles for
how the Adaptive Cruise Control should maintain
the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control
DRIVE MODE.
which means longer time interval to the vehicle ahead.
time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
• Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set
time interval to the vehicle ahead more
closely, which in certain cases may mean
heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sections.
Supplementary information can also be found in
the sections "Managing speed for the cruise control" and "Drive mode ECO".
Related information
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
•
•
•
Drive modes* (p. 447)
•
Drive mode ECO (p. 450)
Managing speed for the cruise control
(p. 297)
Adaptive Cruise Control
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive
Cruise Control
To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control
and set it in standby mode:
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC44) can be
temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the
standby mode and can later be reactivated.
–
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The
symbol on the driver display
changes colour from WHITE to GREY and
the stored speed in the centre of the
speedometer changes from BEIGE to
GREY.
•
the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and
set it in standby mode
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
WARNING
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
•
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene
and regulate both speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
•
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too close
to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of
the short distance by the Distance Warning function instead.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if:
•
•
44
Adaptive Cruise Control
the foot brake is used.
the gear selector is moved to N position.
}}
311
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. Electronic Stability Control
ESC45. If any of the other systems stops working,
the adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically.
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
on the driver display.
•
engine speed is too low/high.
WARNING
one or more wheels lose traction.
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
brake temperature is high.
the parking brake is applied.
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Reactivating adaptive cruise control
from standby mode
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Automatic standby mode may occur if:
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC
is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a
stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
•
•
45
312
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
the driver opens the door.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate ACC from standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button
(1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Overtaking assistance with adaptive
cruise control
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC46) can assist the
driver when overtaking other vehicles.
How overtaking assistance works
•
•
•
When ACC is following another vehicle and the
driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating the direction indicator47, adaptive cruise
control helps by accelerating the vehicle towards
the vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle
reaches the overtaking lane.
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly.
46
47
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Starting overtaking assistance with
adaptive cruise control
Starting overtaking assistance with adaptive
cruise control (p. 313)
Overtaking assistance requires a number of conditions.
Limitations for overtaking assistance with
adaptive cruise control (p. 314)
Continuation for Overtaking Assistance
Related information
The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated:
•
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
vehicle”)
•
your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
(43 mph)
•
the stored ACC speed must be high enough
for overtaking to take place safely.
Starting Overtaking Assistance
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
–
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left-hand direction indicator in a lefthand drive car right in a right-hand drive car.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control (p. 313)
Adaptive Cruise Control
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
* Option/accessory. 313
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for overtaking
assistance with adaptive cruise
control
The overtaking assistance function may have limited functionality in certain situations.
WARNING
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control (p. 313)
Changing target with adaptive
cruise control
In combination with automatic gearbox, the
adaptive cruise control (ACC49) has functionality
for change of target at certain speeds.
Change of target
When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change.
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
such as if:
•
the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
that is in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
•
the vehicle ahead slows down before the
driver's car has crossed over into the
overtaking lane.
•
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down.
•
a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When adaptive cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and
changes target from a moving to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down
for the stationary vehicle.
Situations of this kind can be avoided by temporarily setting ACC48 in the standby mode.
48
49
314
Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is
changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore
the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate
to the stored speed.
•
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set
in standby mode:
•
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, such as a speed
bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adaptive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Related information
•
50
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Adaptive Cruise Control
Automatic braking with adaptive
cruise control
NOTE
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC50) has a special brake function in slow traffic and while stationary.
ACC can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes. After this the parking
brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is
disengaged.
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
The parking brake must be released before
the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise
control is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
–
The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in
one of the following ways:
•
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within 6 seconds.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is
set in standby mode. This means that the brakes
are released and the car may start to roll - the
driver must therefore intervene and brake the car
himself/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in
the standby mode.
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations the parking brake is applied
to keep the car stationary.
}}
* Option/accessory. 315
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is
holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:
Limitations for adaptive cruise
control
•
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC51) may have limitations in certain situations.
•
ACC has kept the car stationary for more
than approx. 5 minutes
Steep roads and/or heavy load
•
•
the brakes have overheated
the driver switches the engine off manually.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in
which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
•
Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
the car.
Miscellaneous
•
Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected
when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
51
316
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Change between Cruise control and
adaptive cruise control
3.
In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) the
driver can change between Cruise Control (CC)
and ACC.
A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise
control is active:
CC
ACC
A
Cruise control
A
A
.
Press the steering wheel button
> Cruise control starts and stores the current speed.
WARNING
Switching from ACC to CC means that the
car:
•
no longer maintains a preset time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
•
only follows the stored speed, and the
driver must therefore apply the brakes
when necessary.
Adaptive cruise control
3.
.
Press the steering wheel button
> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores
the current speed, together with the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
Cruise control (p. 295)
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
Changing from ACC to CC
Proceed as follows:
1.
Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode
using steering wheel button
.
2.
Press the Cruise Control button in the centre display's function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
ACC to
CC. Adaptive Cruise Control is now switched off
and Cruise Control is set to standby
mode.
If CC is active when the engine is switched off,
ACC will be activated automatically the next time
the engine is started.
Changing from CC to ACC
Proceed as follows:
1.
Set cruise control to standby mode using the
steering wheel button.
2.
Tap on the Cruise Control button in the
function view - the button's indicator
changes colour from GREEN to GREY.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
CC to
ACC. Adaptive Cruise Control is now activated and
set to standby mode.
* Option/accessory. 317
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
Adaptive Cruise Control
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the adaptive cruise control (ACC52) can be
shown via the driver display and/or the head-up
display*.
Here are some examples53.
The previous illustration54 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
follow.
52
53
54
318
The previous illustration54 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and at the same time is following a
vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbol
Message
Specification
The symbol is WHITE.
The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Unavailable
The symbol is GREY.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
The symbol is GREY.
Windscreen sensor
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 304)
* Option/accessory. 319
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car
between the lane's side markings using steering
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed,
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
How Pilot Assist works
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for
use on motorways and similar major roads where
it can contribute to more comfortable driving and
a more relaxed driving experience.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans
the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's
side markings on the road surface using the
camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is
maintained with automatic speed adjustment
whilst the steering assistance helps to position
the car in the lane.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
account the speed of the preceding car and the
lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore
the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and
steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or
avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambiguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not
see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but
resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again although the speed and distance control functions remain active.
WARNING
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead and detects side markings55.
Camera and radar unit
Pilot Assist steering assistance is automatically deactivated and is resumed without prior
warning.
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
55
320
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
The current status of steering
assistance is indicated by the
colour of the steering wheel's
symbol:
• GREEN steering wheel indicates active steering assistance
• GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indicates deactivated steering assistance.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
•
•
•
•
The Pilot Assist function is supplementary
driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
clear lane lines painted on each side of
the lane. All other use involves increased
risk of contact with surrounding obstacles
that cannot be detected by the function.
Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, positioned correctly in the lane, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a
low sound when they are being used to adjust
the speed.
Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed
smoothly. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This
applies in cases of large speed differences or if
the car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking may
come unexpectedly or not at all.
Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in
the same lane at a time interval set by the driver.
If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front
then the car will instead maintain the speed set
and stored by the driver. This also takes place if
the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and
exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
•
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
•
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gearbox:
•
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
•
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h
(87 mph).
WARNING
•
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
•
Pilot Assist does not brake for people,
animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g.
cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as
well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions,
on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or
slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip
roads, or with a trailer connected to the
car.
NOTE
This function can come as either Standard or
an Option depending on the market.
}}
321
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of Pilot Assist internal components must only be performed at a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
mended to turn Pilot Assist off or switch to
Adaptive cruise control.
Overview
Controls
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control to
Pilot Assist
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Round bends and when the road splits
Function symbol
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should
therefore not wait for the steering assistance
from Pilot Assist but should always be prepared
to increase his/her own steering input, especially
in bends.
•
When the car approaches an exit or if the
lane splits, the driver should steer towards
the desired lane in order to specify the
desired direction to Pilot Assist.
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
the middle of the lane
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to position the car in between the lane markings and
therefore it is recommended to let the car find
the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a
driving experience as possible. The driver checks
that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and
always has the ability to adjust the position by
making his/her own steering corrections.
•
55
322
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an
appropriate way in the lane, it is recom-
Symbols for target vehicle and time interval
to vehicles ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
Buttons and symbols for functions55.
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the stored speed and
time interval
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
cruise control
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver display
Indication of speeds55.
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead
•
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist
(p. 327)
Pilot Assist and Collision risk
warning
•
•
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist (p. 328)
Pilot Assist can warn the driver if the distance to
the vehicle ahead suddenly becomes too short.
•
Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 331)
•
Limitations for overtaking assistance with
Pilot Assist (p. 331)
•
•
•
•
Change the target with Pilot Assist (p. 331)
Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 330)
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist (p. 332)
Limitations of Pilot Assist (p. 333)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 334)
Current speed of your car
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist".
Related information
•
Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning
(p. 323)
•
Head-up display for Pilot Assist if there is a
risk of collision (p. 324)
•
•
Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 325)
55
Managing speed for Pilot Assist (p. 326)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 323
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles
detected by its camera and radar unit – therefore a warning may not occur or be delayed.
•
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires!
Head-up display for Pilot Assist if
there is a risk of collision
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing symbol.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Audio and symbol for collision warning56.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's
capacity. If the car needs to be braked more
heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver
that immediate intervention is required.
56
57
324
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen57.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Head-up display* (p. 136)
Activating and starting Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist must first be activated and then
started to be able to control speed and distance
and to give steering assistance.
With the Adaptive cruise control in standby
mode:
1.
Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6).
> The
symbol changes to Pilot Assist
in standby mode (8).
2.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is
stored, which is shown with figures in the
centre of the speedometer.
...or...
With the Adaptive cruise control started:
–
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6).
> Pilot Assist is started.
Pilot Assist steering assistance
is only active when the steering
wheel symbol (2) has changed
from GREY to GREEN.
Pilot Assist only regulates the
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle
(1) above the steering wheel symbol.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle).
}}
* Option/accessory. 325
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Hands on the steering wheel
Managing speed for Pilot Assist
In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s
hands must be on the steering wheel.
Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds.
If Pilot Assist detects that the
driver is not holding the steering wheel, the driver is prompted after a pause to actively
steer the car, via a symbol and
a text message.
Setting/changing the stored speed
If the driver's hands still cannot be detected on
the steering wheel after a few seconds, the
prompt to actively steer the car is repeated, supplemented by an acoustic warning signal.
If Pilot Assist cannot detect the driver's hands on
the steering wheel after a further few seconds,
the warning signal becomes intensive and the
steering function is deactivated. Pilot Assist must
then be restarted using the steering wheel button
.
NOTE
Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
driver has hands on the steering wheel.
Related information
•
326
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
–
•
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model and market.
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
Stored speed
Change a set speed with short presses on
(1) or
the steering wheel buttons
(2) or by pressing and holding them.
•
Short presses: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (3) has moved to the
desired speed.
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car's speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
(1), the speed stored will be
the car's speed when the button is depressed,
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator
pedal at the moment when the button is
depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it
is capable of following another vehicle down to 0
km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph)
cannot be selected/stored.
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Manual gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Setting the time interval for Pilot
Assist
Pilot Assist can be set with different time intervals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
When the symbol in the driver display shows
a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap.
Related information
When only one steering wheel is shown, there
is no vehicle within a reasonable distance
ahead.
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Decrease time interval
NOTE
The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist
is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is
200 km/h (125 mph).
•
Control for time interval58.
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth
and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions.
For example, at low speed, when the distances
become short, Pilot Assist increases the time
interval slightly.
58
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
327
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
Select one of the following options:
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so
that it is set in the standby mode and can be
reactivated later.
•
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
• Eco - Pilot Assist focuses on optimal fuel
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
• Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following
•
If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond
with a speed increase when activated, it
may be because the time window to the
vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time
window.
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action in an
unexpected traffic situation.
Select how Pilot Assist shall maintain
the distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can select different driving styles for
how Pilot Assist should maintain the preset time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made
via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
economy, which means longer time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in
standby mode
• Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
more closely, which in certain cases may
mean heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sections.
Supplementary information can also be found in
the sections "Managing speed for the cruise control" and "Drive mode ECO".
Related information
•
•
•
•
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Drive modes* (p. 447)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Drive mode ECO (p. 450)
To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in
standby mode:
Managing speed for the cruise control
(p. 297)
–
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the
symbol (8) in the driver display changes
colour from WHITE to GREY and the
stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.
...or...
328
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (3).
> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes
to the Adaptive cruise control in active
mode.
–
WARNING
•
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulating both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
•
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and
the car comes too close to a vehicle
ahead, the driver is warned of the short
distance by the Distance Warning function instead.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily disengaged. When this is no longer the case, steering
assistance is automatically reactivated if the
lane's side markings can still be detected.
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g.
stability control/anti-skid ESC59. If any of these
other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is
switched off automatically.
the foot brake is used.
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
on the driver display.
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
•
the clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
59
•
the gear selector is moved to N position.
the direction indicators are used for longer
than 1 minute.
Electronic Stability Control
•
•
•
•
•
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.
the parking brake is applied.
engine speed is too low/high.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
one or more wheels lose traction.
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot
Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead
is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
WARNING
Standby mode on driver intervention
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in
standby mode if:
•
•
•
•
Automatic standby mode may occur if, for example:
•
•
the driver opens the door.
brake temperature is high.
}}
329
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Reactivating Pilot Assist from the
standby mode
Overtaking assistance with Pilot
Assist
Pilot Assist can help the driver when overtaking
other vehicles.
How overtaking assistance works
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
and the driver indicates the intention to overtake
by activating the direction indicator60, Pilot Assist
helps by accelerating the vehicle towards the
vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle reaches the overtaking lane.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate Pilot Assist:
–
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
Press the steering wheel button
(1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
60
330
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Related information
•
•
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 331)
•
Limitations for overtaking assistance with
Pilot Assist (p. 331)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Start overtaking assistance with
Pilot Assist
Limitations for overtaking
assistance with Pilot Assist
Overtaking assistance requires a number of conditions.
The overtaking assistance function may have limited functionality in certain situations.
The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated:
•
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
vehicle”)
•
your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
(43 mph)
•
the stored Pilot Assist speed must be high
enough for overtaking to take place safely.
WARNING
•
the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
that is in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
•
the vehicle ahead slows down before the
driver's car has crossed over into the
overtaking lane.
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left-hand direction indicator in a lefthand drive car right in a right-hand drive car.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 330)
Change of target
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
such as if:
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
•
•
In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot
Assist has functionality for change of target at
certain speeds.
When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change.
Starting Overtaking Assistance
–
Change the target with Pilot Assist
•
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down.
•
a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by temporarily setting Pilot Assist in the standby mode.
Related information
•
•
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 330)
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and
instead accelerate to the stored speed.
•
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
}}
331
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby
mode:
•
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist has a special brake function in slow
traffic and while stationary.
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot
Assist is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
–
Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following
way:
•
•
Press the steering wheel button
This may take place in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby
mode.
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle
ahead if it starts moving forward within
6 seconds.
NOTE
Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a
maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking
brake is applied and the function is disengaged.
Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the
parking brake must be released.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in
standby mode. This means that the brakes are
released and the car may start to roll - the driver
must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary.
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations, the parking brake is applied
in order to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car
stationary with the foot brake and:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
•
Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for
more than approx. 5 minutes
•
•
the brakes have overheated
the driver switches the engine off manually.
Related information
•
332
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Pilot Assist
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in
certain situations.
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help
the driver in many situations. But the driver is at
all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and a correct position in the lane.
between the car and such obstacles. The
driver must ensure him/herself that the
car is at a suitable distance from such
obstacles.
WARNING
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering
assistance may have difficulty helping the
driver in the right way or it may be automatically deactivated - in which case, the use of
Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of
such situations may be that:
•
the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other.
•
lane division is unclear, for example, when
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in
the event of multiple sets of markings.
•
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road surface, edges of barriers, roadside edges or
strong shadows.
•
•
•
the lane is narrow or winding.
The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming
objects and obstacles in traffic environments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
or objects which completely or partially
block the route.
•
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
•
The recommended steering input is force
limited, which means that it cannot always
help the driver to steer and keep the car
within the lane.
•
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
the function has the option of using information from map data, which may result
in varied performance.
•
Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
steering is working with reduced power e.g. during cooling due to overheating
(see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
the lane contains ridges or holes.
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view with
poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet
road surface etc.
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
•
•
High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers,
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they
may be detected incorrectly as lane markings, with a subsequent risk of contact
The driver always has the possibility of correcting
or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by
Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to
the desired position.
}}
* Option/accessory. 333
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case,
be extra attentive and ready to brake.
•
•
•
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display
and/or the head-up display*.
Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
load or a trailer is connected to the car.
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
Miscellaneous
• Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
Related information
•
•
334
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Here are some examples61.
The previous illustration62 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
61
62
The previous illustration62 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed.
The previous illustration62 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
335
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Radar unit
Related information
The radar unit is used by several driver support
systems and has the task of sensing other vehicles.
•
•
•
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
Recommended radar device maintenance
(p. 340)
Type approval for radar device (p. 341)
The previous illustration62 shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides steering assistance as the
lane markings can be detected.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Lane assistance
Pilot Assist*
City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
62
336
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for radar device
The radar unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Blocked unit
The radar unit is placed inside the upper section
of the windscreen together with the car's camera
unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-dependent functions.
If the driver display shows this symbol
and the message "Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in
front of the car and that the car's camera-based
and radar-based functions may be disrupted,
reduced, completely deactivated or give an incorrect function response.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.63.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
63
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
337
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Cause
Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals
or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera
and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
that drives in between your car and the vehicle ahead.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
Vehicle speed
In bends, the radar unit may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
view.
The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles
ahead is reduced significantly if:
•
the speed of the vehicle ahead is significantly different from that of your own car
Low trailers
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
Low trailer in radar shadow.
The radar unit's field of vision.
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting
vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle
338
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit
to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver
should therefore be particularly careful when driving behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise
control or Pilot Assist is activated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
•
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the windscreen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have
the windscreen replaced – an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Radar unit (p. 336)
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
•
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
339
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended radar device
maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
Related information
•
340
Radar unit (p. 336)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for radar device
The type approval for the car's radar units in the
ACC64, PA65 and BLIS66 functions can be read
out here.
Market
ACC &
PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
Brazil
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Modelo: L2C0055TR
✓
1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the
following link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation.
Europe
✓
✓
Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz
Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
64
65
66
Adaptive Cruise Control
Pilot Assist
Blind Spot Information
}}
341
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACC &
PA
BLIS
Type approval
REGISTERED No: ER37536/15
✓
The United Arab Emirates (UAE)
Symbol
DEALER No: DA37380/15
✓
REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
37295/POSTEL/2014
✓
4927
Indonesia
✓
38806/SDPPI/2015
4927
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
✓
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
Korea
✓
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Morocco
✓
✓
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
342
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
Mexico
Moldova
ACC &
PA
BLIS
✓
Singapore
И011 14
✓
✓
IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0314
✓
✓
Serbia
Type approval
IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299
✓
✓
Symbol
И011 15
✓
TA-2014/1824
✓
APPROVED
South Africa
✓
TA-2014/2390
APPROVED
}}
343
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACC &
PA
BLIS
✓
Taiwan
Symbol
Type approval
CCAB15LP0560T3
✓
CCAB15LP0680T0
Delphi і
Ukraine
Related information
•
344
Radar unit (p. 336)
✓
✓
і
(
2009 .) Д
є, щ
і
і
ь
)
і і
і
і
RACAM/SRR2 і
і є
і
і
і
(П
КМ № 679 і 24
ь
і Delphi
П
і
: Delphi.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Camera unit
Related information
The camera unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of for example
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
•
•
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Recommended camera device maintenance
(p. 349)
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The camera unit is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance*
Steering assistance at risk of collision
City Safety
Driver Alert Control*
Road Sign Information*
Active main beam*
* Option/accessory. 345
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for camera unit
Blocked unit
The camera unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Impaired vision
The camera has limitations similar to the human
eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense
snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms
and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the
functions of camera-dependent systems could be
significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings can also significantly reduce camera function when it is used
to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals and other vehicles.
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.67.
The camera unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's
radar unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-dependent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
67
346
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
If the driver display shows this symbol
and the message "Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large animals in
front of the car, and that the car's camera-based
and radar-based functions may be disrupted,
reduced, completely deactivated or give an incorrect function response.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along
with the appropriate action:
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or
covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and
radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar
signals or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road
surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light
No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the windscreen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have
the windscreen replaced – an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
•
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
}}
347
DRIVER SUPPORT
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
||
•
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
348
Camera unit (p. 345)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended camera device
maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
City Safety™
City Safety can alert the driver using a visual,
acoustic and brake pulse warning to help
him/her detect pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehicles that suddenly appear - the car
then attempts to brake automatically unless the
driver acts within a reasonable time him/herself.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking procedure, normally stopping the car just behind the
vehicle in front.
City Safety is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as
possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.
The driver or passengers are not normally aware
of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation
where a collision is immediately imminent.
Related information
•
The function helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of an imminent risk
of collision if the driver does not react in time by
braking and/or swerving.
Camera unit (p. 345)
Location of the radar unit68.
City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed.
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal,
cyclist or a vehicle.
The City Safety function can help the driver to
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g.
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with
a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
68
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
349
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
The City Safety is supplementary driver
support intended to improve driving safety
– it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The City Safety auto-brake function can
prevent a collision or reduce collision
speed, but to ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the
brake pedal – even when the car autobrakes.
•
•
•
•
350
•
WARNING
The warning and steering assistance are
only activated if there is a high risk of collision – you must therefore never wait for
a collision warning or for City Safety to
intervene.
The warning and brake intervention for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h
(50 mph).
City Safety does not activates any autobrake functions in the event of heavy
acceleration.
City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to City
Safety to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links for all subsections).
Related information
•
Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety
(p. 350)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 352)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 353)
•
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 355)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 357)
•
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 358)
•
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 359)
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic
(p. 356)
Messages for City Safety (p. 362)
Parameters and subfunctions for
City Safety
City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a
cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by
reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake
function.
If the speed difference is greater than the following specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake
function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates
the consequences of it.
Vehicles
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the
speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
cyclists
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by
up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by
up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals
In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by
up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The brake function for large animals is primarily
intended to reduce the force of the impact at
higher speeds and is most effective at speeds
above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at
lower speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Subfunctions for City Safety
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing
symbol.
Function overview69.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
1.
Collision warning
2.
Brake support
3.
Auto Brake
The following text explains what happens during
the three steps:
69
70
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle (including
vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross
traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by
means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning. There is no brake pulse warning at lower
speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration.
The brake pulse frequency varies according to
the car's speed.
2 - Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
City Safety carries out three steps in the following order:
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same
direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety
can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are crossing the road in front of the car.
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen70.
NOTE
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking
action if the system considers that the braking is
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 351
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
take evasive action and the risk of collision is
imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt
tensioner may also be activated. For more information see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section.
The driver can always interrupt a braking intervention by firmly depressing the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message
to the effect that the function is/has been active.
WARNING
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may
begin with light braking and then progress to full
brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object, the car remains stationary in
anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the
car has been braked to avoid collision with a
slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to
match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
stops when the Auto-brake function has stopped the car, unless the driver has managed to
depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
352
City Safety must not be used by the driver to
change his/her driving style - the driver must
not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do
the braking.
Related information
•
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
City Safety is always activated but the driver can
select the warning distance for the function.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deactivated. It is activated automatically when the
engine/electric operation is started and
remains switched on until the engine/electric
operation is switched off.
The warning distance determines the sensitivity
of the system and regulates the distance at
which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning
should be deployed.
To select warning distance:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Under City Safety Warning, select Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warning
distance.
City Safety™ (p. 349)
If the Early setting produces too many warnings,
which could be perceived as irritating in certain
situations, the Normal or Late warning distance
can be selected.
When warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing, the warning distance can be
reduced, which reduces the total number of
DRIVER SUPPORT
warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a
warning at a later stage.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"Late".
The Late warning distance should therefore only
be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving.
WARNING
•
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test City Safety by driving at people, animals or vehicles - this
may cause severe damage and injury and
risk lives.
•
City Safety warns the driver when there is
a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten
the driver’s reaction time.
•
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Early warnings could be perceived as
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily.
•
With the warning distance set at Early,
the warnings will come more in advance.
This may mean that the warnings come
more frequently than at the warning distance Normal, but it is recommended
since it can make City Safety more effective.
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 349)
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
The obstructions that City Safety can detect are
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detects most vehicles that are either
stationary or moving in the same direction as your
car, as well as vehicles described in the sections
"City Safety in intersecting traffic" and City Safety
brakes for oncoming traffic".
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a
vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear
lights must be working and clearly illuminated.
Cyclists
Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a
cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
}}
353
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
clearest possible information about the body and
bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
WARNING
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist.
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see:
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
•
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.).
•
pedestrians if the background contrast of
the pedestrians is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
•
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations
and, for example, cannot see:
•
•
partially obscured cyclists.
cyclists if the background contrast of the
cyclist is poor – warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at
all.
•
cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
•
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
354
Pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body outlines.
For optimal performance, the system function
that detects pedestrians must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline,
requiring the ability to identify the head, arms,
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement.
In order that it shall be possible to detect a
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
things as clothes, the background and the
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may
either be detected late or not at all, which may
mean that warnings and braking are late or omitted.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Large animals
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for example, cannot see:
Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as
large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with
clear body outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and
horse) must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the animal directly from the side in
combination with what is a normal pattern of
movement for the animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
the animal.
•
•
partially obscured large animals.
•
•
large animals that run or move quickly.
•
small animals such as dogs and cats, for
example.
City Safety can help the driver when turning and
crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at
an intersection.
larger animals seen from the front or from
behind.
large animals if the background contrast
of the animals is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety in cross traffic
City Safety™ (p. 349)
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 355)
Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming
crossing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on
a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first
enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse
the situation.
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 358)
City Safety can also detect large animals in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
}}
355
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
The following further criteria must also be fulfilled:
•
your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
•
your car must turn to the left in markets with
right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand
traffic)
•
the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on.
Related information
•
City Safety™ (p. 349)
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
helping the driver deal with collision risks due to
oncoming cross traffic.
WARNING
356
•
The "City Safety in crossing traffic" function is supplementary driver support
intended to improve driving safety – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Warnings and brake interventions due to
a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle
often come very late.
•
Never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Examples are:
•
stability control ESC intervenes in the event
of slippery driving conditions
•
•
if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late
•
if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off
•
if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpredictable manner, for example, abruptly
changes lanes at a late stage.
if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by something
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 349)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 359)
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 355)
City Safety when evasive
manoeuvres are prevented
has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a
steering manoeuvre.
City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by
automatically braking the car earlier when it is
not possible to avoid a collision by only steering
away.
However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive
manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an
adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver
by automatically starting to brake at an earlier
stage.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
stage.
WARNING
•
The ability of City Safety to be able to
predict a specific situation is supplementary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car
Slow/stationary vehicle
City Safety does not intervene with the autobrake function as long as the driver him/herself
}}
357
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Limitations for City Safety when evasive
manoeuvres are prevented
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
City Safety brakes for oncoming
vehicles
For this function to work, the following criteria
must be met:
City Safety can assist the driver to use emergency braking for an oncoming vehicle in your
car's lane.
•
your car must be travelling at more than
4 km/h (3 mph)
•
•
the road section must be straight
•
your car must be positioned straight in its
own lane
•
the oncoming vehicle must be within your
car's lane markings
•
the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on
•
this function can only handle "front to front"
collisions
•
this function can only detect vehicles with
four wheels
•
this function requires working Electric seatbelt pretensioners (see section "Seatbelt
pretensioner").
If an oncoming vehicle enters your car's lane and
a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can reduce
the car's speed with a view to reducing the violence of the impact.
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 349)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
your car's lane must have clear lane markings
Your car
Oncoming vehicles
358
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
WARNING
Limitations of City Safety
The "City Safety brakes for oncoming
vehicles" function is supplementary driver
support intended to improve driving safety
– it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The City Safety function may have limitations in
certain situations.
•
Warnings and brake interventions due to
an impending collision with an oncoming
vehicle always come very late.
•
The driver must never wait for a collision
warning or for City Safety to intervene,
but must instead brake with full force
when danger is detected.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
71
City Safety™ (p. 349)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 359)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
Surroundings
Low objects
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.
Skidding
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the
anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC71
will give the best possible braking force with
maintained stability.
Oncoming light
The visual warning signal in the windscreen may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being
worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the
visual warning signal in the windscreen may be
temporarily disengaged.
The camera and radar unit's field of view
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehicles in some situations cannot be detected, or
they are detected later than anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others
and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late
or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City
Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large
animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of
the car. This means that the functionality of City
Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all
situations where the windscreen sensors are
obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to
keep the area of windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit clear.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety
components must only be performed by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Electronic Stability Control
}}
359
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Driver intervention
Miscellaneous
Reversing
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
•
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system therefore does not intervene in situations where your
car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly,
e.g. when parking.
Warnings and brake interventions could
be implemented late or not at all if a traffic situation or external influences mean
that the camera and radar unit cannot
detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals
or vehicles correctly.
•
For vehicles to be detected at night, their
headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be
switched on and shining clearly.
•
The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
system can provide effective warnings
and brake interventions as long as the
relative speed is below 50 km/h
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving
vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for
large animals is less than 15 km/h
(9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The
warning and brake intervention for large
animals is less effective at lower speeds.
Active driver
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
why City Safety does not intervene or postpone
warning/intervention in situations where the
driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive
manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h
(50 mph).
•
Do not place, stick or mount anything on
the outside or inside of the windscreen in
front of or around the camera and radar
unit — this can interfere with cameradependent functions.
•
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its functionality, fully deactivate it or give incorrect function response.
WARNING
Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore
delay a collision warning and intervention in order
to minimise unnecessary warnings.
•
360
•
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles and large animals could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
Safety does not appear in the centre display's
Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this
function.
Search path in the top view of the centre display:
•
Settings
My Car
IntelliSafe
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 349)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
361
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message
Specification
City Safety
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated
in connection with a text message being shown.
Automatic intervention
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service
required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
362
City Safety™ (p. 349)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Rear Collision Warning
The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can
help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle
approaching from behind.
RCW is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle
approaching from behind that a collision is imminent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the RCW
function detects that the car is in danger of being
hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may tension the front seatbelts and activate the Whiplash
Protection System safety system.
Immediately before a collision from behind, RCW
may also activate the foot brake in order to
reduce the forward acceleration of the car during
the collision. However, the foot brake is only activated if the car is stationary. The foot brake releases immediately if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Limitations of Rear Collision
Warning
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"Late".
In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty
helping the driver in the event of a collision risk.
This can, for example, be if:
•
the vehicle approaching from behind is
detected too late
•
the vehicle approaching from behind
changes lane at the last moment
•
the vehicle approaching from behind has a
speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph)
•
a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected
to the car's electrical system - the RCW
function is then deactivated automatically.
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 363)
NOTE
In certain markets, RCW does not give a
warning with the direction indicators due to
local traffic regulations - in such cases, this
part of the function is deactivated.
Related information
•
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning
(p. 363)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
363
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS*
from a constant glow to flashing with a more
intense light.
BLIS72
The
function is intended to help the
driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to
the side of the car so as to provide assistance in
heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the
same direction.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:
•
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
right lanes closest to the car.
WARNING
Principle of BLIS
•
The BLIS function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The responsibility for changing lanes
safely and using good judgement always
rests with the driver.
•
BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds
above 10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
•
•
Location of BLIS lamp73.
Indicator lamp
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's function view.
72
73
364
your car is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching your
car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affected side
illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as
the warning, the indicator lamp will change over
Blind Spot Information Systems
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
Activate/deactivate BLIS (p. 365)
•
Messages for BLIS (p. 368)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 366)
Activate/deactivate BLIS
The BLIS74 function can be activated/deactivated.
Recommended maintenance for BLIS
(p. 366)
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indicator
lights will then be illuminated.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 364)
Location of BLIS lamp75.
Indicator lamp
–
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's function view.
Tap on the BLIS button in the function view.
> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/
grey indicator is shown in the button.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the
function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator
lamps blinking once.
74
75
Blind Spot Information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 365
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of BLIS
WARNING
The BLIS76 function may have limitations in certain situations.
•
•
BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
Related information
•
Recommended maintenance for
BLIS
•
To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
BLIS* (p. 364)
Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and
right-hand sides of the car77.
Examples of limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and
right-hand sides of the car78.
•
The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system.
•
For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
The sensors for BLIS are located inside each
corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) and
Rear Collision Warning functions.
76
77
78
366
Blind Spot Information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLIS* (p. 364)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 369)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 370)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 370)
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 371)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 372)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 363)
* Option/accessory. 367
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for BLIS
A number of messages regarding BLIS79 can be
shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service required
Blind spot system off
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
79
368
BLIS* (p. 364)
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cross Traffic Alert*
CTA80
is a driver support that supplements
BLIS81 and is designed to help the driver detect
traffic crossing behind the car when it is reversing.
CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if
reverse gear has been selected.
WARNING
If CTA senses that something is approaching
from the side, this is also indicated with:
•
an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the
left-hand or right-hand speaker according to
the direction from which the object
approaches.
•
an illuminated icon in the PAS82 graphic on
the screen.
•
an icon on the Park assist camera top view.
•
The Cross Traffic Alert function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The responsibility for reversing the car
safely and using good judgement always
rests with the driver.
•
Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Principle of CTA.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the
approach of crossing traffic during reversing,
such as when reversing out of a parking space.
Related information
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions it may also be able to
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
•
•
80
81
82
83
•
Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS graphic on the
screen83.
•
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 370)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 370)
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 371)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 372)
Cross Traffic Alert
Blind Spot Information
Park Assist System: Parking assistance system with reversing sensors
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 369
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic
Alert
The driver can choose to switch off the CTA84
function as follows:
•
•
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
The CTA85 function may have limitations in certain situations.
Press the Cross Traffic Alert
button in the centre display
function view.
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations
but has some limitations. For example, the CTA
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing obstacles.
GREY button indication - CTA is deactivated.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
GREEN button indication - CTA is activated.
Blind CTA sector.
CTA is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.
Related information
•
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind”
on one side.
However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it
makes with the obstructing vehicle/object
changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 369)
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
84
85
370
Cross Traffic Alert
Cross Traffic Alert
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Examples of further limitations
• Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
See the supplementary information in the
section "Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert".
•
•
CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert
•
To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 369)
BLIS* (p. 364)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 363)
Related information
•
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 369)
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 371)
Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and
right-hand sides of the car86.
The sensors for CTA are located inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
also used by the BLIS87 and Rear Collision
Warning functions.
86
87
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 371
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert
A number of messages regarding CTA88 can be
shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Service required
Blind spot system off
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
88
372
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 369)
Cross Traffic Alert
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information*
WARNING
The Road Sign Information function (RSI89) can
help the driver to observe speed-related road
signs and certain prohibition signs.
Example90 of detected speed information.
If the car passes a speed limit sign, it will be
shown on the driver's display and the head-up
display*.
Examples of readable signs90.
RSI can provide information about such things as
current speed, when a motorway or road is starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or
when the direction of travel is one-way.
89
90
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
function (RSI) is only available in combination
with Sensus Navigation*.
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
•
The Road Sign Information function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information (p. 374)
•
Road Sign Information and sign display
(p. 375)
•
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation (p. 377)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 377)
•
Activating/deactivating Speed warning in
Road Sign Information (p. 378)
}}
* Option/accessory. 373
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information (p. 379)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information
(p. 380)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 373)
The Road Sign Information function is selectable
- the driver can select On or Off.
Press the Road Sign
Information button in the centre display function view.
GREEN button indication - RSI is activated.
•
•
GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated.
NOTE
91
374
•
If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI91 is not
activated.
•
To remove road sign information from the
driver display, you must deactivate both
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
•
When the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
warnings are given from RSI. RSI must
also be activated in order to receive
warnings.
Road Sign Information – RSI
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information and sign
display
The Road Sign Information function (RSI92)
shows road signs in different ways depending
on the sign and the situation.
An additional93 sign, such as
"no overtaking", may be shown
together with the speed limit
symbol.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
direct speed limit signs are normally displayed –
indirect speed limit signs are only displayed if
map data has no information on the speed limit
for the road section in question.
Example of indirect speed limit sign93:
If the driver enters a road
marked with a no-entry sign at
the roadside, the symbol for
this sign93 flashes on and off
on the driver display as a warning.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
information from map data is used to determine
whether the car is being driven in the wrong
direction.
Example93 of detected speed information.
When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed
speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a
symbol combined with a coloured indication on
the speedometer.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*,
speed-related information is also obtained from
map data, which means that the driver display
can show or change information on the speed
limit without having passed a speed-related sign.
92
93
The driver can also receive an acoustic warning
when driving the wrong way into a prohibited
approach if the Road Sign Audio Warning
function is activated – see the heading "Acoustic
warning On/Off" in the section "Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings".
Speed limit or end of motorway
When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign"
stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at
the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with
the corresponding road sign in the driver's display.
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Changed speed limit
When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 375
DRIVER SUPPORT
Example of direct speed limit
sign93.
||
Additional signs
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
about 5 minutes until the next speed-related sign
is passed.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*, speed
limit signs are shown in the driver display when
map data contains information on the speed limit
for the road section in question, even if no direct
sign has been passed. If there is no information
in map data, the sign goes off after
approx. 3 minutes after the last passing of a
speed limit sign.
Examples of additional signs93.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed for
the same road - an additional sign then indicates
the circumstances under which the different
speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog,
for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system and you pass a speed sign with the additional sign "trailer", the indicated speed will
appear on the driver display.
93
94
376
Some speed limits only apply
after a certain distance or at a
certain time of day. The driver's
attention is drawn to this fact
by means of a symbol for an
additional sign below the speed
symbol. The additional symbol
in the driver display will show either “DIST” or
“TIME”.
A symbol for additional sign in
the form of an empty frame
under the driver display's speed
symbol93 means that the RSI
has detected an additional sign
with supplementary information
for the current speed limit.
Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
If a warning sign93 for "School"
or "Children at play" is included
in the satellite navigator's map
data94, the driver display shows
a sign of this type.
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
Only in cars with Sensus Navigation.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 373)
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information (p. 374)
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 377)
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
•
On detection of signs that indirectly indicate
a speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriageway and city limit signs.
•
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new
sign has been detected.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
function (RSI) is only available in combination
with Sensus Navigation*.
NOTE
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for speedrelated information.
Related information
•
95
96
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for
RSI95 is selectable - the driver can select On or
Off.
Speed Limit Warning warns the driver when the
applicable speed limit or a preselected "top
speed" is exceeded – this warning is repeated
once after approx. 1 minute within the same
speed limit area unless the driver reduces the
speed.
A new warning for exceeding the speed limit,
including a reminder, will be given only when the
car reaches a new/different speed limit area.
The speed warning is given by
the driver display symbol96
showing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when this speed
is exceeded.
A speed warning is always
given if the speed limit is
exceeded in connection with
speed camera information.
Road Sign Information* (p. 373)
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustration in these instructions only show one example.
}}
* Option/accessory. 377
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Settings
2.
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning
The driver can select to receive a warning at a
higher speed than the signed speed.
Select limit for speed warning as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
3.
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by pressing the up/down arrows on the screen.
Note that the function does not
give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment when
the driver display shows the
speed camera symbol.
Acoustic warning On/Off
It is also possible to receive an audible warning in
connection with Speed Warning.
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
1.
378
Select/deselect Road Sign Audio Warning
to activate/switch off the acoustic warning.
With the Road Sign Audio Warning function
activated, the driver is also warned when driving
towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.
Speed camera warning On/Off
If the car is fitted with Sensus
Navigation* and map data contains information on speed
cameras, the driver can opt to
receive an audible warning
when approaching a speed
camera.
Activating/deactivating Speed
warning in Road Sign Information
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is activated as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
(See the description for "Adjust the limit
for Speed Warning" in the section "Road
Sign Information with Speed Warning and
Settings")
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
1.
2.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio
Warning to activate/switch off the audible
speed camera warning.
Related information
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 373)
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 377)
Related information
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 373)
Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information (p. 379)
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information with Speed
Camera Information
A car equipped with RSI97 and Sensus
Navigation* can provide information on an
upcoming speed camera in the driver display.
For more information about speed warning in
connection with speed camera - see also the
sections "Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings" and "Road Sign Information limitations".
NOTE
•
To get an acoustic warning if you exceed
the required speed, the Speed Limit
Warning function must be activated and
the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunction must be set to On. An acoustic
warning is then given if the car's speed
exceeds the speed indicated by the RSI
function in the driver display.
•
An option is available to receive an
acoustic warning for speed cameras
independently of the car's speed and
exceeded speed limit, and even if the
Road Sign Audio Warning function is
deactivated: See heading "Speed
camera warning On/Off" in the "Road
Sign Information with speed warning and
settings" section, and there select
Speed Camera Audio Warning.
•
Information about speed cameras on the
navigation map is not available for all
markets/areas.
Speed camera information in the driver display98.
If the car exceeds a detected
speed limit with the Speed
Limit Warning function activated, a speed warning is given
when the car approaches a
speed camera, provided that
the navigation map for the area
in question contains information on speed cameras.
97
98
Related information
•
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 373)
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 377)
Limitations of Road Sign Information
(p. 380)
Road Sign Information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market/area.
* Option/accessory. 379
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Road Sign
Information
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
The Road Sign Information (RSI99) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as follows:
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Faded signs
•
signs completely or partly covered with frost,
snow and/or dirt
•
digital road maps100 are out-of-date, inaccurate or have no speed information101.
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Signs positioned high above the roadway
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
signs
Road Sign Information* (p. 373)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
intended to help make the driver aware that he
or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if
the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall
asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city
traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types of
bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show incorrect speed information.
99 Road Sign Information
100In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*.
101Map data with speed information does not
380
DAC reads the position of the car in the lane.
exist for all areas.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
A camera detects the edge markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the alignment of
the road with the driver’s steering wheel movements.
The warning is repeated after a time if driving
behaviour has not improved.
WARNING
•
•
•
The car is being driven erratically in the lane.
If driving behaviour becomes
noticeably inconsistent, the
driver is alerted by this symbol
in the driver display, combined
with an acoustic signal and the
text message Time to take a
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be
taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often
not aware of his/her own condition.
The Driver Alert Control function is supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
Driver Alert Control should not be used to
extend a period of driving. The driver
should instead plan for breaks at regular
intervals and make sure they are well
rested.
Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
•
Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive under
the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.
Related information
•
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
(p. 382)
•
Select rest stop guidance in the event of a
warning from Driver Alert Control (p. 382)
•
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 382)
break.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*
and has the Rest Stop Guidance function activated, suggestions for a suitable place for a
break are also shown (see section "Select rest
stop guidance in the event of a warning from
Driver Alert Control").
* Option/accessory. 381
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert
Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be
activated/deactivated.
On/Off
To change settings in DAC:
1.
2.
3.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
Select My Car
Control.
IntelliSafe
Select/deselect Alertness Warning to activate/deactivate DAC.
Related information
•
Driver Alert
Driver Alert Control (p. 380)
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning from Driver Alert
Control
It is possible to select whether the Rest Stop
Guidance function should be activated/deactivated.
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the
driver can activate a guide that can automatically
suggest an appropriate rest area when DAC
issues a warning.
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
•
•
WARNING
To select Rest Stop Guidance:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Select My Car
Control.
3.
Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to
activate/deactivate the function.
IntelliSafe
In some cases, driving behaviour is not affected despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using
the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the
driver not getting a warning from DAC.
Driver Alert
It is therefore important to always stop and
take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue,
whether the DAC function ha given a warning
or not.
Related information
•
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
NOTE
Driver Alert Control (p. 380)
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
•
•
382
Driver Alert Control (p. 380)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane assistance
The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA102) is
to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car
accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways
and similar major routes.
Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the
steering wheel.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible side lines.
On narrow roads the function may be unavailable,
in which case it goes into standby mode. The
function becomes available again when the road
is wide enough.
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations103.
Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in
accordance with the following:
• Assist104 activated: When the car is
approaching a lane line, LKA will actively
steer the car back into its lane by applying a
slight torque to the steering wheel.
• Warning104 activated: If the car is about to
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by
means of vibrations in the steering wheel.
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
102Lane Keeping Aid
103The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration.
104See the heading "Assistance alternatives for LKA" in the section "Activating/Deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".
}}
383
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
Lane assistance does not intervene
When a direction indicator is switched on,
there are no steering corrections or alerts
from Lane assistance.
WARNING
384
•
The Lane Keeping Aid function is supplementary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside
curves.
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane
lines to be crossed without intervening with either
steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when
using the direction indicators or cutting bends.
Related information
•
Steering assistance with lane assistance
(p. 385)
•
•
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 386)
•
Select assistance option for lane assistance
(p. 386)
•
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 387)
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 385)
•
Lane assistance symbols in the driver display
(p. 389)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance with lane
assistance
comes on and the following message is displayed:
For LKA105 steering assistance to work, the
driver must have his/her hands on the steering
wheel.
This symbol in the driver display
shows that LKA is activated
and constantly checking that
the driver has his/her hands on
the steering wheel.
1.
If the driver does not keep his/her hands on
the steering wheel, a warning signal is heard
and a message encourages the driver to
steer the car actively:
Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
2.
If LKA detects that the driver is not controlling the car, the message is repeated with a
longer warning signal than the previous one.
3.
If the driver does not then start steering the
car, a short warning signal at a different pitch
is heard, LKA is deactivated, another symbol
105Lane
106Lane
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping
Aid
The lane assistance LKA106 function is selectable - the driver can select On or Off.
– Lane Keeping Aid – Apply
steering
On/Off
Press the Lane Keeping Aid
button in the centre display
function view.
LKA will then be deactivated until the driver
starts to steer the car again.
The warning signal stops sounding and the information symbol and message disappear when
LKA detects that the driver is actively steering
the car again.
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 383)
•
•
GREEN button indication - LKA is activated.
GREY button indication - LKA is deactivated.
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 383)
Keeping Aid
Keeping Aid
385
DRIVER SUPPORT
Select assistance option for lane
assistance
The driver can select how LKA107 should react if
the car leaves its lane.
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode,
select how LKA should react:
• Assist - the driver is given steering assistance without a warning.
• Both - the driver is given both a warning
and steering assistance.
Limitations of Lane assistance
Related information
In certain demanding conditions Lane assistance may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to
switch off this function.
•
•
•
Examples of such conditions are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
•
when the power steering is working at
reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to
overheating (see section "Speed-dependent
steering force").
• Warning — warning to driver only.
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 383)
winter road conditions
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side markings
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
107Lane
386
Keeping Aid
Lane assistance (p. 383)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Lane assistance LKA108 can be shown on the
driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
Driver support system
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Reduced functionality Service required
Windscreen sensor
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
Lane Keeping Aid
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on
the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
Apply steering
108Lane
Keeping Aid
}}
387
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the
ing the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
388
Lane assistance (p. 383)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane assistance symbols in the
driver display
Unavailable
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 383)
Lane assistance LKA109 is visualised by symbols
in the driver display depending on the situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.
Available
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines,
the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the symbol are COLOURED.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is giving a warning and/or attempting to steer the car
back into the lane.
109Lane
Keeping Aid
389
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance at risk of
collision
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of a collision risk (p. 390)
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision
risk
•
Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision (p. 399)
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
•
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 391)
•
Steering assistance level in the event of a
run-off risk (p. 392)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of run-off risk (p. 392)
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision
•
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of running off the road (p. 393)
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision*
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 394)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of a collision risk with oncoming
(p. 395)
The Collision avoidance assistance function
is designed to help the driver reduce the risk of
the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively
steering the car back into its lane and/or swerving.
The Collision avoidance assistance function
consists of three subfunctions:
•
•
•
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text message:
• Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
NOTE
It is always the driver who decides how much
the car should steer – the car can never take
command.
390
Related information
Shift between On and Off
using this button in the centre
display's function view.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of road departure
•
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of head-on collision (p. 395)
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 396)
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
on risk of rear-end collision* (p. 397)
•
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of rear-end collision (p. 398)
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" subfunction is supplementary
driver support intended to improve driving
safety – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The function is active within the speed range
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
•
The function cannot detect barriers, rails
or similar obstacles at the side of the
road.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to leave
the side of the road, the car is steered back onto
the road and if the steering intervention is not
enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also activated.
•
"Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
The subfunction's task is to help the driver
reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the
road by actively steering the car back onto the
road.
However, the function does not intervene with
either steering assistance or brake intervention if
the direction indicators are used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the
car, activation of the function will be delayed.
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text message:
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
• Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
391
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance level in the
event of a run-off risk
Steering assistance with brake intervention
The function has two activation levels on intervention:
•
•
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of run-off
risk
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Steering assistance only
Shift between On and Off
using this button in the centre
display's function view.
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Steering assistance only
Intervention with steering assistance and braking.
Brake intervention helps in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
brake force is adapted automatically depending
on the situation at the time of road run-off.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of road departure
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Related information
Intervention with steering assistance.
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
392
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 391)
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of running off the road
In certain demanding conditions the function
may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In
such cases it is recommended to switch off this
function.
Examples of such conditions are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
•
•
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side markings
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
•
when the power steering is working at
reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to
overheating (see section "Speed-dependent
steering force").
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
393
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is drifting into the
oncoming lane.
However, the function does not intervene with
steering assistance if the direction indicator is
used. And if the function detects that the driver is
actively driving the car, activation of the function
will be delayed.
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text message:
• Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of
oncoming collision" subfunction is supplementary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
Steering assistance is only activated if
there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its
own lane.
Oncoming vehicles
Your car
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
If the car is about to leave its own lane while an
oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same
time, the function can help the driver to steer the
car back into its own lane.
394
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of a collision risk with oncoming
(p. 395)
•
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of head-on collision (p. 395)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision
risk with oncoming
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 394)
Shift between On and Off
using this button in the centre
display's function view.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of road departure
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of head-on collision
In certain situations the function may have limited functionality and fail to intervene in the following cases, for example:
•
•
for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
on roads where the lane does not have clear
lane markings
•
if the majority of the car has steered into the
adjacent lane
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
Other demanding situations can include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function may
have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such
cases it is recommended to switch off this function.
}}
* Option/accessory. 395
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
without noticing that another vehicle is approaching.
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is about to leave its
own lane while an oncoming vehicle is
approaching at the same time, either from
behind or in the blind spot.
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 394)
•
•
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text message:
• Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of rearend collision" subfunction is supplementary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
Steering assistance is only activated if
there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
The function can assist by steering the car back to its
own lane.
Other vehicle in the blind spot
Your car
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another
vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane
at the same time, the function can help the driver
to steer the car back into its own lane.
The function can even assist if the driver intentionally changes lanes using direction indicators
396
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance on risk of rear-end
collision*
Related information
•
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
•
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
on risk of rear-end collision* (p. 397)
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 396)
•
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of rear-end collision (p. 398)
Related information
Shift between On and Off
using this button in the centre
display's function view.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of road departure
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
* Option/accessory. 397
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of rear-end collision
NOTE
The function uses the car's combined Camera
and Radar unit, which has certain general limitations – see the sections "Limitations for
Camera Unit" and "Limitations for Radar Unit"
respectively.
In certain situations the function may have limited functionality and fail to intervene in the following cases, for example:
•
•
for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
if the majority of the car has steered into the
adjacent lane
•
on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-existent lane markings
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
•
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
In addition to the camera and radar unit, the function uses the car's rear-facing radar, which has
certain general imitations that a driver should be
aware of - see supplementary information in the
section "Limitations for BLIS".
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 396)
Other demanding situations can include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
•
•
•
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 346)
Limitations for radar device (p. 337)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 366)
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function may
have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such
cases it is recommended to switch off this function.
398
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for steering
assistance upon risk of collision
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the function can be shown on the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
Collision avoidance assistance
When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system
has been activated.
Automatic intervention
Windscreen sensor
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 390)
399
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist*
The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the
driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the distance to obstacles through acoustic signals combined with a graphic in the centre
display.
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
audio system is muted automatically.
WARNING
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind is also active when the car is stationary.
At a distance within approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an
obstacle behind or in front of the car, the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field closest to
the car symbol is filled.
At a distance within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from
an obstacle To the sides, the tone pulses intensively and the active sector field changes colour
from ORANGE to RED.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
The centre display shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacles.
The highlighted sector indicates the location of
the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a
highlighted sector box at the front/back, the
shorter the distance between the car and
detected obstacle.
The side sectors change colour as the distance
between the car and an object is reduced.
400
The volume of the parking assistance signal can
be adjusted while the signal is sounding by
means of the [>II] knob on the centre console.
Adjustment can also be performed in the top
view's Settings menu option.
NOTE
•
Except in the sector nearest to the car
symbol, audible warnings are only given
for objects directly in the path of the car.
•
The Park Assist function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car.
•
The Park Assist system is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the
sides (p. 401)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot
(p. 402)
•
•
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 403)
•
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot
(p. 405)
Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance (p. 404)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides
Park Assist Pilot has different parameters
depending on which part of the car is approaching an obstacle.
Forwards
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle.
Backwards
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
rolls backward without a gear engaged or when
the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
The measuring range is approx. 1.5 metres (5 ft)
behind the car.
When reversing with a trailer connected to the
car's electrical system, parking assistance backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
Warning signal, constant tone at less than
approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle 110.
The front parking assistance sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started.
They are active at speeds below 10 km/h
(6 mph).
The measuring range is approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in
front of the car.
110The
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Warning signal, constant tone at less than
approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle 110.
}}
401
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Along the sides
Park Assist* (p. 400)
Activating/deactivating Park Assist
Pilot
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera (p. 411)
The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/
deactivated.
Related information
•
•
On/Off
The front and side parking assistance sensors
are activated automatically when the engine is
started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls
backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.
The function is activated/deactivated in function view in the
centre display.
Warning signal, intensive pulsing at less than
approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle 110.
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. They
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
–
The measuring range is approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)
from the sides.
However, the detection area of the side sensors
increases significantly when the steering angle of
the front wheels is increased, and when the
steering wheel is turned, obstacles up to
approx. 90 cm (3 ft) diagonally behind or in front
of the car can be detected (see also the section
"Sensor field to the sides" in the section entitled
"Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking
camera").
110The
402
Tap on the Park Assist button in the function view.
> Park Assist Pilot is activated/deactivated,
a GREEN/GREY indicator is displayed in
the button.
In cars equipped with a park assist camera, Park
Assist Pilot can also be activated/deactivated
from the relevant camera view.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 400)
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Parking assistance
The Parking Assistance System cannot detect
everything in all situations and may therefore
have limited functionality in some cases.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obstacles.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and
are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as projecting loading docks.
•
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 400)
In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies
that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
noises from motorcycles, etc.
* Option/accessory. 403
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
For the Park Assist Pilot function to work optimally, its sensors must be cleaned regularly with
water and car shampoo.
Location of the parking sensors111.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 400)
111NOTE:
404
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can
be shown in the driver display and/or the centre
display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for
obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 400)
* Option/accessory. 405
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera*
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
lines
The park assist camera can assist the driver
when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating
obstacles with a camera image and graphics in
the centre display.
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar
park assist line*114
CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic
Alert
The parking assistance camera is a support function which is activated automatically when reverse
gear is selected or manually via the centre display.
Example of camera view112.
Zoom113 - zoom in/out
360° view* - activates/deactivates all cameras
PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking
Assistance System
112The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car
113The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.
114Not available on all markets.
406
model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
•
The parking camera function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The parking cameras have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car.
•
Objects/obstacles on the display screen
may be closer to the car than they appear
to be on the screen.
•
The parking cameras are not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
•
Recommended parking camera maintenance
(p. 414)
•
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera (p. 415)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot
(p. 402)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 369)
Parking cameras' camera views
The function can display a composite 360° view
and separate views for each of the four cameras:
rear, front, left or right camera view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Parking cameras' camera views (p. 407)
Park assist lines for parking camera (p. 409)
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera (p. 411)
Starting the park assist camera (p. 412)
Limitations for park assist camera (p. 413)
}}
* Option/accessory. 407
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
A camera symbol on the centre
display's car symbol indicates
which of the cameras is active.
360° view*
Objects shown in the centre display may appear
slightly tilted — this is normal.
Forwards
If the car is also equipped with
Park Assist System* then
distance to detected obstacles
is illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually – see the section "Starting the Park
assist camera".
Backwards
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approximate coverage area.
The 360° view function activates all parking
cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are
shown simultaneously in the centre display, which
helps the driver to observe what is around the car
when manoeuvring at slow speeds.
The forwards parking camera116 is located in the grille.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road
with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there
are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to
25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front
camera is switched off.
From the 360° view, each camera view can be
activated separately:
•
Press the screen for the desired “field of
vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface in
front of/above the front camera.
The backwards-facing camera115 is fitted above the registration plate.
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and
the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within
1 minute after the forward-facing camera has
been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide area
behind the car. For certain models, part of the
bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in
some cases.
115NOTE:
116NOTE:
408
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The sides
Park assist lines for parking camera
The Park assist cameras indicate the position of
the car in relation to its surroundings by displaying lines on the screen.
reversing into tight spaces and when connecting
a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and respond
directly to steering wheel movements, showing
the driver the path the car will take - also when
the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
corners.
NOTE
The side cameras116 are positioned in each door mirror.
The side cameras can show what is along each
side of the car.
Related information
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 406)
•
When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the park
assist lines on the display show the route
the car will take – not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically to
the car's electrical system.
•
Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
Starting the park assist camera (p. 412)
Example117 of park assist lines.
Park assist lines show the intended route for the
car's external dimensions with the current steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,
116NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on
117The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 409
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
IMPORTANT
•
Remember, that with the rear camera
view selected, the monitor only displays
the area behind the car. Be aware of the
sides and front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse.
•
The same applies vice versa - note what
happens to the rear parts of the car when
the front camera view is selected.
•
Note that the park assist lines show the
shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something when
the steering wheel is turned when driving
forward or that the front sweeps against/
over something when the steering wheel
is turned when reversing.
Park assist lines in 360° view*
360° view with park assist lines117.
With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown
behind, in front of and at the side of the car
(depending on the direction of travel):
•
•
When driving forwards: Front lines
When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines.
With front or rear camera selected, the park
assist lines appear regardless of the car's direction of travel.
With one side camera selected, the park assist
lines only appear when reversing.
117The
410
Towbar assist line*
Towbar with park assist line117.
Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing the
towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
1.
Press Towbar (1).
> The park assist lines for the towbar's
intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar
cannot be shown at the same time.
2.
Press Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot
for parking camera
If the car is equipped with Parking assistance
then the distance is shown in the 360° view with
coloured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 406)
The fields for the sensors for forwards and
reverse change colour as the distance to the
obstacle decreases – from AMBER through
ORANGE to RED.
Field colour
reverse
Distance in metres (feet)
Yellow
0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9)
Orange
0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0)
Red
0-0,3 (0-1,0)
Field colour forwards
Distance in metres (feet)
Yellow
0,6–0,8 (2,0–2,6)
Orange
0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0)
Red
0-0,3 (0-1,0)
For RED sensor fields, the pulsating acoustic signal changes over to a constant tone.
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car
symbol118.
118The
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 411
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Sensor field to the sides
Warning signals depend on the intended route of
the car. When the steering wheel is turned, therefore, there may also be a warning for obstacles
diagonally in front of or diagonally behind the car,
not just straight ahead or directly behind.
Right-hand side rear sensor field
Starting the park assist camera
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route in
reverse – depending on steering wheel
angle.
The park assist camera starts automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or manually with
one of the centre display's function buttons.
The colour of the side fields changes with
reduced distance to the obstacle – from AMBER
to RED.
Colour of side
fields
Distance in metres (feet)
Yellow
0,25–0,9 (0,8–3,0)
Red
0–0,25 (0–0,8)
Left-hand side front sensor field
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route
forwards – depending on steering wheel
angle
Sector with RED field colour and intensively
pulsing tone
Related information
•
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows
the 360° view if it or any of the side views was
the last used camera view, otherwise the rear
view is shown.
Camera view for manual camera start
In the case of RED sensor fields, the acoustic
signal changes from pulsing to intensively pulsing.
Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be
detected118.
Camera view when reversing
Park assist camera* (p. 406)
Start the parking camera with
this button in the centre display's function view.
The screen then initially shows
the last used camera view.
However, after each engine
start, the previously shown side view is replaced
by the 360° view and the previously shown
zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view.
Automatic deactivation of camera
The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph)
to avoid distracting the driver - it reactivates automatically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed
has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).
Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h
(9 mph) and not reactivated.
118The
412
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 406)
Limitations for park assist camera
Blind sectors
The park assist camera cannot detect everything
in all situations and may therefore have limited
functionality.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of the park assist camera's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obstacles.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on
the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view.
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
vision.
In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in
the gaps between the individual cameras.
WARNING
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, a relatively large sector
could be hidden from view. An obstacle could
thereby go undetected until the car is very
close to it.
}}
* Option/accessory. 413
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Defective camera
If a camera sector is black and
contains this symbol then it
means that the camera is out
of order.
The following illustration shows
an example.
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in
reduced image quality.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 406)
Recommended parking camera
maintenance
The parking cameras positioned beside the rear
number plate holder, in the grille and in both
door mirrors need a certain amount of maintenance.
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm
water and car shampoo - be careful not to
scratch the lenses.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 406)
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.
Black camera sector
A black camera sector is also shown in the following instances, but then without the symbol for
defective camera:
•
•
•
open door
open tailgate
folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
414
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera
can be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display.
The following table shows examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and
field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning
needed
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 406)
* Option/accessory. 415
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot*
NOTE
(PAP119)
Park Assist Pilot
helps the driver to
park in or leave a parking space.
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
PAP first checks if a space is
large enough and if so steers
the car into the space.
•
•
The centre display indicates
with symbols, graphics and text
the various operations to be
carried out and when to do so.
WARNING
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car.
•
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
119Park
120Park
416
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the centre display
•
select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
•
•
control and maintain a safe speed
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot
Park Assist Pilot PAP120 can be used for the following different parking situations.
Parallel parking
brake and stop.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 416)
Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 417)
The principal of parallel parking.
Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 420)
The PAP function parks the car using the following steps:
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 421)
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance (p. 422)
2.
The car is reversed into the space.
3.
The car is positioned in the space by means
of driving forward/backward.
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 423)
Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked
car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the
parking space – see the section entitled "Leaving
parking with Active Park Assist Pilot".
Assist Pilot
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Perpendicular parking
Related information
•
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 420)
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
Park Assist Pilot (PAP121) helps the driver park
via three steps. The function can also help the
driver to leave a parking space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
•
•
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The PAP function parks the car using the following steps:
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2.
The car is reversed into the space and then
positioned in the space by means of driving
forward/backward.
NOTE
A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assisted by the PAP Park Out function to leave a
parking space - the function must only be
used for a parallel-parked car.
121Park
Assist Pilot
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the centre display
•
select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
•
•
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the centre display's screen when the different steps are
to be performed.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are
met once the engine has been started:
•
•
No trailer is attached to the car
Speed must be lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
}}
* Option/accessory. 417
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft)
while PAP is searching for a parking space.
2.
Tap on the Park In button in the function
view or in the camera view.
> PAP searches for a parking space and
checks whether it is big enough.
3.
Be prepared to stop the car when the
graphic and message on the centre display
state that a suitable parking space has been
found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and select reverse gear.
Parking
PAP parks the car using the following steps:
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2.
The car is reversed into the space.
3.
The car is positioned into the space - the
system may then request that the driver
changes gear.
Principle for parallel parking.
NOTE
Finding and measuring parking spaces
The function can be activated
in the centre display's function
view.
PAP searches the area for parking, displays
instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
•
Principle for perpendicular parking.
Proceed as follows:
1.
418
Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for
parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for
perpendicular parking.
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Reversing in to the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
Perform the following to reverse the car into the
parking space:
1.
Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2.
Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
3.
Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is activated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
•
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
Positioning the car in the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Move the gear selector into the D position,
wait until the steering wheel has been turned
and drive slowly forward.
}}
419
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
2.
Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
3.
Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards.
4.
Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
The function is deactivated automatically and the
graphics and message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct
the car’s position. Only the driver can determine
whether the car is properly parked.
Leaving a car park with Park Assist
Pilot
The function Park Out can also help the driver
to leave a parking space.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out
function must only be used for a parallelparked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car.
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
Proceed as follows:
1.
Tap on the Park Out button in the function
view or in the camera view.
2.
Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
3.
Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display - follow the instructions in the same
way as for the parking procedure.
Related information
•
If PAP considers that the driver can leave the
parking space without any extra manoeuvring
then the function will be stopped, even if the
driver may consider that the car is still in the
parking space.
The Park Out function is activated in the centre display's
function view or in the camera
view.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared with
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
need to turn the steering wheel back to the maximum steering angle in order to leave the parking
space.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when
the function is completed - the driver may then
420
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
PAP122
The Park Assist Pilot
function cannot
detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality.
WARNING
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Pay particular attention if there are people and animals near the car.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
•
•
Objects situated higher than the sensor
detection area are not included when calculating the parking manoeuvre, which
could cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early – such parking
spaces should be avoided for this reason.
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
122Park
Assist Pilot
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations:
Parking is discontinued
A parking sequence will be discontinued:
•
•
if the driver moves the steering wheel
•
if the driver presses Cancel in the centre
display
•
when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a
wheel loses grip on a slippery road
•
if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h
(4 mph)
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
Where applicable, a message in the centre display states the reason for a parking sequence
being discontinued.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable
to find parking spaces - one reason for this
may be the fact that there is interference with
the sensors from external sound sources
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies
as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an
aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function.
The driver must therefore be prepared to interrupt a parking step.
}}
* Option/accessory. 421
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
There are also a few details to bear in mind while
parking, e.g.:
•
The driver is always responsible for determining whether the space selected by PAP is
suitable for parking.
•
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
•
Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding
from the car.
•
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
measure the parking space incorrectly.
•
During the search and check-measurement
of the parking space, PAP may miss objects
positioned deep in the parking space.
•
Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required for
manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
•
Use approved tyres123 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
park the car.
•
PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles
already parked nearby - if they are inappropriately parked, your own car's tyres and
wheel rims may be damaged by contact with
the kerb.
•
Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed
or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is
protruding more than other parked cars.
123”Approved
422
•
PAP is designed for parking on straight
streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this
reason, make sure the car is parallel to the
potential parking spaces when PAP measures the space.
IMPORTANT
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
For the Park Assist Pilot PAP124 function to work
optimally, the parking assistance sensors must
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
Changing to another approved wheel rim
and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
tyre circumference, which means that the
PAP system's parameters may then need to
be updated. Consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 417)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 282)
Location of the parking sensors125.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
tyres” refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
Messages for Park Assist Pilot PAP126 can be
shown in the driver display and/or the centre display.
The following table shows examples.
Message
Specification
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
124Park Assist Pilot
125NOTE: The illustration
126Park Assist Pilot
is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory. 423
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car
The car is started using the start knob in the tunnel console when the remote control key is in
the passenger compartment.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting the car since it is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive start).
To start the car:
1.
2.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Before starting:
1
426
•
•
Fasten the seatbelt.
•
Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed.
Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mirrors.
3.
The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With the option for
keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key
can be anywhere in the car.
Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For
cars with automatic gear changing, make
sure that gear position P or N is selected.
For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure
that the gear lever is in neutral position or
that the clutch pedal is depressed.
Turn the start knob clockwise and then
release it. The control automatically returns
to its starting position.
NOTE
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a slight
delay before starting is initiated.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
If the Car key not found message is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the remote
control key by the backup reader. Then try to start
the car again.
NOTE
When the remote control key is positioned by
the backup reader, make sure that there are
no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile
phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several
car keys close to one another by the backup
reader may cause interference with each
other.
When the engine is started, the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection triggers.
If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
•
•
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
Switching off the car
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 477)
The car is switched off using the start knob in
the tunnel console.
Selecting ignition mode (p. 429)
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out from
the car when leaving the car and make sure
the car's electrical system is in ignition position 0 - especially if there are children in the
car.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Related information
•
•
Switching off the car (p. 427)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Start knob in the tunnel console.
To switch off the car:
–
Turn the start knob clockwise and release it the car is switched off. The control automatically returns to its starting position.
If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
–
Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the
car is switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 426)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
}}
427
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
•
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 477)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 429)
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available.
Level
0
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in three different levels – 0, I and II. These levels are described
with the denomination "ignition position"
throughout the owner's manual.
Functions
•
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminatedA.
•
•
•
Power* seats can be adjusted.
•
The following table shows the functions available
in each ignition position/level:
The power windows can be used.
The centre display is started and
can be usedA.
The infotainment system can be
usedA.
In this mode, the functions are controlled by time and are switched off
automatically after a short while.
I
•
Panorama roof, power windows,
12V power socket in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and
windscreen wipers can be used.
•
•
Power seats can be adjusted.
12 V power sockets* in the cargo
area can be used.
Power is taken from the battery in
this ignition position.
428
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Level
II
Functions
•
•
•
The headlamps come on.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window can
only be activated after the car has
been started.
Selecting ignition mode
•
The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available.
Ignition position I - Turn the start knob
clockwise and release it. The control automatically returns to its starting position.
•
Ignition position II - Turn the start knob
clockwise and hold it in position for
approx. 5 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
•
Back to ignition position 0 - To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
The control automatically returns to its starting position.
Selecting ignition position
This ignition position consumes a
lot of current from the battery and
should therefore be avoided!
A
Related information
Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 426)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
Start knob in the tunnel console.
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 477)
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 429)
Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the car.
•
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 426)
Switching off the car (p. 427)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 477)
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions are to
be selected.
429
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock*
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
Related information
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence of
alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
In the event of an emergency situation or if the
alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car.
•
•
For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the separate instructions for that specific lock.
•
•
The car has an interface for the electrical connection of the different makes and models of
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The interface facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives
the option of an integrated function including
messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's
main display. For information about a specific
alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual
from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer.
Related information
•
•
•
•
430
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 430)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 431)
Starting the car (p. 426)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Activating the bypass function (Bypass)
NOTE
All bypass activation is logged and saved in
the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit.
It is not possible to undo a bypass.
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
instead?, is shown in the screen:
•
If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass by
pressing the right arrow button on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad and then on
the O button.
•
If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing
the O button.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Alcohol lock* (p. 430)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 431)
The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can
be started.
The number of bypasses possible before service
is required is selected during alcohol lock installation.
Starting the car (p. 426)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
To bear in mind
In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:
•
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.
Brake functions
Foot brake
The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed
or prevent the car from rolling.
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car
is equipped with several automatic brake assist
functions. These can assist the driver by not
needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal
when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on
an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill
gradient.
Depending on the car's equipment, the following
auto braking functions are available:
•
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto
Hold)
•
•
•
•
Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Auto braking after a collision
City Safety
Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 430)
Related information
Alcohol lock* (p. 430)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 426)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Foot brake (p. 431)
Parking brake (p. 434)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 437)
Auto braking after a collision (p. 439)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 438)
City Safety™ (p. 349)
Hill descent control (p. 460)
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will
therefore be needed to produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the foot brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes should be relieved by using
engine braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine
braking is most efficiently used if the same gear
is used downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road
for increased engine braking while driving on
steep downhill gradients at low speeds.
Anti-lock braking system
The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), which prevents the wheels from
locking while braking and allows maintained
}}
* Option/accessory. 431
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
steering control. Vibration may be felt in the
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault and
ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault
has occurred in the brake system.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the car has been started when the
driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the system may be made at low
speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the
brake pedal.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when
the engine is started: Automatic
function check.
Constant glow for more than 2
seconds: Fault in the ABS system.
The car's normal brake system is
still working, but without the ABS
function.
432
•
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake
system checked - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
•
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid
must be investigated.
Brake assistance
The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist
System), helps to increase brake force during
braking, thereby shortening the braking distance.
The system detects the way in which the driver
brakes and increases brake force where necessary. The brake force can be boosted up to the
level when the ABS system is engaged. The
function is suspended when the pressure on the
brake pedal decreases.
NOTE
When BAS is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When the brake pedal is released, all braking
ceases.
Brake assistance (p. 432)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 437)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 438)
Related information
Braking on wet roads (p. 433)
•
Braking on gritted roads (p. 433)
Brake system maintenance (p. 433)
Brake lights (p. 156)
Foot brake (p. 431)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Braking on wet roads
Braking on gritted roads
Brake system maintenance
When driving for a prolonged period of time in
heavy rain without braking, the braking effect
may be delayed slightly when next using the
brakes.
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake linings.
Check brake system components regularly for
wear.
This may extend braking distance. You should
therefore maintain a greater safety distance to
vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do
the following:
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
the Service and Warranty Booklet. New and
replaced brake linings and brake discs do not
provide optimal braking effect until they have
been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres
(miles). Compensate for the reduced braking
effect by depressing the brake pedal harder.
Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that
are approved for your Volvo.
This may also be the case after a car wash. It is
then necessary to depress the brake pedal more
forcefully. You should therefore maintain a
greater distance to the vehicles in front.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or
using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs,
enabling them to dry faster and protecting them
against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic
situation when braking.
Related information
•
•
Foot brake (p. 431)
•
Brake now and again to remove any layer of
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
put at risk by the braking.
•
Gently depress the brake pedal after finishing driving and before starting your next trip.
Related information
•
•
IMPORTANT
Foot brake (p. 431)
The wear on the brake system's components
must be checked regularly.
Braking on wet roads (p. 433)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 433)
Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 431)
433
STARTING AND DRIVING
Parking brake
Related information
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels.
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 434)
•
•
Parking on a hill (p. 436)
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 437)
The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel
console between the seats.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-operated parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during the
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is
applied when the car is moving then the normal
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear
wheels when the car is almost stationary.
434
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 436)
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
rolling from stationary.
Activating the parking brake
1.
Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is activated.
2.
Check that the car is stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
parking brake is activated.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. Read the message in the driver display.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Automatic activation
The parking brake is activated automatically:
•
Deactivating the parking brake
if the Auto hold function (automatic braking
when stationary) is activated and the car has
been stationary for a longer time (5-10
minutes).
•
when gear position P is selected on a steep
hill2.
Emergency brake
In an emergency, the parking brake can be activated when the car is in motion by pulling and
holding up the control. Braking stops when the
control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.
With automatic gearbox:
Select gear position D or R and depress the
accelerator pedal.
when the car is switched off and the setting
for automatic activation of the parking brake
is activated in the centre display.
•
With manual gearbox:
Engage a suitable gear, release the clutch
and depress the accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
NOTE
When the car is first started, the parking
brake can be released automatically without
the seatbelt fastened.
Deactivate manually
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2.
Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
Related information
•
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 436)
Deactivate automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
•
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 436)
2.
•
•
3.
2
4.
Depress the brake pedal firmly.
Start the car.
Parking brake (p. 434)
Parking on a hill (p. 436)
Applies to automatic gearbox.
435
STARTING AND DRIVING
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
Choose whether the parking brake is to be activated automatically when the car is switched off.
Parking on a hill
Always use the parking brake when parking on a
hill.
WARNING
This choice is made in the settings menu in the
centre display.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension to select or deselect the function Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Related information
•
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 434)
Parking brake (p. 434)
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid
this by pulling the control upwards while driving
the car away. Release the control when the
engine achieves traction.
Related information
•
436
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 434)
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not
possible to deactivate or activate the parking
brake after several attempts.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving
with the parking brake applied.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if
parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in
position P, or engage first gear if the car has a
manual gearbox.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
low.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electricallyoperated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. See the message in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the
message in the driver display.
Information message in driver display.
Automatic braking when stationary
Symbols in the driver display
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold)
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when the
car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.
When the car has stopped, the brakes are activated automatically. The function can use either
foot brake or parking brake to hold the car stationary and it works on all gradients. When driving
away, the brakes disengage automatically if the
driver is wearing the seatbelt.
Symbol
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the foot brake to
keep the car stationary.
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the parking brake to
keep the car stationary.
Related information
•
NOTE
When braking to a standstill on an uphill or
downhill slope, the brake pedal should be
depressed a little harder before being
released to ensure the car does not roll.
Related information
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 434)
Specification
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 438)
Foot brake (p. 431)
Parking brake (p. 434)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 438)
Starter battery (p. 619)
Volvo service programme (p. 598)
The parking brake is activated if:
•
•
•
•
the car is switched off
the driver's door is opened
the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled
the car has been stationary for a longer time
(5-10 minutes).
437
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
•
The automatic brake function at a standstill is
activated using the button in the tunnel console.
•
The function remains deactivated until it is
reactivated.
When the function is deactivated, hill start
assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the
car from rolling backwards when starting on
an uphill gradient.
Related information
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 437)
Help when starting on a hill
Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents
the car from rolling backwards when starting on
an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents the car from rolling forwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver starts to drive
away.
Hill start assist is available even if the function for
automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is
deactivated.
–
Press the button in the tunnel console to
activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated. Activated
function remains even when the car is
started next time.
Applicable when switching off
If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol illuminated) then the brake pedal must be
depressed at the same time as the
button is depressed in order to deactivate.
438
Related information
•
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 437)
Foot brake (p. 431)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Auto braking after a collision
In the event of a collision in which the activation
level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large
animal is detected, the car's brakes are automatically applied. This function is to prevent or
reduce the effects of any subsequent collision.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no
longer possible to control and steer the car. In
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's
path, the auto braking system is activated automatically and brakes the car in a safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are activated during braking. When the car has stopped,
the hazard warning lights continue to flash and
the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk
of being hit by following traffic, the system can be
overridden by the driver depressing the accelerator pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is
intact after the collision.
Brake assist is included in the Rear Collision
Warning and Blind Spot Information safety systems.
•
Brake functions (p. 431)
Gearbox
The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
(power transmission) between engine and drive
wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change
the gear ratio depending on speed and power
requirements.
There are two main types of gearbox, manual and
automatic.
The manual gearbox has six gears and the automatic gearbox has eight. The number of gear
changes means that the engine's torque and
power range can be used effectively. In the automatic gearbox, two of the gears are overdrive
gears that save fuel when driving at constant
engine speed.
It is also possible to select gears manually with
the automatic gearbox. The driver display respectively shows which gear or gear position is currently in use.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in the
driver display and a text message is shown follow the recommendation given.
Related information
•
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 363)
BLIS* (p. 364)
}}
* Option/accessory. 439
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Symbols in the driver display
Manual gearbox
•
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver
display shows a symbol and a message.
With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suitable gear manually, according to speed and
power requirements at the time.
Follow the shifting pattern on the gear lever
and start from neutral position before moving
it to the R position.
•
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
Symbol
Specification
Changing gear
Information or error message for
gearbox. Follow the recommendation given.
During parking
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow
the recommendation given.
Related information
Reduced performance/Acceleration performance reduced
In the event of a temporary powertrain fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
Related information
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 441)
•
•
Manual gearbox (p. 440)
Gear shift indicator (p. 445)
•
•
Neutral position (N)
The manual gearbox has six gears; the shifting
pattern is shown on the gear lever.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility
of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear
during normal forward travel.
440
Gearbox (p. 439)
Gear shift indicator (p. 445)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear positions for automatic
gearbox
With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses
the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox
also has a manual gearshift mode.
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be stationary when the park position is selected.
To select another gear position when the park
position is selected, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
stationary when changing gear from R position to
D position.
To park - first apply the parking bake and then
select park position.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations.
NOTE
The driver display shows the gear position
selected:
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
P, R, N, D or M.
In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is
also shown.
Gear positions
Park position - P
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P
position is engaged.
Reverse position - R
Select position R to reverse. The car must be stationary when reverse position is selected.
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position.
To be able to change from the neutral position to
another gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
}}
441
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Manual gearshift mode - M
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
any time while driving. The car engine-brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Select manual gearshift mode by moving the
gear selector sideways from position D to the
end position at "±". The driver display shows
which gear is engaged at the time.
•
Press the gear selector forwards to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release it.
•
Press the gear selector backwards to "–"
(minus) to change down one step and
release it.
manual gearshift mode in the driver display3.
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the
speed decreases to a level lower than appropri-
3
442
ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking
and stalling.
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
To return to automatic gear changing, press the
gear selector sideways to the end position at D.
The steering wheel paddles are a complement
to the gear selector and make it possible to
change gear manually without releasing hands
from the steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 444)
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 442)
Kick-down function (p. 445)
Gear shift indicator (p. 445)
Activating the steering wheel paddles
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated:
–
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates current gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
This is indicated by means of the figure for the
current gear extinguishing. The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated for as long as engine braking is in progress.
In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are
automatically activated.
In gear position M there is no automatic deactivation.
Related information
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 441)
•
Gear shift indicator (p. 445)
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles in manual gearshift mode.
Switch
To change gear one step:
–
Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards
the steering wheel - and release.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
provided that the engine speed does not leave
the permitted range.
After each gear change the figure in the driver
display changes to show the current gear.
Deactivating the function
Manual deactivation in gear position D.
– Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and holding in place until the
figure in the driver display for the current
gear extinguishes.
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are
deactivated after a short time if they are not used.
443
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental
changing between different gear positions in an
automatic gearbox.
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
From park position - P
To select a gear position other than the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the
ignition position must be II.
From neutral position - N
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If there is no power to the car, the automatic
gear selector inhibitor can nevertheless be disengaged.
To be able to move the gear selector from the N
position to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the ignition position must
be II.
Related information
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions are
locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 441)
•
Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor
(p. 444)
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a discharged battery, the gear selector must be
moved to the N position so that the car can be
moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in
front of the gear selector. Locate the hole
with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of
the compartment.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
N and D.
Press a small screwdriver into the hole and
hold.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special
safety systems.
444
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the button.
4.
Put the rubber mat back in place.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
•
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 444)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 441)
Kick-down function
Gear shift indicator
Kick-down4 is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, such as for overtaking.
The gear shift indicator in the driver display
shows the current gear during manual gearshifting and when it is appropriate to engage the
next gear for optimum fuel economy.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is
important to drive in the right gear and to change
gear in good time.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
On kick-down the car can shift down one or more
steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The
car shifts up when the engine has reached is
maximum engine speed in order to prevent
engine damage.
Related information
•
4
Only possible with automatic gearbox.
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 441)
}}
445
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
With automatic gearbox5
The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in
the driver display and uses an up arrow to indicate when shifting to a higher gear is recommended.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
With manual gearbox
An up-arrow indicates a recommended change to
a higher gear, and a down-arrow a recommended
change to a lower gear.
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 441)
•
Manual gearbox (p. 440)
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.
Related information
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.
5 Applies
446
to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
All-wheel drive
Drive modes*
All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means
that the car is driving all four wheels at the same
time, which improves traction.
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving
characteristics in order to enhance the driving
experience and facilitate driving in special situations.
To achieve the best possible traction, the motive
force is distributed automatically to the wheels
with the best grip. The system continuously calculates the need for torque to the rear wheels,
and can immediately redistribute up to half of the
motor's torque to the rear wheels.
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at
higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions,
the majority of power is transmitted to the front
wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is
always engaged in preparation for maximum traction during acceleration.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on
the selected drive mode.
Related information
•
•
•
Drive modes* (p. 447)
Low speed control (p. 459)
Gearbox (p. 439)
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
have access to the car's numerous functions and
settings for different driving needs. The following
systems are adapted to obtain the best possible
driving characteristics in each respective drive
mode:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Steering
Engine/gearbox6/all-wheel drive
Brakes
tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the
steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and
body's movement is smooth.
This drive mode is the certification mode for carbon dioxide emissions.
ECO
• Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and
environmentally-conscious driving with the
Eco mode.
The drive mode means, for example, that the
Start/Stop function is activated and the output of
certain climate settings is reduced.
The driver display has an ECO gauge that facilitates fuel-efficient driving.
Shock absorption
Driver display
Start/Stop function
Climate settings
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive
modes are available in all situations.
Selectable drive modes
COMFORT
• This is the car's normal mode.
When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and
the Start/Stop function is activated. These set6
Applies to automatic gearbox.
}}
* Option/accessory. 447
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
OFF ROAD
• Maximise the car's traction when driving in
difficult terrain and on poor roads.
Steering response is faster and shock absorption
is harder7 which means that the body follows the
roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering.
The steering is light, the all-wheel drive operation
and low speed function with hill descent control
(Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
Start/Stop function is deactivated.
INDIVIDUAL
Adapting a drive mode according to individual preferences.
•
The drive mode can only be activated at low
speeds and the speedometer shows the range
for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off
road mode is suspended and another drive mode
is activated.
Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust
the settings according to the desired driving characteristics. These settings are saved in the active
driver profile and are available each time the car
is unlocked with the same remote control key.
In the Off road mode the driver display has a
compass between the speedometer and tachometer.
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
DYNAMIC
• Dynamic mode means that the car has sportier characteristics and faster response to
accelerating.
The gear changes become faster and more distinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with
greater traction.
7
8
448
Applies to Four-C.
The figure is schematic - details may vary depending on car model or updated software.
Settings view8 for individual drive mode.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and
select Individual Drive Mode.
STARTING AND DRIVING
3.
In Presets, select a drive mode to start from:
Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driver Display
Steering Force
Powertrain Characteristics
Brake Characteristics
Suspension Control
Changing drive mode*
Change the drive mode using the control in the
centre console.
Remember that not all drive modes are available
in all situations.
To change drive mode:
ECO Climate
Start/Stop.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions.
Changing drive mode* (p. 449)
Drive mode ECO (p. 450)
Press the drive mode control or tap directly
on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
> The selected drive mode is indicated in
the driver display.
If a drive mode is greyed-out in the pop-up menu
then it cannot be selected.
Related information
•
•
Drive modes* (p. 447)
Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO
with the function button (p. 452)
•
Activating and deactivating low-speed driving
using a function button (p. 460)
•
Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button (p. 461)
Economical driving (p. 462)
Start/Stop function (p. 452)
Low speed control (p. 459)
Hill descent control (p. 460)
All-wheel drive (p. 447)
Driver profiles (p. 130)
1.
Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2.
Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
desired drive mode is highlighted.
* Option/accessory. 449
STARTING AND DRIVING
Drive mode ECO
Drive mode Eco optimises the car's driving characteristics for more fuel efficient and environmentally-conscious driving.
Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environment.
The following properties are adapted for Eco driving:
•
•
Gearbox gearshift points9.
•
The Eco Coast9 freewheel function is activated and engine braking is deactivated
when the accelerator pedal is released at
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h
(40 and 87 mph).
Engine management and response from the
accelerator pedal.
•
Some of the climate control system's settings work at reduced power or are deactivated.
•
The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentallyconscious and fuel-efficient driving.
Free-wheel function Eco Coast9
The freewheel function Eco Coast means in practice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn
that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel
for longer distances. When the driver releases
9
450
the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically
disengaged from the engine whose speed is
reduced to idling speed with reduced consumption.
•
The speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
•
The road's downhill gradient is steeper than
approx. 6%.
The function is best used where it is possible to
freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight
downhill gradient or when there is a predictable
speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a
lower speed limit.
•
Manual gear changing is performed with the
steering wheel paddles*.
•
•
•
Drive mode Eco is activated.
Deactivating and switching off the freewheel
function
In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate or switch off the function in order to use
engine braking. Examples of such situations may
be on steep downhill gradients or before an
imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be
able to do it in the safest way possible.
The gear selector is in D position.
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows:
Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
•
The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%.
•
•
•
Activating the freewheel function
The function is activated when the accelerator
pedal is fully released, in combination with the
following parameters:
The driver display shows COASTING when the
freewheel function is being used.
Limitations
The freewheel function is not available if:
•
Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature.
•
The gear selector is moved from the D position and the manual position.
Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
Move the gear selector to manual position.
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
Switch off the freewheel function as follows:
•
Change drive mode*, or switch off the Eco
drive mode in the function view.
Even without the freewheel function, it is possible
to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn,
reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel
economy it is better to have the freewheel function activated and be able to freewheel for longer
distances.
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Cruise control Eco Cruise
Eco gauge in the driver display
When using the cruise control in the Eco drive
mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will
be lower compared to other drive modes, which
enables further fuel savings. This means that the
car's speed can be slightly above or below the
set speed.
•
On a smooth road, the car's speed can deviate from the set speed when the cruise control is active and the car free-rolls.
•
On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed
drops until a downshift is made9, then
reduced acceleration starts in order to
achieve the set speed.
•
•
With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
gauge shows a high value.
ECO climate control
Eco gauge in the 12-inch driver display*.
On a downhill slope where the car free-rolls,
the car's speed can be slightly above or
below the set speed. The function uses normal engine braking to maintain the set
speed. The foot brake is also used if necessary.
In the Eco drive mode, Eco climate control is activated automatically in the passenger compartment in order to reduce energy consumption.
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, several
parameters in the climate control system's
settings are changed, and several electricity
consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only regained by switching off the ECO
function or adapting Individual* drive mode
with full climate functionality.
The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the
driving is:
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a
low value with the pointer in the green zone.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show
how a reference driver would drive the car under
the same driving conditions. This is indicated with
the short pointer on the gauge.
Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display.
9
•
In the event of difficulties due to misting, press
the button for max. defroster which has normal
functionality.
}}
* Option/accessory. 451
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 449)
Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO
with the function button (p. 452)
Drive modes* (p. 447)
Economical driving (p. 462)
Start/Stop function (p. 452)
Activating and deactivating drive
mode ECO with the function button
There is a function button for Eco driving mode
in the centre display's function view unless the
car was equipped with drive mode control in the
tunnel console.
The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is
switched off, and it must therefore be activated
after each time the engine is started. The driver
display shows ECO when the function is activated.
Selecting Eco drive mode in the centre
display function view
–
Press the Driving Mode ECO button to
activate or deactivate the function.
Start/Stop function
With the Start/Stop function, the engine
switches off temporarily when the car has stopped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and
then starts again automatically when the journey
is resumed.
The start/stop function reduces fuel consumption, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust
emissions.
The system makes it possible to adopt an environmentally-conscious driving style by allowing
the car to engine auto-stop when possible.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving with start/stop function (p. 453)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 455)
Drive modes* (p. 447)
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
Related information
•
•
•
452
Drive mode ECO (p. 450)
Changing drive mode* (p. 449)
Drive modes* (p. 447)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with start/stop function
The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off
the engine when stationary and then restarts it
automatically when the journey is resumed.
The Start/Stop function is available when the car
is started and can be activated if certain conditions have been met. The driver display indicates
whether the function is available, active or not
available.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is
auto-stopped. However, some equipment may
have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely
high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to autostop:
With automatic gearbox
•
•
10
With adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist activated, the engine will auto-stop after approximately three seconds.
Autostart
The following is required for the engine to autostart:
With automatic gearbox
•
Release the brake pedal - the engine will
autostart and you can continue driving. On an
uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA)
engages, which prevents the car from rolling
backwards.
•
When the Auto Hold function is activated,
auto-start is delayed until the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
•
When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist
is activated, the engine will auto-start when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, or by
button on the left keypad
pressing the
of the steering wheel.
•
Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal
and depress the accelerator pedal - the
engine auto-starts.
•
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
Stop the car with the foot brake and then
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
With manual gearbox
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral position and release the clutch pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
Normal start mode.
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
In drive mode Eco or Comfort10, the engine may
auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.
With manual gearbox
•
With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal or depress the
accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
•
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
}}
453
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
With 12-inch driver display*
• The text READY is shown in the tachometer
when the function is available.
•
White symbol: The function is available.
A pointer in the tachometer points to READY
when the function is active and the engine is
auto-stopped.
•
The text READY is greyed out when the
function is not available.
•
No text is shown when the function is deactivated.
Specification
The function is not available, the
conditions are not fulfilled.
Related information
•
With 8-inch driver display
The symbol is shown in the lower edge of the
speedometer.
454
In certain situations it may be desirable to temporarily deactivate the start/stop function.
Deactivate using the Start/
Stop function button in the
centre display's function view.
The indication in the button is
switched off when the function
is deactivated.
Beige symbol: The function is
active and the engine is auto-stopped.
No symbol is shown when the
function is deactivated.
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
temporarily
Deactivating the Start/Stop function temporarily (p. 454)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 455)
•
•
•
Start/Stop function (p. 452)
The function is deactivated until
•
•
•
it is reactivated
the drive mode is changed to Eco or Comfort
the next time the car is started.
Related information
•
•
Driving with start/stop function (p. 453)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 455)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 438)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 437)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Conditions for the Start/Stop
function
•
The starter battery's temperature is below or
above the permitted limit values.
For the Start/Stop function to work requires that
a number of conditions are met.
•
The driver makes sweeping steering wheel
movements.
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in
the driver display.
•
•
•
The engine does not auto-stop
The engine does not auto-stop in the following
cases:
•
The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) after starting.
•
After a number of repeated auto stops,
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) before the next auto stop.
•
•
The driver has unfastened the seatbelt.
•
The engine is not at normal operating temperature.
•
The ambient temperature is under -5 °C (23
°F) or above approx. 30 °C (86 °F).
•
The windscreen's electric heating is activated.
•
The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values.
•
11
The capacity of the starter battery is below
the minimum permissible level.
The car is reversed.
Applies to cars with diesel engines.
With automatic gearbox:
•
The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in
P position and the driver's door is open - a
normal start must take place.
The road is very steep.
With manual gearbox:
The bonnet is opened.
•
•
When driving at high altitudes when the
engine has not reached operating temperature.
•
•
The ABS system has been activated.
•
Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal
protection.
In the event of heavy braking (even without
the ABS system having been activated).
•
The exhaust system's particulate filter is
full11.
•
A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s
electrical system.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
•
The gearbox is not at normal operating temperature.
•
The gear selector is in M (±) position.
The driver is unrestrained.
A gear is engaged without declutching.
Involuntary stop with manual gearbox
If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed
as follows:
1.
Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked
in the seatbelt buckle.
2.
Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically.
3.
In certain cases the gear lever must be set in
neutral position. A message is shown in the
driver display - follow the recommendation
given.
The engine auto-starts without the
brake pedal having been released
In the following cases, the engine auto-starts
even if the driver does not take his/her foot off
the brake pedal:
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not autostart after having auto-stopped:
}}
455
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
•
High humidity in the passenger compartment
forms misting on the windows.
•
The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values.
•
There is a temporarily high current take-off
or starter battery capacity drops below the
lowest permissible level.
•
•
•
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
The bonnet is opened.
The car starts to roll or increase speed
slightly if the car auto-stopped without being
completely stationary.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
•
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
the gear selector in D or N position.
•
The gear selector is moved from D to R or M
(±) position.
•
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
text message indicate that the ignition is on.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally
before lifting up the bonnet.
Related information
•
•
456
Start/Stop function (p. 452)
Driving with start/stop function (p. 453)
•
Deactivating the Start/Stop function temporarily (p. 454)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Level control* and shock absorption
Shock absorption (Four-C)
During transport
Level control and shock absorption are regulated automatically in the car.
The shock absorption is adapted according to the
selected drive mode and according to the speed
of the car. Shock absorption is normally set for
the best possible comfort and is regulated continuously depending on the road surface, the
car's acceleration, braking and cornering.
During transport of the car on a ferry, train or
truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres
and not around other parts of the chassis.
Changes in the air suspension may occur during
transport, which could affect the lashing negatively.
With rear level control, the car maintains the
same height at the rear regardless of load. Level
control can also occur even after the car has
been parked.
Symbols and messages in driver display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Suspension
The active suspension has been switched off manually by the user.
Deactivated by user
Temporarily reduced performance
The active suspension's performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system
use. If this message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshopA.
Suspension
A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible.
Suspension
Service required
}}
* Option/accessory. 457
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Symbol
Message
Specification
Suspension failure
A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car towed to a workshopA.
Stop safely
Suspension
A fault has occurred. If the message appears whilst driving, contact a workshopA.
Slow down Car too high
Suspension
Level control of the car's rear axle to target height in progress.
Auto adjusting car level
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
458
Settings for level control* (p. 459)
Drive modes* (p. 447)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Settings for level control*
Low speed control
Switch off the level control when the car is to be
jacked up in order to prevent problems with
automatic regulation.
The low speed control function Low Speed
Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction
for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces,
such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer
on a launch ramp.
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
included in the Off Road drive mode.
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Settings in the centre display
Disable Leveling Control
In certain cases, the function must be deactivated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*.
The difference in level created when lifting with a
jack would otherwise mean the automatic control
starting to adjust the height, creating an undesired effect.
Deactivating the function via the centre display:
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car
Suspension.
3.
Select Disable Leveling Control.
Parking Brake and
Related information
•
•
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 457)
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
The function is adapted for off-road driving and
driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx.
40 km/h (25 mph).
With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel
drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheelspin and provides better traction on all wheels.
The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order
to facilitate traction and speed control at low
speed.
NOTE
NOTE
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating low-speed driving
using a function button (p. 460)
•
•
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 449)
Hill descent control (p. 460)
All-wheel drive (p. 447)
The function is activated together with Hill
Descent Control (HDC) which means that speed
down steep hills can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake
pedal. The system facilitates a low and even
speed while driving on steep downhill gradients.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
* Option/accessory. 459
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving using a function
button
There is a function button for low-speed driving
with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped
with drive mode control in the tunnel console.
Related information
•
•
Low speed control (p. 459)
Changing drive mode* (p. 449)
Hill descent control
Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control
(HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced
engine braking. The function makes it possible
to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients using only the accelerator
pedal, without using the foot brake.
Select low-speed driving in the centre
display function view
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
included in the Off Road drive mode.
Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driving at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep
downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The
driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but
can instead focus on steering.
–
WARNING
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the
engine is switched off.
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Function
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
460
Hill descent control allows the car to roll at
inching speed both forward and backward, assisted by the brake system. The speed can be
increased by using the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is then released the car
slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of
the gradient of the hill and without the need for
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are
switched on when the function is operating.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed,
or stop the car at any time by using the foot
brake.
The function is activated together with Low
Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and
improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces. The systems are designed for use
at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
•
•
HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and
with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear
changing.
It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
higher with manual gear changing.
With manual gearbox
•
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
If the function is disabled while driving on a
steep downhill gradient, the braking effect
will gradually decrease.
With automatic gearbox
HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with reverse
gear (R). There is no active braking in higher
gears even though the function is not deactivated until approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
There is a function button for hill descent control
with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped
with drive mode control in the tunnel console.
Selecting hill descent control in the
centre display function view
Hill descent control only works at low speeds.
NOTE
Points to remember when driving with
HDC
•
Activating and deactivating hill
descent control with the function
button
–
Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button (p. 461)
•
•
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 449)
Low speed control (p. 459)
All-wheel drive (p. 447)
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 461
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
Hill descent control (p. 460)
Changing drive mode* (p. 449)
Economical driving
•
Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive with a
normal load right after starting – a cold
engine consumes more fuel than a warm
one.
•
If possible, avoid using the car for driving
short distances. The engine does not have
time to reach normal operating temperature,
which contributes to increased fuel consumption.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
When driving with manual gear changing –
drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to
the current traffic situation and road – lower
engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear shift indicator13.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results.
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption seek advice on suitable tyres from a retailer.
•
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good distance to other vehicles and objects to minimise braking.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption.
•
High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
A roof load and space box increase wind
resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Trip computer indication for instantaneous
fuel consumption can be helpful for driving
more economically.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
Drive economically and in a more eco-friendly
way by driving smoothly, thinking ahead, and
adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
Note the following:
•
For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco
drive mode.
•
Use the Eco Coast freewheel function in Eco
drive mode – engine braking ceases, meaning that the car's kinetic energy is used to
freewheel for longer distances12.
•
12
13
462
Applies to automatic gearbox.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Related information
•
•
•
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of
long journey, it is important to check the car's
functions and equipment particularly carefully.
Check that:
•
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
Drive mode ECO (p. 450)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 558)
•
•
•
the engine is working normally and that fuel
consumption is normal
•
•
•
•
•
•
Settings for car modem (p. 537)
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
Driving with a trailer (p. 482)
Pilot Assist (p. 320)
Speed Limiter (p. 287)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 573)
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
brake force during braking is optimal
all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level
if the car is heavily laden
•
the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when driving to areas where there is a risk of snowy or
icy road surfaces
•
•
•
starter battery charging is good
the wiper blades are in good condition
a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are
located in the car - legally required in certain
countries.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 558)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 669)
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
Winter driving (p. 464)
Economical driving (p. 462)
463
STARTING AND DRIVING
Winter driving
Slippery driving conditions
Driving in water
For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks of the car in order to ensure that it
can be driven safely.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
Driving in water means that the car is driven in a
deeper amount of water on a road that is under
water. Driving in water must be performed with
great caution.
Check the following in particular before the cold
season:
•
The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol.
This mixture protects the engine against
frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid
health risks, different types of glycol must not
be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
•
464
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the starter
battery and its capacity is reduced by the
cold.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Winter wheels (p. 571)
Snow chains (p. 572)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 433)
The car can be driven through water to a maximum depth of 30 cm (11 inches) at no more
than walking speed. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
do not stop the car. When the water has been
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is achieved. Water
and mud for example can make the brake linings
wet resulting in delayed brake function.
•
If necessary, clean the contacts for the electric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
Braking on wet roads (p. 433)
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
Starter battery (p. 619)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 650)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 649)
Topping up coolant (p. 610)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 665)
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
•
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
•
If water enters the transmission, it
reduces the lubricating ability of the oil,
which shortens the service life of related
systems.
•
•
Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential or
its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is
not covered by the warranty.
In the event of the engine stalling in
water, do not try restart - tow the car from
the water to a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of
engine breakdown.
Related information
•
•
14
Opening and closing the fuel filler
flap
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap
to be opened14.
Filling fuel
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler
system.
Refuelling the car at a petrol station
In the driver display, the arrow
next to the tank symbol indicates which side of the car the
fuel filler flap is located.
1.
Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2.
After refuelling is finished - close the flap
with a gentle press.
Related information
•
•
Fuel filling is performed in the following way.
Filling fuel (p. 465)
Checking and filling with
AdBlue®
(p. 472)
Recovery (p. 489)
Low speed control (p. 459)
Only locking and unlocking with the remote control key, keyless or via Volvo On Call affects the status of the fuel filler flap.
1.
Switch off the car and open the fuel filler
flap.
2.
Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car. See information on approved fuels in the
sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respectively.
3.
Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps
before refuelling is started.
}}
465
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
4.
Handling of fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect
engine power and fuel consumption.
NOTE
WARNING
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
Topping up fuel from a fuel can
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located in the foam block under the floor hatch in
the cargo area.
1.
Open the fuel filler flap.
2.
Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps
before filling can be started.
Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater*
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is
in a filling station area.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
(p. 465)
•
•
•
Petrol (p. 467)
Diesel (p. 468)
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 469)
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
466
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
Petrol
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must
fulfil the EN 228 standard.
IMPORTANT
Related information
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a petrol engine.
Petrol (p. 467)
•
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
•
EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by
volume ethanol) is approved for use.
•
Ethanol higher than E10
(max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is
not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Diesel (p. 468)
Handling AdBlue® (p. 471)
•
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter.
•
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
•
Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Handling of fuel (p. 466)
Filling fuel (p. 465)
Petrol particle filter (p. 468)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 669)
Octane rating
•
•
•
RON 95 can be used for normal driving.
RON 98 is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption.
An octane rating lower than RON 95 must
not be used.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C
(100 °F), fuel with the highest octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
467
STARTING AND DRIVING
Petrol particle filter
Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more
efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In
normal driving conditions, passive regeneration
takes place, which leads to the particles being
oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in
this way.
If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated
cold starts in low outside temperature, active
regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of
the particulate filter is automatic and normally
takes 10-20 minutes. There may be a smell of
burning during regeneration.
Use the parking heater in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a petrol car
The capacity of the petrol emission control system is affected by how the car is driven. It is
important to drive varying distances at different
speeds to achieve optimal performance.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-
468
larly drive at higher speeds to allow the petrol
emission control system to regenerate.
•
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
Related information
•
Petrol (p. 467)
Diesel
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a diesel engine.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur and metals.
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C (32 °F)) a
paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
which may lead to starting problems. The fuel
qualities that are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but for extreme weather
conditions, old fuel or moving between climate
zones, paraffin precipitate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
When refuelling, check that the area around the
fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent
and water.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
•
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
•
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
•
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME15
(B7).
•
•
•
Empty tank and diesel engine
Diesel particulate filter (p. 470)
Emission control with
AdBlue®
(p. 471)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 669)
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to
carry out a check.
Before starting the car after the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
1.
The remote control key must be inside the
car.
2.
Put the car in the ignition position II - turn
the start knob clockwise without pressing the
brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with
manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
Heating oil
3.
Wait approx. one minute.
FAME16 and vegetable oil.
4.
Start the engine.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Related information
•
•
•
15
16
Handling of fuel (p. 466)
Filling fuel (p. 465)
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 469)
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
}}
469
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Points to remember when filling with a
fuel can
When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into
the filler pipe. The filler pipe has two opening
caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past
both caps before filling can be started.
Related information
•
•
•
Filling fuel (p. 465)
Diesel (p. 468)
Diesel particulate filter
Diesel cars are fitted with particle filters for more
efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the diesel particle filter during normal driving.
When these conditions have been met, regeneration starts to burn off the particles and empty the
filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have
reached normal operating temperature. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes.
Tool kit (p. 565)
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
•
a smaller reduction of engine power may
be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a diesel car
The capacity of the diesel emission control system is affected by how the car is driven. It is
important to drive varying distances at different
speeds to achieve optimal performance.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regularly drive at higher speeds to allow the diesel
emission control system to regenerate.
•
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
Related information
•
•
•
Diesel (p. 468)
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 471)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 669)
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
470
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Emission control with AdBlue®17
SCR18
AdBlue is an additive used in the
system
to reduce emissions of noxious substances from
a diesel engine.
If something is wrong, a message is shown in the
driver display.
IMPORTANT
AdBlue is required for the function of the
SCR system and legal emissions compliance.
It is illegal to modify or manipulate the AdBlue
supply system in any way so that no AdBlue
reagent is consumed when it is required for
legal exhaust emissions compliance. Any
such tampering may be a criminal offence
which may lead to legal prosecution actions.
In the SCR system, the AdBlue and the nitrous
oxide exhaust gas substance are converted to
nitrogen and water vapour, which significantly
reduces the emissions of harmful nitrous oxides.
AdBlue
AdBlue is a colourless fluid that consists of
32.5% urea19 in deionised water and is produced
in accordance with the ISO 22241 standard. It is
specially developed for SCR cleaning technology
for diesel engines.
It is not permitted to operate the car with an
empty AdBlue tank, since it will no longer be
compliant with the legal requirements for
exhaust emissions. Therefore, the car is
equipped with a warning system to inform
when AdBlue refilling is required. When the
fill level in the AdBlue tank is getting low,
warnings are displayed to inform that AdBlue
refilling is needed.
AdBlue has its own tank in the car and is topped
up via a separate filler pipe behind the fuel filler
flap. Consumption depends on driving style, outside temperature and the operating temperature
of the system.
Conditions for driving with AdBlue
There must always be AdBlue of the correct
quality in the tank before the car can be started.
The SCR system is very sensitive to contaminants.
The emission control system continuously monitors the tank level, quality and dosage of AdBlue.
17
18
19
Related information
•
•
•
Handling AdBlue® (p. 471)
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 472)
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 474)
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
Selective Catalytic Reduction
CO(NH2)2
Handling AdBlue®20
AdBlue consists primarily of water (approx.
67.5% water and 32.5% urea). The fluid is not
flammable but should be handled with care
since it can irritate the eyes and skin.
Points to remember when handling
Avoid inhaling vapour as well as contact with skin
and eyes. Preferably use gloves that prevent irritation to sensitive skin when handling the fluid.
WARNING
Action for first aid:
•
•
For inhalation - get fresh air.
•
For contact with the eyes - rinse immediately with a lot of water.
•
For ingestion - rinse the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
For skin contact - wash the skin with
soap and water.
Seek medical attention if the discomfort
remains or if a large quantity has been ingested.
Action in the event of a spill
AdBlue spilled on the ground, the car or painted
surfaces must be rinsed thoroughly with water.
Avoid releasing into the drainage system.
}}
471
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Storage
Checking and filling with AdBlue®21
AdBlue must be stored in tightly sealing original
packaging at a temperature above -11 °C (12 °F)
and below 30 °C (86 °F). The fluid must not be
stored in direct sunlight.
Check the AdBlue level regularly and top up if
the message for low AdBlue level is shown in
the driver display.
AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (12 °F) but can be
used again when the solution has thawed.
Related information
•
•
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 472)
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 471)
The Volvo workshop tops up AdBlue when the
car is serviced, however, it must also be topped
up several times between services depending on
driving style. If the AdBlue tank is allowed to
drain completely then it will no longer be possible
to start the car.
NOTE
Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank in
good time before it is empty.
If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible to
start the engine after it is switched off – not
the regular way or using aids.
The only way to be able to restart after driving
the tank empty is to refill AdBlue of specified
quality, with the minimum being the quantity
shown in the driver display.
20
21
472
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
Checking AdBlue level
1.
Open the Car Status app in the app view.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Filling
2.
3.
When the AdBlue level starts
to become low, a symbol illuminates in the driver display and
the AdBlue level low message is shown.
Press Status to show the AdBlue level.
1.
Fill with AdBlue of the correct quality22.
Do not overfill the tank. The amount of
AdBlue that can be filled is shown in the app
Car Status.
WARNING
When filling from the AdBlue pump at a filling
station, it is advisable to use the pump adapted for passenger cars. The AdBlue pump for
heavy vehicles can also be used.
Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2.
IMPORTANT
Wipe away any spilled AdBlue.
Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from
coming into contact with the car's paintwork.
If it does, rinse with plenty of water since the
fluid can affect the paintwork.
Graphic for AdBlue level in the centre display.
Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a full
tank.
When less than 25 % of the tank remains
available, the colour of the remaining cursor
changes to amber, and at less than 10 % it
turns red.
22
Open the blue cover for the smaller filler pipe
intended for AdBlue.
Related information
•
•
•
Handling AdBlue® (p. 471)
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 474)
Tank capacity for AdBlue® (p. 667)
ISO 22241
473
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols and messages for
AdBlue®23
The emission control system continuously monitors the level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. If
something is wrong, a message is shown in the
driver display.
Symbol
Message
Specification
AdBlue level low
The AdBlue level is low and the tank needs to be topped up.
AdBlue dosing
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
and
AdBlue quality
23
474
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbol
Message
Specification
Refill AdBlue
The AdBlue level is critically low and the tank needs to be topped up immediately.
Engine start prohibited
The car cannot be started before AdBlue has been filled. Fill with AdBlue to the amount specified in
the driver display, or contact a workshopA.
and e.g.: Fill a minimum of 4.5
litres of AdBlue
Engine start prohibited
Note that:
•
The car must be level for the level gauge to be able to correctly register the amount of AdBlue
filled.
•
It can take up to 20 seconds after filling before the system has been updated with the correct
level indication.
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
Service of AdBlue system
needed to allow restart
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 472)
Handling AdBlue® (p. 471)
Book service and repair (p. 601)
475
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
Transmission warm Reduce speed to
lower temperature or Transmission hot
Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
recommendation given, reduce speed or stop
the car in a safe way and allow the engine to
run at idling speed for several minutes to
enable the gearbox to cool down.
Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load.
•
In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
•
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
•
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning
symbol is illuminated and the driver display
shows the message Engine temperature
High temperature Stop safely. Stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to run
at idling speed for several minutes and cool
down.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
•
If the message Engine temperature High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant Level low, turn off engine is
shown, stop the car and switch off the
engine.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an
alternative gear shift program will be
selected24. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and the
driver display shows the message
24
476
Applies to automatic gearbox.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the recommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
Follow the recommendation given.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Specification
Related information
•
•
•
•
Topping up coolant (p. 610)
Driving with a trailer (p. 482)
Preparations for a long trip (p. 463)
Gear shift indicator (p. 445)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the starter
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition position II when the car is switched off.
Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less
power.
Using jump starting with another
battery
If the starter battery is discharged then the car
can be started with current from another battery.
–
Open the positive jump-starting point's cover
(2).
6.
Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
7.
Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
Attachment points for the jump leads.
8.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other
damage:
Connect the black jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's negative jump-starting point
(4).
9.
Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
securely so that there are no sparks during
the starting attempt.
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Related information
•
•
IMPORTANT
5.
ventilation fan
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is
shown in the driver display. The energy-saving
function then shuts down certain functions or
reduces certain functions such as the ventilation
fan and/or audio system.
Starter battery (p. 619)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
Examples of such functions are:
•
•
•
•
4.
1.
Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0.
2.
Check that the donor battery has a voltage of
12 V.
3.
If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
}}
477
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
•
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between cable
and car during the starting attempt. There is a
risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the black jump lead's
clamps comes into contact with the car's
positive jump-starting point/donor battery's
positive terminal or the clamp connected to
the red jump lead.
WARNING
Towbar*
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
The car can be equipped with a towbar that
makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the
car.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
There may be different towbar variants available
for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and lubrication with grease in order to prevent wear.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 426)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 429)
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is
no rear mounting for a towing eye.
478
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
•
•
•
Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 480)
Specifications for towbar*
Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches)
Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.
A
1204,1 (47,4)
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 485)
B
80,5 (3,2)
Specifications for towbar* (p. 479)
C
875 (34,4)
Driving with a trailer (p. 482)
D
437,5 (17,2)
E
See the image above
F
286,2 (11,3)
G
Ball centre
Related information
•
•
Towbar* (p. 478)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 660)
* Option/accessory. 479
STARTING AND DRIVING
Extendable and retractable towbar*
1.
2.
The extendable/retractable towbar is always
easily accessible and simple to extend or retract
as needed. In the retracted position, the towbar
is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towbar carefully.
Extending the towbar
WARNING
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
centre behind the car when extending the
towing hitch.
Open the tailgate. A button for extending/
retracting the towbar is located on the righthand side at the rear of the cargo area. An
indicator lamp in the button must illuminate
with a constant orange glow for the extension function to be active.
Press and release the button - extension
might not start if the button is pressed for too
long.
> The towbar extends out and down in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
flashes orange.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towbar.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension procedure before it can then be moved to locked
position. This procedure may take several
seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked
position, wait a few seconds and try again.
480
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Retracting the towbar
3.
2.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in
the electrical socket when retracting the towbar.
1.
Move the towbar to its end position, where it
is secured and locked in place - the indicator
lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow.
> The towbar is ready for use.
Open the tailgate. Press and release the button on the right-hand side at the rear of the
cargo area - retraction might not start if the
button is pressed for too long.
> The towbar automatically lowers in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp in
the button flashes orange.
Lock the towbar by moving it back to its
retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with
a constant glow if the towbar is correctly
retracted.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
NOTE
Power save mode activates after a while and
the indicator lamp goes out. The system is
reactivated by closing and opening the tailgate. This applies when retracting or extending the towbar.
If the car detects a connected trailer electrically, the indicator lamp stops illuminating
with a constant glow.
Related information
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 482)
Towbar* (p. 478)
* Option/accessory. 481
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of
points that are important to think about regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is
positioned in the trailer.
•
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
The maximum indicated trailer weight only
applies to heights up to 1000 metres above
sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the
engine output and the vehicle's climbing ability are reduced due to the reduced air density, and the maximum trailer load must
therefore be reduced. The weight of the car
and trailer must be decreased by 10% for
each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part
thereof).
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment
for towing a trailer.
•
The car's towbar must be of an approved
type.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towbar complies with the
specified maximum towball load. Towball load
is calculated as part of the car's payload.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load.
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km (620 miles).
•
482
The brakes are loaded much more than usual
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift
to a lower gear when shifting manually and
adjust your speed.
Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel quality are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector
An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a
13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make
sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
Trailer weights
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations can further limit trailer weights
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
Level control*
The car's system for level control endeavours to
maintain a constant height regardless of load (up
to the maximum permissible weight). When the
car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When driving in hilly terrain and hot
climates
Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk
of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine
and drive system overheats, a warning symbol
comes on in the driver display together with a
message.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear
related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2.
Activate the parking brake.
3.
Select gear position P.
4.
Release the brake pedal.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car
with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2.
Select gear position D.
3.
Releasing the parking brake.
4.
Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Trailer stability assist* (p. 483)
Checking trailer lamps (p. 484)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 660)
Overheating in the engine and drive system
(p. 476)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 665)
Trailer stability assist*
The function of trailer stability assist (TSA25) is
to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations
where they begin snaking. The function is
included in the stability system ESC26.
Reasons for snaking
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
Trailer stability assist function
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
}}
* Option/accessory. 483
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and engine
power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is
stable once again, the system stops regulating
and the driver once again has full control of the
car.
Related information
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 482)
Electronic stability control (p. 283)
Checking trailer lamps
When connecting a trailer - check that all the
trailer lamps work before departure.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators
or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display
shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on
the trailer must be checked manually by the
driver before setting off.
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
ESC via the menu system in the centre display.
Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the
driver uses severe steering wheel movements to
try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the system cannot determine whether it is
the trailer or the driver causing the snaking.
When trailer stability assist is
operating, the ESC symbol
flashes in the driver display.
25
26
484
Trailer Stability Assist
Electronic Stability Control
Symbol
Message
• Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
•
Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
• Trailer brake light Malfunction
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is
broken, the driver display symbol for direction
indicators will also flash more quickly than normal.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Rear fog lamp on trailer
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear
fog lamp to travel safely.
Checking trailer lamps*
Automatic checking
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possible to check that the trailer lamps are working via
an automatic lamp activation. The function helps
the driver check that the trailer lamps are working
before starting off.
The engine must be switched off to perform the
check.
1.
2.
5.
After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash
again.
> The check is complete.
Switching off automatic checking
The automatic checking function can be switched
off in the centre display.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
Lights and Lighting.
Manual checking
If the automatic checking is switched off then it is
possible to start the check manually.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car
3.
Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> The lamp check starts.
Related information
3.
Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4.
Visually check that all lamps available on the
trailer are operational.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the
bicycle rack.
•
Bicycle rack including load must weigh a
maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).
•
The bicycle rack may be designed for a maximum of three bicycles.
WARNING
Lights and Lighting.
When a trailer is connected to the towbar,
the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver display.
•
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that
Volvo has developed are recommended.
Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
check lamp functionality.
Driving with a trailer (p. 482)
Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause
damage to the towbar and car.
The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if
it:
•
•
is incorrectly fitted on the towball
•
is used for carrying something other than
bicycles.
is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's
instructions for maximum load weight
}}
* Option/accessory. 485
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
The car's driving characteristics are affected
when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For
example, due to:
•
•
•
•
increased weight
reduced acceleration capacity
reduced ground clearance
changed braking capacity.
Recommendations for loading bicycles
on the bicycle rack
The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load
on the towbar.
ity and increase fuel consumption. It may also
lead to an increased load on the towbar.
Related information
•
Towbar* (p. 478)
Towing
During towing, the car is towed by another vehicle by means of a towline.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before the towing begins.
Preparations and towing
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
Load according to the following recommendations:
•
Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest to
the car.
•
Keep the load symmetrical and as close to
the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by
loading the bicycles facing alternately if several bicycles are loaded.
•
Remove loose objects from the bicycle for
transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery,
child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the
towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce
the wind resistance, which affects fuel consumption.
•
486
Do not tow cars with automatic transmission at speeds higher than 80 km/h
(50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
km (50 miles).
WARNING
•
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
•
Ignition position II must be active - in
ignition position I all airbags are deactivated.
•
Always keep the remote control key in the
car when it is being towed.
Do not use protective covers on the bicycles.
This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibil-
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is
considerably heavier than normal.
1.
Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
2.
Secure the towline in the towing eye.
3.
Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the
car.
4.
5.
Put the car in the ignition position II - turn
the start knob clockwise without pressing the
brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with
manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
Move the gear selector to neutral position
and release the parking brake.
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a
donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.
> The towing vehicle can now start towing.
6.
Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
avoiding unnecessary jerking.
7.
Be prepared to brake to stop.
Jump starting
Fitting and removing the towing eye
Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
and the engine does not start.
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is
screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover
on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or
rear.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 487)
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is
no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Fitting the towing eye
Hazard warning flashers (p. 156)
Recovery (p. 489)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 477)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 429)
Take out the towing eye from the foam block
under the floor in the cargo area.
}}
487
STARTING AND DRIVING
4.
||
Front: Remove the cover - press on the
marking with a finger.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
488
Rear: Remove the cover - press on the marking with a finger and, at the same time, fold
out the opposite side/corner using a coin or
similar.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in until it stops.
Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread
through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as
a lever.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Points to remember before using the towing
eye
• The towing eye may be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible.
•
•
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is
too steep, or if the ground clearance under
the car is inadequate, then the car may be
damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye.
If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the
towing eye.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
Removing the towing eye
–
Unscrew and remove the towing eye after
use and return it to its place in the foam
block.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
Related information
•
•
•
Towing (p. 486)
Recovery (p. 489)
Tool kit (p. 565)
Recovery
For recovery, the car is taken away with the help
of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is
equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised. Deactivating the
function via the centre display.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press My Car
Suspension.
3.
Select Disable Leveling Control.
Parking Brake and
The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance
under the car is inadequate, then the car may be
damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should
then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting
device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
}}
* Option/accessory. 489
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported
with the wheels rolling forward.
HomeLink®*27
HomeLink®28
is a programmable remote control,
integrated in the car's electrical system, which
can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor and indoor lighting) and thereby replace
the remote controls for them.
General
For more information about HomeLink®, visit
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)29.
Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when changing to another car or
for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is
deleted when the car is sold.
Related information
•
HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior
rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of
three programmable buttons and one indicator
lamp in the mirror glass.
Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 487)
Related information
•
•
•
Using HomeLink®* (p. 493)
Programming HomeLink®* (p. 491)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 493)
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator lamp
27
28
29
490
Applies to certain markets.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Programming HomeLink®*30
1.
Follow these instructions to program
HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram
individual buttons.
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position" before
HomeLink® can be programmed or used. If
possible, fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink® for
faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal. The HomeLink® buttons should be reset before programming.
Aim the remote control towards the
HomeLink® button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches)
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator
lamp on HomeLink®.
Note: The ability of some remote controls to
program HomeLink® is improved at a distance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12
inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter
problems during programming.
2.
Press and hold depressed both the button
on the remote control and the button to be
reprogrammed on HomeLink®.
3.
Do not release the buttons until the indicator
lamp has switched from flashing slowly
(approx. once per second) to either flashing
quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illuminating with a constant glow.
> If it illuminates with a constant glow:
Indication that the programming has finished. Press the programmed button
twice to activate.
If it flashes quickly: The device to be
programmed to HomeLink® may have a
security function that requires extra steps.
Test by pressing the programmed button
twice to see whether the programming is
working. Otherwise, continue with the following steps.
WARNING
While programming HomeLink®, the garage
door or gate being programmed may activate.
For this reason, make sure that nobody is in
the vicinity of the door or gate while programming is in progress. The car should be outside
the garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
30
Applies to certain markets.
}}
* Option/accessory. 491
STARTING AND DRIVING
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
toll number +49 6838 907 277)32.
||
Reprogramming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button,
proceed as follows:
4.
Locate programming button31 on the
receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
5.
Depress and release the receiver's programming button once. The programming must be
completed within 30 seconds of the button
being depressed.
6.
Press and release the button on HomeLink®
that you want to program. Repeat the
sequence of pressing/holding/releasing a
second time and, depending on the receiver
model, even a third time.
> Programming is now be complete and the
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed button is depressed.
1.
Press the desired button and hold it
depressed for approx. 20 seconds.
2.
Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink®
starts to flash slowly, programming can continue as normal.
492
•
•
•
Using HomeLink®* (p. 493)
HomeLink®* (p. 490)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 493)
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will
resume the previously saved programming.
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink®
buttons at the same time, not each button individually. Individual buttons can only be reprogrammed.
–
In the event of programming problems, contact
HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com,
31
32
Related information
Press and hold depressed the outer buttons
(1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx. 10 seconds.
> When the indicator lamp changes over
from a constant glow to starting to flash,
the buttons are reset and ready to be
reprogrammed.
Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers.
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Using HomeLink®*33
HomeLink®
When
is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button. The garage
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
(may take a few seconds). If the button is
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the
reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illuminates or flashes when the button has been
depressed. Naturally the original remote controls
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if
required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink® will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
WARNING
33
34
Related information
•
•
•
HomeLink®* (p. 490)
Programming HomeLink®* (p. 491)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 493)
Type approval for HomeLink®*34
Type approval for EU
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that
HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the
Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelength within which the radio equipment
functions:
•
•
•
•
•
433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation,
600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464,
USA
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
HomeLink®* (p. 490)
HomeLink®
•
If
is used to control a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near
the door or gate while it is in motion.
•
Do not use HomeLink® for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 493
STARTING AND DRIVING
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing.
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing.
Activating and deactivating the
compass
The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started.
Calibrating the compass*
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
compass should be calibrated if the car is
moved between several magnetic zones.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1.
Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2.
Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
–
Depress the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
Related information
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown by
their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
•
•
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off.
Compass* (p. 494)
Calibrating the compass* (p. 494)
3.
Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds
(use a paper clip, for example). The number
for the current magnetic zone is shown.
Related information
494
•
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 494)
•
Calibrating the compass* (p. 494)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
7.
Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the
heated windscreen is activated, perform the
calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated.
8.
Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
•
•
Compass* (p. 494)
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 494)
Magnetic zones.
4.
Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the compass.
5.
Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6.
Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further
2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
* Option/accessory. 495
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet
Related information
The audio and media system consists of media
player and radio. You can also connect a phone
via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play
music wirelessly in the car. When the car is connected to the Internet you can also use apps for
media playback.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media player (p. 509)
Radio (p. 503)
Phone (p. 525)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Apps (p. 500)
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Driver distraction (p. 39)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 599)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 542)
Audio settings
The audio system is preset for optimum sound
reproduction, but it can also be adapted.
The volume is normally adjusted with the volume
control below the centre display or with the righthand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for
example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing
phone calls and active traffic messages.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing. This calibration takes into account
loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combination of car model and audio system. There is
also a dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Overview of audio and media
Personal preferences
Control the functions with your voice, steering
wheel keypad or the centre display. The number
of speakers and amplifiers depends on which
audio system the car is equipped with.
Various settings are available in the top view
under Settings Sound depending on the
car's audio system.
System updating
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible to download system updates for
optimal functionality, see support.volvocars.com.
498
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
Related information
• Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
•
•
•
•
•
•
etc.
• Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/rear
loudspeakers.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
High Performance Pro* (Harman
Kardon)
• Equalizer – equalizer setting.
• Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/rear
loudspeakers.
Sound experience* (p. 499)
Media player (p. 509)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 142)
Settings for phone (p. 533)
Sound, media and Internet (p. 498)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Sound experience*
Sound experience is an app that provides
access to further audio settings.
Sound Experience is opened from the app view
in the centre display. The following settings can
be defined, depending on the audio system fitted
to the car:
Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins)
• Studio - the sound can be optimised for
Driver, All and Rear.
•
Individual stage - surround sound mode
with settings for intensity and enclosure.
• Concert hall - reproduces the acoustics
from Gothenburg's Concert Hall.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
High Performance
• Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
• Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/rear
loudspeakers.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert Hall.
}}
* Option/accessory. 499
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
High Performance Pro* (Harman
Kardon)
• Seat Optimisation - the sound can be optimised for Driver, All and Rear.
• Surround - surround sound mode with level
settings.
• Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
Apps
The app view contains applications (apps) that
give access to certain of the car's services.
Swipe from right to left1 across the centre display's screen in order to access the app view
from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
functions, such as FM radio, are found here.
Related information
•
•
Audio settings (p. 498)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and
model)
Some basic apps are always available. More apps
such as web radio and music services can be
downloaded when the car is connected to the
Internet.
Certain apps are only available for use if the car
is connected to the Internet.
1
500
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Start an app by pressing the app in the centre
display's app view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps
Downloading apps (p. 501)
Updating apps (p. 502)
Deleting apps (p. 502)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Android Auto* (p. 523)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
NOTE
Tap on the row for an app in order to expand
in the list and get more information about the
app.
4.
Select Install in order to start the download
and installation of the desired app.
> The status of the download and installation is shown while it is in progress.
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
Storage space on hard disk (p. 541)
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 540)
3.
New apps can be downloaded when the car is
connected to the Internet.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
attention to the data traffic costs.
1.
2.
Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
Select New apps in order to open a list of
apps that are available but not installed in
the car.
A message is shown if a download cannot
be started for the moment. The app will
remain in the list and it is possible to try to
start a download again.
Cancelling the download
– Tap on Abort to cancel a download in progress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled.
Related information
Apps (p. 500)
•
•
•
•
•
Deleting apps (p. 502)
•
Storage space on hard disk (p. 541)
Updating apps (p. 502)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 599)
* Option/accessory. 501
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Updating apps
The apps can be updated when the car is connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
attention to the data traffic costs.
If an app is being used during an ongoing update,
it will be restarted in order for the installation to
be completed.
Update all
1. Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
2.
Select Install all.
> Updating is started.
Update some
1. Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
2.
Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3.
Locate the desired app and select Install.
> Updating is started.
Deleting apps
Apps can be uninstalled when the car is connected to the Internet.
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
1.
Open the Download Centre app in the app
view.
Deleting apps (p. 502)
2.
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 599)
Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3.
Locate the desired app and select Uninstall
in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it disappears from the list.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Apps (p. 500)
Downloading apps (p. 501)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
502
Apps (p. 500)
Downloading apps (p. 501)
Updating apps (p. 502)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 599)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Radio
It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands
and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is
online, it is also possible to listen to Internet
radio.
•
•
•
•
•
Digital radio* (p. 508)
Start radio
RDS radio (p. 507)
The radio is started from the centre display app
view.
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
1.
Open the required frequency band (e.g. FM)
from the app view.
2.
Select a radio station.
Media player (p. 509)
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Start radio (p. 503)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 504)
Setting radio favourites (p. 505)
Settings for radio (p. 506)
Related information
•
•
Radio (p. 503)
Searching for radio stations (p. 505)
}}
* Option/accessory. 503
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 504)
Changing radio band and radio
station
2.
Select playback from Stations, Favourites,
Genres or Ensembles2.
•
•
•
Setting radio favourites (p. 505)
There are instructions here for changing the
radio band, the list in the radio band and the
radio station in the selected list.
3.
Tap on the desired station from the list.
Settings for radio (p. 506)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Changing radio band
Swipe to show the app view in the centre display
and select the preferred radio band (e.g. FM), or
open the driver display's app menu using the
right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and
make your selection from there.
Changing lists within the frequency
band
Favourites - only plays back selected favourite
channels.
Genres — only plays back channels broadcasting the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop
or classical.
Changing stations within the selected
list
–
Press on
or
under the centre display or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change radio station in the selected
list via the centre display.
Related information
1.
2
504
Press Library.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 503)
Searching for radio stations (p. 505)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Setting radio favourites (p. 505)
Settings for radio (p. 506)
Application menu in driver display (p. 97)
Only applies to digital radio (DAB*).
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Searching for radio stations
Manual tuning
The radio automatically compiles a station list of
the radio stations within the area that are transmitting the strongest signals.
Setting radio favourites
It is possible to add a radio channel to the
Radio favourites app and the favourites list for
the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to
add and remove favourites can be found below.
Radio Favourites
Radio Favourites shows saved
favourites from all frequency
bands.
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no
longer changes frequency automatically when
reception is poor.
The parameters you can search on depend on
the frequency band selected:
–
AM — station and frequency.
•
•
•
FM — station, genre and frequency.
1.
Press Library.
2.
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
3.
Enter the search terms.
> Searching takes place with each input of
a character and the search results are
shown by category.
DAB* - ensembles and stations.
Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
or
. With a long press, the
press
search jumps to the next available station in
the frequency band. It is also possible to use
the right keypad on the steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 503)
Start radio (p. 503)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 504)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Settings for radio (p. 506)
1.
Open the app Radio favourites from the
app view.
2.
Tap on the desired station in the list to start
listening.
Adding and removing radio favourites
–
Tap on
to add or remove a channel to or
from frequency band favourites and Radio
Favourites.
When a favourite is saved from a station list, the
radio will automatically search for the best frequency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual
station search, the radio does not automatically
change to a stronger frequency.
When you remove a favourite, it will also be
removed from frequency band favourites.
}}
* Option/accessory. 505
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 503)
Settings for radio
Start radio (p. 503)
There are various radio functions to activate and
deactivate.
Searching for radio stations (p. 505)
Cancelling traffic messages
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 504)
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
temporarily interrupted by tapping on
in the
right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping
on Cancel in the centre display.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Settings for radio (p. 506)
Application menu in driver display (p. 97)
Activating and deactivating radio
functions
Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band to view available functions.
AM/FM Radio
• Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on programme content, artists,
etc.
• Freeze Program Name: select to stop the
programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds.
• Select Announcements:
- Local Interruptions: interrupts the current
media playback and broadcasts information
about traffic disruptions in the neighbourhood. Playback of previous media source is
resumed when the message is finished. The
Local Interruptions function is a geographically restricted version of the Traffic
Announcements function. The Traffic
506
Announcements function must be activated at the same time.
- News : interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts news. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the
news broadcast is finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is finished.
- Traffic Announcements: interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions. Playback of
previous media source is resumed when the
message is finished.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
source is resumed when the message is finished.
DAB* (digital radio)
• Sort Services: option for how channels will
be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service
number.
- Traffic Flash: receives information about
traffic disruptions.
• DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function
- News Flash: receives news.
for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio
channel is lost, another channel is found
automatically in another channel group
(ensemble).
- Transport Flash: receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
timetables.
- Warning/Services: receives information
about incidents of lower significance than
the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
• DAB To FM Handover: starts the function
for linking between DAB and FM. If reception
of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM
frequency is searched for automatically.
• Show Broadcast Information: select to
show radio text or selected types of radio
text, e.g. artist.
• Show Program Related Images: select
whether or not to show images for programmes on the screen.
• Select Announcements: select the types
of messages to be received while DAB is
playing. Selected messages will interrupt the
current media playback to play back the
message. Playback of previous media source
is resumed when the message is finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
RDS radio
RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio
automatically changes to the strongest transmitter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic
information and to search for certain programme
types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM
transmitter in such a network sends information
that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
•
Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter
if reception in the area is poor.
•
Search for programme category, e.g. programme types or traffic information.
•
Receive text information on current radio
programme.
Related information
•
•
•
Radio (p. 503)
Digital radio* (p. 508)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 118)
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the
radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player* is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to
the previous audio source and volume when the
set programme type is no longer broadcast. To
go back earlier, press
on the right-hand
steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the centre display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 507
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Related information
•
•
Radio (p. 503)
Settings for radio (p. 506)
Digital radio*
(DAB3)
Digital radio
is a digital broadcasting
system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB
+ and DMB4.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in the
centre display.
DAB subchannel
Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain
e.g. translations of the main programme into
other languages. Subchannels are indicated with
an arrow symbol in the channel list.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Link between FM and digital radio* (p. 509)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 504)
Searching for radio stations (p. 505)
Setting radio favourites (p. 505)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Settings for radio (p. 506)
Digital radio is played back in the same way as
other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the
option to select playback from Stations,
Favourites and Genres, there is also the option
to select playback from subchannels and
Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same
frequency.
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside
the station name (download time varies).
3
4
508
Digital Audio Broadcasting
Digital Multimedia Broadcasting
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Link between FM and digital radio*
Media player
Related information
The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to
switch from a channel with poor or no reception
to the same channel in another channel group
(ensemble) with better reception, within DAB
and/or between DAB and FM.
The media player can play back audio from the
CD player* and from external audio sources connected via the USB port or Bluetooth. It can also
play back video format via the USB port.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Media
3.
Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or
DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/
deactivate the respective functions.
When the car is connected to the internet, it is
also possible to listen to web radio, audio books
and music services via apps.
DAB.
Media playback (p. 510)
Controlling and changing media (p. 511)
Searching media (p. 512)
Apps (p. 500)
Radio (p. 503)
CD player* (p. 513)
Video (p. 514)
Media via Bluetooth® (p. 515)
Media via USB port (p. 516)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Related information
•
•
•
Digital radio* (p. 508)
Radio (p. 503)
Settings for radio (p. 506)
The media player is operated
from the centre display, but
several functions can be operated using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad or voice control.
The radio is operated in the media player and is
described in a separate section.
* Option/accessory. 509
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Media playback
The media player is controlled from the centre
display. Several functions can also be operated
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or
voice control.
The media player also operates the radio, which
is described in a separate section.
Starting the media source
CD*
1. Insert a CD.
Bluetooth connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2.
Open the app CD from the app view.
2.
Connect media source.
3.
Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
3.
Start playback from the connected media
source.
USB memory
1. Insert the USB memory.
4.
Open the app Bluetooth from the app view.
> Playback begins.
2.
Open the app USB from the app view.
3.
Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
Media with Internet connection
Play back media from Internet-connected apps:
Mp3 player and
iPod®
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app
(not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and
model.)
510
1.
Connect media source.
2.
Start playback from the connected media
source.
3.
Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
1.
Connect the car to the Internet.
2.
Open the current app from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Read the separate section on how apps are
downloaded.
Video
1. Connect media source.
2.
Open the app USB from the app view.
3.
Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate section.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Related information
•
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 98)
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 503)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controlling and changing media (p. 511)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 516)
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 515)
Controlling and changing media
The playback of media can be controlled with
voice control, steering wheel keypad or the centre display.
Change track/song - tap on the desired track in
the centre display, press on
or
under
the centre display or on the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
The media player can be operated by voice recognition, from
the steering wheel keypad or
the centre display.
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis
in the centre display and drag sideways, or press
and hold
or
under the centre display or
on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Changing media - select from previous sources
in the app, in the app view, press on the desired
app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad via the app menu
.
Downloading apps (p. 501)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Video (p. 514)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library.
Android Auto* (p. 523)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Compatible media formats (p. 517)
Shuffle - tap on the button to
shuffle the playback order.
Volume - turn the control knob under the centre
display or press
on the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad in order to increase or
decrease the volume.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the
song being played back, the physical button
on the steering
under the centre display or
wheel's right-hand keypad.
}}
* Option/accessory. 511
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Similar - tap on the button in
order to use Gracenote to
search for similar music on the
USB device and to create a
playlist from it. The playlist can
contain a maximum of 50
songs.
||
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer, song
titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and,
when the car is connected to the Internet, podcasts (digital media via Internet).
•
•
Media playback (p. 510)
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 123)
Change device - tap on the
button in order to switch
between USB devices when
several are connected.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media player (p. 509)
Searching media (p. 512)
Audio settings (p. 498)
Apps (p. 500)
Gracenote® (p. 513)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
1.
.
Press
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
2.
Enter the search terms.
3.
Press Search.
> Connected devices are searched and the
search results are listed by category.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show each
category separately.
Related information
•
•
512
Media player (p. 509)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Gracenote®
Related information
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles
and associated images, which are shown during
playback.
•
•
Media playback (p. 510)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 542)
CD player*
The media player can play back CD discs with
compatible audio files.
Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Media
3.
Select settings for Gracenote data:
Gracenote®.
• Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
• Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
Disc insert and eject slot.
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
Disc eject button.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
Related information
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
•
•
•
• None - no results are shown.
Media playback (p. 510)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
Compatible media formats (p. 517)
Updating Gracenote
The content of the Gracenote database is updated continuously. Download the latest update for
optimal functionality. For information and download, see support.volvocars.com.
* Option/accessory. 513
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Video
Playing a video
Playing back DivX®
Videos on USB-connected devices can be
played back using the media player.
Videos are played using the USB app in the app
view.
No picture is shown when the car starts to move,
but only the audio is played back. The picture is
shown again when the car is stationary.
1.
Connecting a media source (USB device).
This DivX Certified® device must be registered in
order to play back purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) films.
2.
Open the app USB from the app view.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
3.
Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
2.
Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
registration code.
3.
Go to vod.divx.com for more information and
to complete the registration.
Information on compatible formats for media can
be found in a separate section.
Related information
•
•
•
•
514
Playing a video (p. 514)
Playing back DivX® (p. 514)
Settings for video (p. 515)
Compatible media formats (p. 517)
Related information
•
•
•
•
Video (p. 514)
Playing back DivX® (p. 514)
Settings for video (p. 515)
Compatible media formats (p. 517)
Related information
•
•
•
•
Video (p. 514)
Playing a video (p. 514)
Settings for video (p. 515)
Compatible media formats (p. 517)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for video
Media via Bluetooth®
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
It is possible to change certain video playback
settings, e.g. language.
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files
from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile
phones and tablets.
Connect a Bluetooth® device to the car for wireless playback of media and to provide the car
with an Internet connection where possible.
With the video player in full screen mode, or by
opening the top view and pressing Settings
Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio
Language, Off and Subtitle Language.
Related information
•
Video (p. 514)
For the media player to be able to play back
audio files wirelessly from an external device, the
device must first be connected to the car via
Bluetooth.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 515)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
•
•
Media playback (p. 510)
Compatible media formats (p. 517)
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are
fully compatible with the car. For compatibility,
see support.volvocars.com.
The procedure for connecting a media device is
the same as for connecting a phone to the car
via Bluetooth®.
Related information
•
•
•
Media via Bluetooth® (p. 515)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
Media playback (p. 510)
515
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Media via USB port
Connecting a device via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system via
the car's USB port.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system via
one of the car's USB ports.
Devices with rechargeable batteries are
recharged when connected via USB and the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is running.
The phone must be connected to the USB port
with white frame (when there are two USB ports)
when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.
•
•
Media player (p. 509)
•
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 517)
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 517)
Android Auto* (p. 523)
The content of the external source can be loaded
more quickly if it only consists of compatible formats. Video files can also be played back via the
USB port.
Certain MP3 players have their own file system
that the car does not support.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 516)
Media playback (p. 510)
Video (p. 514)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 517)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Android Auto* (p. 523)
USB inputs (type A) in the tunnel console. Allow the
cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped when the
lid is closed.
V90CC Volvo Ocean Race also has USB inputs
(type A) for charging5 on the rear of the tunnel
console and in the cargo area.
Related information
•
•
5
516
Media playback (p. 510)
Media via USB port (p. 516)
It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via these inputs. Charging may be restricted during certain use.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Technical specifications for USB
devices
The following specifications must be met to
allow the contents of the USB devices to be
read.
No folder structure will be shown in the centre
display during playback.
Compatible media formats
Format
File extension
The following file formats must be used for
media playback.
AVI
.avi
Audio files
AVI (DivX)
.avi, .divx
ASF
.asf, .wmv
MKV
.mkv
Format
File extension
Codec
MP3
.mp3
MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
Max number
Files
15 000
Folders
1 000
Folder levels
8
Playlists
100
Items in a playlist
1 000
Subfolders
No limit
Technical specification for USB A
connector
•
•
•
•
Type A socket
Version 2.0
Voltage supply 5 V
Current supply max. 2.1 A
Related information
•
Media via USB port (p. 516)
AAC
.m4a, .m4b, .aac
AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio),
HE-AAC (aacPlus
v1/v2)
WMA
.wma
WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV
.wav
LPCM
FLAC
.flac
FLAC
Subtitles
Format
File extension
SubViewer
.sub
SubRip
.srt
SSA
.ssa
Video files
Format
File extension
MP4
.mp4, .m4v
MPEG-PS
.mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
}}
517
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
DivX®
DivX certified devices have been tested for highquality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
DivX films.
6
518
Profile
DivX Home Theater
Video codec
DivX, MPEG-4
Resolution
720x576
Bit rate
4.8Mbps
Frame rate
30 fps
File extension
.divx, .avi
Max file size
4 GB
Audio codec
MP3, AC3
Subtitles
XSUB
Special functions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference
Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more
information and software
tools to convert your files
into DivX Home Theater
video.
Related information
•
•
•
Media player (p. 509)
Video (p. 514)
Playing back DivX® (p. 514)
TV*6
No images are shown once the car reaches a
certain speed but the sound will be heard the
whole time. The picture returns once more when
the car is almost or completely stationary.
The TV is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be controlled from the
right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice
recognition.
Related information
•
•
Using the TV* (p. 519)
Settings for TV* (p. 519)
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Using the TV*7
The TV is started from the app view. Tap on the
TV app and select a channel.
The TV automatically searches for the channels
with best reception.
TV guide
A programme guide is available with information
about TV programmes for up to 48 hours.
–
Change the list of visible channels
1. Press Library
2.
Select playback from TV-channels or
Favourites.
3.
Select the desired channel.
Change channel from selected list
– Press on
or
under the centre display or on the steering wheel keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist
You can also change stations from the centre
display.
Favourites
A TV channel can be saved as a favourite:
–
7
8
Tap on
in order to add/remove a channel to/from the favourites list.
Tap on Guide to show information about TV
programmes.
NOTE
If the car is moved within the country, e.g.
from city to city, it is not certain that
Favourites are available since the frequency
may have changed.
The option to make certain settings is available
in the top view or when the TV is in full screen
mode.
With the TV in full screen mode, or by opening
the top view and pressing Settings Media
TV, the following can be adjusted:
• Subtitle Language
• Audio Language
Pict. format
TV* (p. 518)
Tapping on Picture format enables you to
choose which format the TV picture should be
shown in.
Settings for TV* (p. 519)
1.
Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image
format being transmitted.
2.
Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised without cropping.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Settings for TV*8
Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 542)
Related information
•
•
•
•
TV* (p. 518)
Using the TV* (p. 519)
Compatible media formats (p. 517)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory. 519
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Apple® CarPlay®*
CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music,
make phone calls, get directions, send/receive
messages and use Siri, all while you stay
focused on your driving.
CarPlay works with selected
Apple devices. If the car does
not already support CarPlay
there is the option to install it
retroactively. Contact a Volvo
retailer to install CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on
Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/.
Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay
may sometimes mean that the connection
between an iPhone and the car is broken. Please
note that Volvo is not responsible for the content
in CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay, there is
no guidance in the driver display or head-up display, but only in the centre display.
The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the centre display, phone or using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions).
The apps can also be voice-controlled using Siri.
A long press on the steering wheel button
starts voice control using Siri and a short press
9
520
activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks
9
off too early, hold the steering wheel button
depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to your
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be activated in your phone. The phone must also have
an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile
network.
Connect an iPhone and start CarPlay
NOTE
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
deactivated. A phone or media player connected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore
not be available when CarPlay is active. An
alternative Internet source must be used to
connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use
Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.
1.
Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2.
Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on OK.
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
3.
Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
4.
Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on Accept to connect.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
5.
Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Starting CarPlay
CarPlay is started according to the following after
an iPhone has been connected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a phone
(Wi-Fi) (p. 536)
CarPlay to iPod
1. Press Settings in the top view.
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 536)
•
Voice recognition (p. 139)
2.
Continue to Communication
CarPlay.
3.
Untick the box for the Apple device that shall
no longer start CarPlay automatically when
the USB cable is connected.
4.
Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port.
Tap on the phone name - the tile with
CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are
shown.
5.
Open the app iPod from the app view.
If the subview with CarPlay is not opened, tap
on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
2.
Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on OK.
3.
Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown10.
Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the phone is
shown.
Apple
iPod to CarPlay
1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
CarPlay runs in the background if another app is
started in the same subview. To show CarPlay in
the subview again - tap on the CarPlay icon in
the app view.
10
Switch the connection between CarPlay
and iPod
Related information
•
•
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 516)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 522)
Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory. 521
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®*
Related information
Settings for Apple device connected with
CarPlay11.
•
•
•
Automatic start
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Continue to Communication
CarPlay and select setting:
Apple
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay®.
•
Update your iPhone with the latest version of
iOS operating system and ensure that the
apps have been updated.
•
In the event of a problem with CarPlay, disconnect the telephone from the USB port
and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the
app on the telephone that is not working and
then restart the app, or try closing all apps
and restart your phone.
•
Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
•
Untick the box - CarPlay does not start
automatically when the USB cable is connected.
•
A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimising and
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
•
Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the phone and the car is
broken. Information about supported apps
and compatible telephone models can be
found on Apple's website. You can also
search for CarPlay in the App Store to find
information about apps that are compatible
with CarPlay on your market.
•
CarPlay only works with iPhone12.
To delete the list, the settings must be reset in
the centre display (factory reset).
System volumes
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
• Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
11
12
522
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
NOTE
Availability and functionality may vary depending on market.
Related information
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
Android Auto*
NOTE
Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions and use
car-adapted apps from an Android device.
Android Auto works with selected Android devices.
When a phone is connected to Android Auto
it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to
another media player. Bluetooth is active
while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto
there is no guidance in the driver display or headup display, but only in the centre display.
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre
display using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. A long press on the steering
starts voice recognition control
wheel button
and a short press deactivates.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on the
website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party
apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is
not responsible for the content in Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view. After
Android Auto has been started once, the app will
be started automatically the next time the device
is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated
under settings.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for
Android Auto or its features or applications.
When you use Android Auto, your car
transfers certain information (including its
location) to your connected Android phone.
You are fully responsible for your and any
other person’s use of Android Auto.
Related information
•
•
Using Android Auto* (p. 524)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 524)
* Option/accessory. 523
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Using Android Auto*
3.
To use the Android Auto app, the app must be
installed on your phone and the phone must be
connected to the car's USB input.
The first time an Android is connected
1. Connect your Android phone to the USB
input with a white frame.
2.
Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on OK.
3.
Tap on Android Auto in the app view.
4.
Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on Accept to connect.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
5.
Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Previously connected Android
1. Connect the phone to the USB port.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the phone is
shown.
2.
524
Tap on the phone name - the tile with
Android Auto is opened and compatible apps
are shown.
4.
If the setting for automatic start is not
selected - open the Android Auto app from
the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Settings for Android Auto*
Settings for a phone that has been connected
the first time with Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Communication
and select setting:
Android Auto runs in the background if another
app is started in the same subview. To show
Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the
Android Auto icon in the app view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 523)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 524)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 516)
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Android Auto
•
Tick the box - Android Auto starts automatically when the USB cable is connected.
•
Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset has to be executed in order to
clear the list.
System volumes
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
• Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Tips for using Android Auto*
Phone
Using Android Auto* (p. 524)
Here are some useful tips for using Android
Auto.
A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free system.
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
•
•
Ensure that your apps are updated.
The audio and media system acts as hands-free,
with the facility to remotely control a selection of
the phone's functions. The phone can still be
operated with its own keys even if it is connected
to the car.
Related information
•
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 523)
When starting the car, wait until the centre
display has started, connect the telephone
and then open Android Auto from the app
view.
•
In the event of problems with Android Auto,
disconnect your Android phone from the
USB port and then reconnect via USB. Otherwise, try closing the app on the phone and
then restarting the app.
•
When a telephone is connected to Android
Auto it is still possible to playback media via
Bluetooth to another media player. The
Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto
is used.
When a phone has been connected online and
connected with the car, it can be used make
calls, send/receive messages, play back media
wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection.
The phone is operated from the centre display,
but also via voice recognition and the app menu,
which are accessed from the right-hand steering
wheel keypad.
Related information
•
Android Auto* (p. 523)
}}
* Option/accessory. 525
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Overview
Microphone.
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 528)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 529)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 529)
Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to
then be able to make calls from the car, send/
receive messages, play back media wirelessly
and connect the car to the Internet.
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 529)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 530)
•
•
•
Settings for phone (p. 533)
Phone.
Phone operation from centre display.
Keypad for operating phone functions that
are shown in the driver display and voice recognition.
Driver display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
526
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 139)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 98)
Audio settings (p. 498)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 535)
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected at once, in which case one of them can
only play back wirelessly. The most recently connected phone will automatically be connected to
make calls, send/receive messages, play back
media and provide an Internet connection. It is
possible to change what the phone is to be used
for under Bluetooth Devices via the settings
menu in the centre display's top view.
After the device has been connected/registered
a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be
visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth activated. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth
devices can be stored in the car.
There are two options for connecting. Either
search the phone from the car or search the car
from the phone.
Managing phone calls (p. 530)
Option 1 - search phone from car
Managing the phone book (p. 532)
1.
Managing text messages (p. 531)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
2.
Open the phone tile in the centre display.
•
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on Add phone.
Option 2 - search car from phone
1.
•
If there is a phone connected to the car,
. In the pop-up wintap on Change
dow, tap on Add phone.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The
list is updated as new devices are
detected.
•
3.
Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
4.
Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the phone. In which case,
choose to accept in both places.
5.
On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
•
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
•
Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
•
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on Add phone Make car
discoverable.
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on Change
. In the pop-up window, tap on Add phone Make car
discoverable.
2.
Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3.
Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
4.
Select the name of the car on the phone.
5.
A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
6.
Check that the specified number code in the
car matches the one shown in the external
device. In which case, choose to accept in
both places.
7.
NOTE
Open the phone tile in the centre display.
On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
•
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
•
Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then the connection may be broken. In which
case, delete the phone from the car and then
connect again.
Compatible phones
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 525)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 528)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 529)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 529)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 529)
}}
527
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
•
•
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 530)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 534)
It is possible to connect a phone to the car automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have
been connected to the car for the first time.
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 535)
•
Ignition positions (p. 428)
It is only the two last connected phones that can
be connected automatically.
1.
Activate Bluetooth in the phone before setting the car in ignition position I.
2.
Set the car in ignition position I or higher.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
•
•
528
Phone (p. 525)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 529)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 529)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 529)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 530)
•
•
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 534)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 535)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
Disconnecting a Bluetoothconnected phone
Switch between Bluetoothconnected phones
It is possible to connect a phone to the car manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been
connected to the car for the first time.
Disconnect a Bluetooth-connected phone from
the car by deactivating Bluetooth on your phone.
It is possible to switch between a number of
Bluetooth-connected phones.
When the phone is out of range of the car it is
automatically disconnected. If disconnection
occurs during an active call, then the call will be
continued on the phone.
1.
Open the tile for the phone.
2.
or drag down the top
Tap on Change
view and tap on Settings
Communication Bluetooth Devices
Add device.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
3.
Tap on the phone to be connected.
1.
Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
2.
Open the subview for phone.
> Connected phones are listed.
3.
Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
•
•
•
Phone (p. 525)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 528)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 529)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 529)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 530)
•
•
•
Related information
•
•
•
Phone (p. 525)
Settings for phone (p. 533)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 529)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 530)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 534)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 525)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 534)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 529)
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 530)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 534)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 535)
* Option/accessory. 529
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Removing devices connected to
Bluetooth
It is possible to remove phones from the list of
registered Bluetooth devices, for example.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Communication Bluetooth
Devices.
> Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.
3.
Tap on the device to be removed.
4.
Tap on Remove device and confirm your
selection.
> The device is no longer registered to the
car.
Related information
•
•
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone.
Generic illustration.
Phone (p. 525)
Making phone calls
1.
Open the subview for phone.
2.
Select call from: call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is
possible to search or browse in the contact
list. Tap on
in the contact list in order to
add a contact under Favourites.
3.
Press
4.
Tap on
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 529)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 529)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 534)
to make a call.
to end the call.
You can also make calls from the call log via the
app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad
.
530
1.
Press Add call.
2.
Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
3.
Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4.
Tap on Swap call to switch between the
parties.
to end the active call.
5. Tap on
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
•
Making multi-party calls
During a call:
1.
Tap on Join calls to merge the active multiparty call.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver display and the centre display. Manage the call on
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the
centre display.
1.
Tap on Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Private call
–
During the current call, press Privacy and
select setting:
• Switch to mobile phone - the handsfree function is disconnected and the call
continues on your mobile phone.
• Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched off
and the call continues with the car's
handsfree function.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 525)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
•
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 141)
•
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 98)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 123)
•
•
•
Managing the phone book (p. 532)
Managing text messages13
Message handling in the car for a Bluetoothconnected phone.
In some phones, the message function must be
activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such
cases, they cannot display contacts and messages in the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Managing text messages in the centre
display
Text messages are only shown in the centre display if the setting is selected.
Press Messages in the app
view to manage text messages
in the centre display.
Reading text messages in the centre display
Press the icon to get the message
read aloud.
Managing text messages (p. 531)
Audio settings (p. 498)
Sending text messages in the centre
display14
1. You can reply to a message or create a new
message.
Valid in certain markets only. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Reply to message — tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to, then
tap on Answer.
•
Create new message - tap on Create
new. Select a contact or enter a number.
2.
Compose the message.
3.
Press Send.
Managing text messages in the driver
display
Text messages are only shown in the driver display if the setting is selected.
Reading a new text message in the driver
display
– To have the message read aloud – select
Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message has been read out, it is
possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is
connected to the Internet.
–
13
14
•
Press Answer with the steering wheel keypad. A dictation dialogue starts.
}}
531
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Message notification
Settings for text messages
Managing the phone book
It is possible to activate and deactivate notifications in the text message settings.
Settings for text messages on connected phone.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 525)
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
When a phone is connected to the car with
Bluetooth, contacts can be managed directly in
the centre display.
2.
Press Communication
and select settings:
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown from the
phone selected in the centre display.
Settings for text messages (p. 532)
• Notification in centre display - shows
Settings for phone (p. 533)
message notifications in the centre display's status bar.
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 141)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 123)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
•
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 540)
Text Messages
• Notification in driver display - displays
notifications in the driver's display and
incoming messages can be managed
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
• Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 525)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
Managing text messages (p. 531)
Settings for phone (p. 533)
Browse between the letters and
to find
a matching contact. Depending on existing
contacts in the phone book, only matching
letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on
to search for
a phone number of name in the contact list.
Favourites - tap on
to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
532
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sorting
The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
where special characters and numbers are sorted
. It is possible to sort by first name or
under
surname, and this setting is adjusted in the telephone setup.
Related information
•
•
•
Settings for phone
When the telephone is connected to the car, the
following settings can be made:
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Communication
select settings:
Phone (p. 525)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
Audio settings (p. 498)
Phone and
to use a ringtone from the phone or the
car. Some phones are not fully compatible
and their ringtones may therefore not be
available for use in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 141)
Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 123)
Head-up display* (p. 136)
• Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible
Settings for phone (p. 533)
•
•
•
• Sort Order - select sort order of contact
list.
Call notifications in head up display*
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press My Car Displays
Display Options.
3.
Select Show Phone.
Head-Up
Related information
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 525)
Settings for text messages (p. 532)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 534)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
* Option/accessory. 533
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Internet-connected car*
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is
possible – for example – to use web radio and
music services via apps, download software and
contact your retailer from the car.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Communication Bluetooth
Devices and select settings:
• Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
• Previously paired devices – lists registered/paired devices.
•
Remove device - removes the connected
device.
• Allowed services for this device - sets
device usage options: calling, sending/
receiving messages, streaming media and as
Internet connection.
•
Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth connection.
Related information
•
•
•
•
15
534
Phone (p. 525)
Settings for phone (p. 533)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with
the car's built-in modem* (SIM card).
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is
possible to share the car's Internet connection
(Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devices such as tablets can access the Internet15.
The Internet status is indicated by a symbol in the
centre display's status bar.
NOTE
Data is transferred when using the internet
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
Activation of data roaming can result in further charges.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or the car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or the car modem*.
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and
Customer Privacy Policy at
support.volvocars.com before connecting the car
to the Internet.
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Related information
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 118)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 535)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a phone
(Wi-Fi) (p. 536)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 536)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Apps (p. 500)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
Bluetooth-enabled phone
Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by
sharing your phone's Internet access and
access several online services in the car.
1.
2.
No or poor Internet connection (p. 539)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 538)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 539)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 540)
Volvo ID (p. 26)
NOTE
The telephone and network provider must
support tethering (Internet connection sharing), and the subscription must include data.
3.
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 540)
To be able to connect the car to the Internet
via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone
has to have already been connected to the
car via Bluetooth for a first time.
Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated. This
function is known as "tethering" in the
iPhone and "personal hotspot" in Android
phones. For iPhones, the menu page "tethering" must also be open until the Internet
connection has been established.
If the phone has been connected via Bluetooth previously, press Settings in the centre display top view.
4.
Press Communication
Devices.
5.
Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet
connection under the heading Internet
connection.
6.
If another connection source has been used,
confirm the option to change connection.
> Your car is now connected to the Internet
via the Bluetooth-connected phone.
Bluetooth
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or the car modem*.
Related information
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 536)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 526)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a phone
(Wi-Fi) (p. 536)
•
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 520)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 539)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 534)
* Option/accessory. 535
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi)
Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by tethering your phone and access online services in
the car.
1.
Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated. This
function is known as "tethering" in the
iPhone and "personal hotspot" in Android
phones. For iPhones, the menu page "tethering" must also be open until the Internet
connection has been established.
NOTE
The telephone and network provider must
support tethering (Internet connection sharing), and the subscription must include data.
2.
Press Settings in the top view.
3.
Continue to Communication
4.
Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Wi-Fi.
5.
If another connection source has been used,
confirm the option to change connection.
Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi connection, are described in a separate section.
6.
Tap on the network name of the network to
be connected.
Related information
7.
Enter the network password.
> The car connects to the network.
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
For cars equipped with Volvo On Call*, it is possible to establish an Internet connection via the
car modem and a personal SIM card (P-SIM).
When the car is connected to the Internet via the
car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this
connection.
1.
Wi-Fi.
Note that certain phones switch off tethering
after the contact with the car has been disconnected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it
is used.
536
When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved
for future use. To show a list of saved networks
or manually delete saved networks, go to
Settings Communication Wi-Fi Saved
networks.
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder under
the cargo area floor.
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 539)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 539)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 540)
2.
Press Settings in the top view.
3.
Press Communication
Internet.
4.
Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Car modem Internet.
Car Modem
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
5.
If another connection source has been used,
confirm the option to change connection.
6.
Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The car connects to the network.
Related information
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 539)
Settings for car modem (p. 537)
Settings for car modem16
The car is equipped with a modem that can be
used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also
possible to share the Internet connection via
Wi-Fi.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Press Communication Car Modem
Internet and select settings:
• Send request code — used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card.
Functionality depends on the provider.
Related information
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 536)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 539)
• Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
• Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
• Network
Select network operator - automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car
modem will attempt to connect to the Internet when the car is abroad and outside its
home network. Note that this may result in
heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement
for data traffic abroad with your network provider in your home country.
• SIM card PIN
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be
entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code
shall be required for access to the SIM card.
16
Only cars with Volvo On Call.
* Option/accessory. 537
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
The network operator (SIM card) must support
tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
When the car is online, its Internet connection
can be shared to allow other devices to use the
Internet connection17.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in further charges from your network operator.
2.
Press Communication
Hotspot.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
3.
Tap on Network name and name the
shared connection.
4.
5.
6.
7.
17
538
NOTE
Car Wi-Fi
Tap on Password and select a password to
be entered on connecting devices.
Tap on Frequency band and select the frequency on which the hotspot is to transmit
data. Note that selection of frequency band
is not available in all markets.
Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
If Wi-Fi has been used as a connection
source, confirm the option to change connection.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hotspot).
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
Press Connected devices to see a list of the
currently connected devices.
Related information
•
•
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 118)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 539)
Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
No or poor Internet connection
Related information
Factors that affect the Internet connection.
•
•
The amount of data transferred is dependent on
the services or apps in use in the car. For example, streaming audio can require large amounts of
data which requires a good connection and good
signal strength.
Phone to car
The speed of the Internet connection may vary
depending on the location of the phone in the
car. Move the phone closer to the centre display
in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure
that there is no source of interference in
between.
Phone to network operator
The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the present location. Poor
network coverage may occur, for example in tunnels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or
indoors. The speed also depends on the agreement you have with your network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic, contact your network operator.
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 540)
Remove Wi-Fi network
Removing a network that is not to be used.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2.
Continue to Communication
Saved networks.
3.
Tap on Forget alongside the network to be
removed.
4.
Confirm the selection.
> The car will no longer connect to the network in future.
Wi-Fi
Remove all networks
All networks can be removed simultaneously by
restoring factory settings. Please note that all
user data and system settings are reset to original factory settings.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 539)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Connect the car to the Internet via a phone
(Wi-Fi) (p. 536)
Restarting the phone
If there are problems with the Internet connection
then it may help to restart the phone.
* Option/accessory. 539
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Possible network types to connect to.
It is only possible to connect to the following
types of network:
•
•
•
Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz18.
Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at the
same time then it may result in reduced performance.
Related information
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
User terms and conditions and data
sharing
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
The first time certain services and apps are
started, a pop-up window with the headings
Terms and conditions and Data sharing may
be shown.
Data sharing for services and apps required can
be set in the centre display's settings menu.
The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user
terms and conditions and policy for data sharing.
By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that
certain information is sent from the car. This is
required so that certain services and apps can
have full functionality.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press System
3.
Select activation or deactivation of data sharing for individual services and all apps.
NOTE
Data sharing can be set from the centre display's
settings menu.
After a visit to a Volvo workshop, you may
need to reactivate data sharing so that the
online services and apps shall work again.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating data sharing
(p. 540)
Related information
•
18
540
Privacy and data.
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 540)
Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Storage space on hard disk
It is possible to view how much free space there
is on the car's hard disk.
Storage information for the car's hard disk,
including total capacity, available capacity and
how much space is used for installed apps can
be shown. The information is available under
Settings System System Information
Storage.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 500)
541
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
License agreement for audio and
media
Dirac Unison®
A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following texts
are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/
developers.
This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX®
Home Theater video files up to 576p (including .avi, .divx). Download free software on
www.divx.com to create, play back and stream
digital video.
Bowers & Wilkins
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont.
542
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes
are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are
used under licence.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to
play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating
the DivX VOD section in the device's settings
menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
how to complete the registration.
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possible
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of
specific performance venues. Using advanced
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high-precision
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra,
it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in
perfect unison.
Patent numbers
Protected by one or more of the following US
patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
DivX®
Gracenote®
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Parts of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its suppliers.
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other countries.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote
("Gracenote software") activates this program to
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including name, artist,
track and title ("Gracenote data") from online
servers or embedded databases (together called
"Gracenote servers") and in order to perform
other actions. You may only use Gracenote data
in accordance with the intended end-user functions for this program or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote
software and Gracenote servers for your own
personal non-commercial use. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote
software or any Gracenote data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace-
note servers will be terminated if you violate
these restrictions. If your license is terminated
you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers.
Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote
data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote
servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote
will under no circumstances have any obligation
to pay you for any information you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's rights under this agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to
track enquiries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to enable the Gracenote service to count enquiries without knowing anything about who you are.
Additional information is available on the web
page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote software and everything included
in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is".
Gracenote provides no undertakings or warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the
Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote servers or to change data
categories for any reason that Gracenote deems
sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers are fault-free
or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote
servers will operate without interruption. Grace-
note has no obligation to provide you with new,
improved or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the
company reserves the right to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH
YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE
WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
}}
543
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
544
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution. Neither the name of the
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample
Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January
26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created
by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions: The above copyright notice including
the dates of first publication and either this
permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the
FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
2.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
}}
545
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
546
dealings in these Data Files or Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU.
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
The United Arab
Emirates:
}}
547
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
Kazakhstan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
548
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射
■ 最大
率(EIRP)
率谱密度
天线增益
天线增益
10dBi 时
10dBi 时
≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限
20 ppm
■ 帯外发射
率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)
•
•
•
•
•
率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率
大发射
率(包括额外
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业
使用
4.使用微
率无线电设备,必须忍
装射频
产生有害干扰
各种无线电业
率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采
的干扰或工业
措施消除干扰后方可继续
科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
}}
549
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을
적으로 하며,
든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards)
Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
550
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司
變更頻率
商號或使用者均不得擅自
加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應
立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
電通信
前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線
低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業
科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Sound, media and Internet (p. 498)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Media player (p. 509)
Gracenote® (p. 513)
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32)
* Option/accessory. 551
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
New tyres
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
Tyre economy
•
•
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure
and speed rating are important for how the car
performs.
The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre
information sticker found on the driver's side door
pillar (between the front door and the rear door).
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Recommended tyres
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo original tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side
of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to
the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is therefore important that the new tyres also have this
marking in order for the car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel consumption to be maintained.
1
554
There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
are stored for future use. Examples of external
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
use are cracks or discolouration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin
to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible
when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated
with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is
then manufactured in week 07, year 2017.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
Maintain the correct tyre pressure.
Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and squealing tyres.
•
•
•
Tyre wear increases with speed.
•
The tyres must have the same direction of
rotation during their entire service life.
•
When you change tyres, the tyres with the
best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels
to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy
braking.
•
If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes
you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims
permanently.
Correct wheel alignment is very important.
Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy
and travelling comfort.
Tyre rotation
The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving
style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition
affect how quickly the tyres age and wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front
WHEELS AND TYRES
and rear wheels should be switched with each
other. A suitable distance for the first change is
approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then
at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between
tyres have already occurred, then the least worn
tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer,
and leads to the car continuing forwards in a
straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete
loss of control over the car. This is why it is
important for the rear wheels never to lose grip
before the front wheels.
Storing wheels and tyres
When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on
wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned
lying on their sides on the floor.
Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on
their sides or standing upright, but not hung up.
IMPORTANT
Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark
place, and should never be stored close to
solvents, petrol, oils, etc.
•
•
WARNING
Dimension designation for tyre
Wheel rim size and tyre size for your
Volvo are specified to meet stringent
requirements for stability and driving characteristics. Unapproved combinations of
wheel rim size and tyre size may have a
negative effect on the car's stability and
driving characteristics.
Designations for tyre dimension, load index and
speed rating.
Any damage caused by the fitting of
unapproved combinations of wheel rim
size and tyre size is not covered by the
new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liability for death, personal injury or any costs
caused by such installations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 558)
Tyres' rotation direction (p. 557)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 557)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 560)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 573)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 555)
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
Designation of dimensions
All tyres have a dimension designation, such as:
235/55 R18 104 V.
235
Tyre width (mm)
55
Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
width (%)
R
Radial ply
18
Rim diameter in inches
104
Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, tyre load index (LI)
V
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
240 km/h (149 mph).)
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
load capacity required of the tyres.
}}
* Option/accessory. 555
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Speed rating
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol),
must at least correspond with the car's top
speed. The table below shows the maximum permitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The
only exception to these regulations is winter
tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be used.
If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be
driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which
the car can be driven depends on road conditions, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
2
556
Q
160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h (118 mph)
H
210 km/h (130 mph)
V
240 km/h (149 mph)
W
270 km/h (168 mph)
Y
300 km/h (186 mph)
Both those with metal studs and those without.
WARNING
The lowest permitted load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
respective engine variant are shown in the
car's registration document. If a tyre with too
low a load index or speed rating is used, it
may overheat and be damaged.
Related information
•
•
Tyres (p. 554)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 556)
Dimension designation for wheel
rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for
example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
7,5
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
18
Rim diameter in inches
50,5
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
Related information
•
•
Tyres (p. 554)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 555)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres' rotation direction
NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
only turn in one direction have the direction of
rotation marked with an arrow.
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
same type and dimension, and also the same
make.
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
Related information
•
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
•
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan.
•
Tyres should only be switched between front
and rear positions, never between left and
right-hand sides, or vice versa.
•
If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain and slush out of the way are adversely
affected.
•
Tyres (p. 554)
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread
will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 554)
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
557
WHEELS AND TYRES
Checking tyre pressure
Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving
stability, saves fuel and extends the service life of
the tyres.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies
depending on ambient temperature. Driving on
tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could
result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort,
road noise and driving characteristics.
Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the tyre
pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to
achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal
wear. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high
may cause uneven wear on the tyres.
WARNING
•
•
Tyre pressure that is too low is the most
common cause of tyre failure and may
result in serious cracks in the tyre, the
tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with
unexpected loss of control of the car and
increased risk of personal injury.
Tyres with pressure that is too low reduce
the load capacity of the car.
Cold tyres
The tyre pressure must be checked when the
tyres are cold.
558
Tyres are considered cold when they have the
same temperature as the surrounding air.
This temperature is normally reached when the
car has been parked for at least three hours.
After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile)
these tyres are considered as warm. If you have
to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first
check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to
a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the
pump.
When the outside temperature changes, the tyre
pressure also changes. A decrease in temperature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to
decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure
regularly and adjust to the correct pressure,
which is specified on the car's tyre information
plate or certification label.
If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are
warm then you must never release any air. The
tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for
the pressure to increase above the recommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with
tyre pressure equal to or below the recommendation for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far
too low.
Adjusting tyre pressure
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain
the recommended tyre pressure.
Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold
tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance
and optimal wear.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
1.
Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre
and then press the tyre pressure gauge
firmly down onto the valve.
2.
Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see
the decal on the door pillar on the driver's
side showing the recommended pressure for
factory fitted tyres.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 558)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 559)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 560)
Tyres (p. 554)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
3.
Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4.
Check the tyres visually for any implanted
nails or other objects that could puncture the
tyre and cause leakage.
5.
Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts,
bumps or other irregularities.
6.
Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare
tyre*.
NOTE
If you have over-inflated, release air by pressing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve.
Then check the pressure again using the tyre
pressure gauge.
Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pressure table or on the tyre pressure plate.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 559)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 558)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 577)
Recommended tyre pressure
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows
which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions.
Approved tyre pressures (p. 670)
The decal displays the designation for the factory-fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits
and tyre pressure.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures
can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. However, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead if optimum noise and travelling
comfort are desired.
Related information
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 558)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 670)
* Option/accessory. 559
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
system3,
The tyre pressure monitoring
gives a
warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of the
car's tyres is too low.
Symbol
Explanation
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tyre pressure.
If there is a fault in the system the
tyre pressure warning symbol
flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains illuminated.
System description
The tyre pressure monitoring system measures
differences in rotation speed between the different wheels via the ABS system in order to be
able to determine whether they have the correct
tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the
tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is
its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with
each other the system can determine whether
one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.
General information on the tyre monitoring
system
In the information below, the tyre monitoring system is referred to generically as TPMS.
3
560
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be
checked once a month. When checking, the tyre
should be cold and have the air pressure recommended by the car manufacturer specified on the
tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If
the car has tyres of a different size than that recommended by the manufacturer, find out what
the correct air pressure level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped
with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
which shows when the air pressure in one or
more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol
for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres
as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air
pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is
too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which
can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also
reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life,
and can affect car handling and stopping ability.
Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre
maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for
low tyre pressure has not been reached so that
the indicator symbol illuminates.
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system
fault indicator, which indicates when the system
is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system
fault indicator is combined with the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When the system
detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display
will flash for about one minute and then remain
illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when
the car is started until the fault has been rectified.
When the symbol is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be
affected.
A TPMS system fault can occur for several reasons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or
changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from
functioning correctly.
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly
with TPMS.
Messages on the instrument panel
When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator
symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the
driver display and a message is shown.
• Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate
after fill
• Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable
• Tyre pressure system Service required
To bear in mind
•
Always calibrate the system after a wheel
change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pressures.
•
If you change to tyres of a different size to
the ones fitted at the factory, the system
must be calibrated for these tyres to avoid
false warnings.
•
If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that
the tyre pressure monitoring system does not
work correctly due to the differences
between the wheels.
•
The system does not replace the need for
regular tyre inspection and maintenance.
•
It is not possible to switch off the tyre pressure monitoring system.
•
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 561)
Calibrate the system for tyre
pressure monitoring*
In order for the system for tyre pressure monitoring4 to work correctly, a reference value for the
tyre pressure must be determined. This must be
performed each time the tyres are changed or
the tyre pressure is changed.
For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre
pressure should be adjusted in accordance with
Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Following which, the system must be recalibrated.
1.
Switch off the car.
2.
Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see
the decal on the door pillar on the driver's
side showing the recommended pressure for
factory fitted tyres.
WARNING
•
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
3.
Start the car.
4.
Open the Car Status app in the app view.
Related information
•
•
•
4
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 559)
See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 563)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 564)
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
}}
* Option/accessory. 561
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
5.
Press TPMS.
8.
Run the car until calibration is complete.
NOTE
Calibration is performed when the car is
driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph).
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is
started.
6.
Press Calibrate.
7.
Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure
in all four tyres has been checked and
adjusted.
Remember to always calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring system when you have
changed a wheel or if the tyre pressure has
been changed according to the tyre pressure
label or tyre pressure table.
If the car's ignition is switched off before calibration is complete, the tyres in the centre
display change colour from grey to green
upon next start-up, even if calibration is not
complete. Perform calibration again and
allow it to complete within the same operating cycle to ensure that the calibration is carried out correctly.
> When sufficient data has been collected
to enable the system to detect low tyre
pressure, the tyres in the centre display
change colour from grey to green. The
system provides no additional confirmation that the calibration is complete.
If correct reference values have not been set,
the system may not warn correctly about low
tyre pressure.
The car must be stationary with the engine
running for you to have access to the calibration button and start the calibration process.
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
which is invisible and odourless, but highly
toxic. For this reason, calibration must always
be performed outside or in a workshop with
exhaust extraction.
If start-up of calibration fails, the following
message appears: Calibration
unsuccessful. Try again..
Related information
•
•
•
562
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 559)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 558)
See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 563)
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 564)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 560)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
See tyre pressure statue in the
centre display*
All tyres grey:
•
•
With the system for tyre pressure monitoring5,
tyre pressure status can be viewed in the centre
display.
Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph)
are required for the system to become active.
Checking status
1.
All tyres grey and a message:
Open the Car Status app in the app view.
• Tyre pressure system Temporarily
Green tyre:
•
2.
Tap on TPMS to show the status of the
tyres.
The tyre pressure is above the limit value for
a warning.
The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and
check/rectify the tyre pressure by inflating as
soon as possible. Calibrate the system after
the tyre pressure has been adjusted.
All tyres yellow:
5
6
7
unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes
and changes to constant glow after approx. 1
minute. The system is currently unavailable,
activated shortly.
• Tyre pressure system Service required.
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to
constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working correctly, contact a
workshop7.
Yellow tyre:
•
Status indication
The graphics in the centre display show the status for each tyre6.
Calibration in progress.
Unknown status.
•
The pressure is too low in two or more tyres.
Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures by
inflating as soon as possible. Calibrate the
system after the tyre pressures have been
adjusted.
Related information
•
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 561)
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 564)
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 560)
Car status (p. 600)
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory. 563
WHEELS AND TYRES
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
When the system for tyre pressure8 warns that
tyre pressure is too low, action is required.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
when the indicator symbol for the system is illuminated and the Tyre
pressure low message is shown.
1.
Switch off the car.
2.
Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with
a tyre pressure gauge.
•
3.
Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see
the decal on the door pillar on the driver's
side showing the recommended pressure for
factory fitted tyres.
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4.
•
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 561)
•
See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 563)
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 560)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 577)
NOTE
Perform calibration of the system via the
centre display after tyre pressure adjustment.
WARNING
Note that the indicator symbol does not
extinguish until the low tyre pressure has
been rectified and new calibration has been
performed.
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
•
•
8
564
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 559)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 558)
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
When changing wheels
Tool kit
Jack*
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter
wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant
instructions for removing and fitting wheels.
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
changes or similar are found in the car's cargo
area.
The jack can be used to raise the car, for example, to change to the spare wheel.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updating the software at each change of tyre dimension. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimensions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Removing a wheel (p. 567)
Fitting the wheels (p. 569)
Tool kit (p. 565)
Winter wheels (p. 571)
Spare wheel* (p. 570)
Wheel bolts (p. 566)
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
The foam block under the cargo area floor contains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool
for removing the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.
If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a
jack and wheel wrench are included, as well as a
package with disposable gloves and a bag for the
damaged wheel.
Related information
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 565)
Jack* (p. 565)
}}
* Option/accessory. 565
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
IMPORTANT
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use,
such as when changing a wheel after a
puncture. Only the jack belonging to the
specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage
jack is recommended. In this instance,
follow the instructions for use that come
with the equipment.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
Models with self-levelling*
If the car is equipped with the air suspension
option then this function must be deactivated
before the car is raised with the jack.
Related information
•
566
Tool kit (p. 565)
Wheel bolts
Related information
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the
hubs.
•
•
Removing a wheel (p. 567)
Fitting the wheels (p. 569)
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose
tightening may damage the nuts and the
bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
bolts.
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened
several days after the change. Temperature
differences and vibration may mean that they
are not attached equally as tightly.
Locking wheel bolts*
In the foam block under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Removing a wheel
Instructions for removing a wheel when changing wheels. Wheel changes must always be performed correctly.
WARNING
•
Apply the parking brake and set the gear
selector in Park position (P).
•
Chock the wheels standing on the ground
using solid wood blocks or large stones.
IMPORTANT
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use,
such as when changing a wheel after a
puncture. Only the jack belonging to the
specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage
jack is recommended. In this instance,
follow the instructions for use that come
with the equipment.
•
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
•
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
•
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
•
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
•
If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
•
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
•
Never crawl under the car or reach under
with a part of your body when it is raised
on a jack.
1.
Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
changed in a trafficked location.
2.
Apply the parking brake and engage gear
position P, or engage first gear if the car has
a manual gearbox.
Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If
the car is equipped with air suspension, this
must be disabled before the car is raised
with a jack*.
3.
Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools
for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted
in the foam block.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
4.
Chock in front of and behind the wheels that
remain on the ground. Use, for example,
heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
}}
* Option/accessory. 567
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
5.
Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position as per
the instructions.
8.
When raising the car, it is important that the
jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody. The triangle
markings in the plastic cover indicate the
locations of the jacking/lifting points. There
are two jacking points on each side of the
car. There is a recess for the jack at each
point.
11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away
from the side of the car as possible, at which
point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the
direction of the car.
12. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel
to be removed to move freely. Remove the
wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into the
wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible.
568
6.
Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
7.
With the car still on the ground, use the
wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards
(anticlockwise).
9.
Settings for level control* (p. 459)
When changing wheels (p. 565)
Raise the car (p. 603)
Jack* (p. 565)
Tool kit (p. 565)
Fitting the wheels (p. 569)
Position the jack on level, firm and non-slippery ground under the jacking point that will
be used.
10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so
that it makes contact with the car's jacking
point. Check that the head of the jack (or the
lift arms at a workshop) is correctly positioned in the jacking point so that the bump
in the centre of the head fits into the jacking
point hole and the base is positioned vertically below the jacking point.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Fitting the wheels
Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing
wheels.
NOTE
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use, such
as when changing a wheel after a puncture.
Only the jack belonging to the specific model
is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to
be jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
WARNING
1.
Clean the surfaces between wheel and hub.
•
Apply the parking brake and set the gear
selector in Park position (P).
2.
Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
•
Chock the wheels standing on the ground
using solid wood blocks or large stones.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
•
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
•
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
•
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
•
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
•
If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
•
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
•
Never crawl under the car or reach under
with a part of your body when it is raised
on a jack.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3.
Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4.
Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check
the tightening torque with a torque wrench.
5.
Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
}}
569
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened
several days after the change. Temperature
differences and vibration may mean that they
are not attached equally as tightly.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
570
Settings for level control* (p. 459)
When changing wheels (p. 565)
Raise the car (p. 603)
Jack* (p. 565)
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary Spare type, can
be used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel.
WARNING
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the
car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
•
The car may have different driving characteristics while driving with the spare
wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced
with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
•
Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained
regardless of the position of the temporary spare
wheel on the car.
The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel, which affects the car's ground
clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do
not machine-wash the car.
•
If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one can
be purchased from a Volvo dealer.
Follow the manufacturer's recommended
tyre pressure for the spare wheel.
•
On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on the
rear axle can be disengaged.
•
If the spare wheel is fitted to the front
axle then it is not possible to use snow
chains at the same time.
•
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
The spare tyre is only designed for temporary
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as
possible.
The car's driving characteristics can be changed
when the spare wheel is used and the ground
clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an
automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is
being used.
Tool kit (p. 565)
Removing a wheel (p. 567)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
IMPORTANT
The car must not be driven with tyres of different sizes or with a spare tyre other than
the one supplied with the car. Using differentsized wheels can cause serious damage to
the car's transmission.
Location
Taking out the spare wheel
Winter wheels
Follow these instructions for handling the spare
wheel.
Winter wheels are adapted for winter road conditions.
1.
Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2.
Undo the retaining screw.
3.
Lift out the foam block with its tools.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
4.
Lift out the spare wheel.
Storing the punctured tyre
The illustration is schematic - the shape of the foam
block may vary depending on car model.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. The same bolt runs
through to secure the spare wheel and the foam
block. The foam block contains all the tools for
changing a wheel.
1.
Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam
block and put the wheel in the bag.
2.
Put the tools back in their right place in the
foam block and lift it back into the car.
3.
Screw in the foam block using the mounting
screws and then fold down the cargo area
floor.
4.
Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
Related information
•
Spare wheel* (p. 570)
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
mark which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs
settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre,
and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Related information
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 565)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 559)
}}
* Option/accessory. 571
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Tread depth
Snow chains
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches).
Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help
to improve the traction in winter conditions.
Related information
•
•
•
572
When changing wheels (p. 565)
Winter driving (p. 464)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 557)
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre
and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow
chains are permitted.
In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to the car and lead to an accident.
IMPORTANT
Snow chains can be used on the car with the
following restrictions:
•
Volvo does not recommend the use of
show chains on wheel dimensions
greater than 18 inches.
•
Always follow the mounting instructions
from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the
chains as tensioned as possible and tension them at regular intervals.
•
Snow chains must only be used on the
front wheels (also applies to all-wheel
drive cars).
•
In some cases, snow chains must NOT
be used, such as if accessory, aftermarket or "special" tyres and wheels are fitted that have a different size to the original tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance
must be maintained between the chains
and brakes, suspension and body components.
•
Check local regulations with regard to
using snow chains before fitting them.
•
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed. You must
never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under
any circumstances.
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when
driving with snow chains.
WHEELS AND TYRES
•
•
•
Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and
tyres.
Driving with snow chains may have a
negative effect on the car's driving characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as
well as braking with locked wheels.
Some types of chain that are firmly tensioned affect brake components and
must therefore NOT be used.
You can obtain more information on snow chains
from a Volvo retailer.
Related information
•
Winter driving (p. 464)
Emergency puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit9, is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the air pressure in the tyre.
Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the
puncture repair kit.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works
as a temporary repair.
NOTE
The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres
with tread punctures but has limited ability to
seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use
the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres
displaying larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary
emergency puncture repair and is approved
by Volvo.
Sealing fluid expiry date
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the
bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on
the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally
hazardous waste.
Related information
•
•
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 574)
•
Tyres (p. 554)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 577)
Location
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
9
Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK)
* Option/accessory. 573
WHEELS AND TYRES
Using a puncture repair kit
Connecting
WARNING
Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tyre sealing system:
Overview
•
The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber
latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These
substances are harmful if swallowed.
•
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory tract,
the skin, the central nervous system, and
the eyes.
Precautions:
NOTE
Electrical cable
Air hose
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
•
•
•
Store out of the reach of children.
•
Wash thoroughly after handling.
Pressure reducing valve
First aid:
Protective cap
•
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper
and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
Label, maximum permitted speed
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle
Switch
574
Harmful if ingested.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with
the skin. If sealing fluid has come into
contact with your clothes, remove them.
WHEELS AND TYRES
•
Inhalation: Move the exposed person to
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical
attention.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off),
and locate the electrical cable and the air
hose.
•
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention.
4.
Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
sealing fluid bottle.
Disposal: Dispose of this material and its
container at a hazardous or special waste
collection point.
5.
•
The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant
leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it
cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder
again. Bottle removal must be performed at a
workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised
Volvo workshop.
WARNING
•
Do not remove the bottle when the puncture repair kit is being used.
•
Do not remove the air hose when the
puncture repair kit is being used.
1.
Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
2.
Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed that is affixed on one side of the compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a
reminder to observe the speed limit. You
should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used.
Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bottle holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6.
7.
Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
}}
575
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
8.
Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be switched
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the
pressure drops after approximately
30 seconds.
9.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is
3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then
the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and
refit the dust cap on the tyre.
Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area.
576
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km
(2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
the first few rotations of the tyre.
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
15. Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
screw in the valve connection to the bottom
of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor
must be switched off.
WHEELS AND TYRES
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
•
If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre
is insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Call roadside assistance
for recovery.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is
performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Maximum mileage with tyres containing sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
(19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi).
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
NOTE
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair
kit.
1.
The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
2.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow
local regulations related to waste management.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 559)
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
3.
Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 573)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 577)
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4.
Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
}}
577
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not
run for more than 10 minutes.
5.
Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label on the driver side
door pillar. Release air using the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
6.
Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
7.
Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow
local regulations related to waste management.
578
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 559)
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 574)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 573)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
Rear seat
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Overview of the passenger compartment's interior and storage locations.
Front seat
Electrical sockets (p. 582)
Using the glovebox (p. 585)
Sun visors (p. 587)
Tunnel console (p. 581)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 516)
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in
the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front
seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the tunnel
console.
Storage compartment in the door panel and by the
steering wheel, glovebox and sun visors.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and other
items on sensitive surfaces.
Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket, mesh
pocket* and USB port in the tunnel console.
580
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Tunnel console
WARNING
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm* is located
under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid
leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in
the cup holder, since this may trigger the
alarm.
Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch
is opened/closed with a push on the handle.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and other
items on sensitive surfaces.
Storage compartment with cup holder and
12 V socket.
Storage compartment and USB port under
the armrest.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment.
Related information
•
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 580)
Electrical sockets (p. 582)
Climate controls (p. 210)
* Option/accessory. 581
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Electrical sockets
High voltage socket*
There are two 12 V electrical sockets and one
230 V electrical socket* in the tunnel console,
and there is one 12 V electrical socket* in the
cargo area.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat.
The high-voltage socket* can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as chargers
or laptops.
Status indication, high-voltage socket
An LED1 lamp on the socket indicates the status
of the socket:
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players,
cooler boxes and mobile phones.
1
582
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Status indication
Reason
Action
Steady green light
The socket is delivering current to a connected device.
None.
Blinking orange light
The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for
example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compartment is too warm).
Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
down before reinserting the plug.
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continuously) or is defective.
None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
socket.
The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted.
Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active.
Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest ignition position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated.
Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.
Extinguished lamp
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 580)
Using electrical sockets (p. 584)
583
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Using electrical sockets
12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players,
cooler boxes and mobile phones.
High-voltage sockets* can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as chargers
and portable computers.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's electrical system must be set in the lowest ignition
position I. The sockets are then active as long as
the starter battery level does not become too low.
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked,
the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is
switched off and the car is not locked, or is
locked with double lock temporarily deactivated,
then the sockets continue to be active for a further seven minutes.
2
584
NOTE
Remember that use of the electrical socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk of
discharging the starter battery, which can limit
functionality.
Accessories that are connected to the electrical sockets may be activated even when the
car's electrical system is disconnected or if
preconditioning is used. For this reason, disconnect the connectors when they are not in
use in order to avoid the starter battery being
discharged.
WARNING
•
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage the
socket or come loose when driving.
•
Using 12 V sockets
1.
Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)
or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front
of the socket and plug in the accessory's
connector.
2.
Unplug the accessory's connector and refit
the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up
the cover (cargo area) when the socket is
not in use or if the socket is left unattended.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per
socket.
Using high-voltage sockets
1.
Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver or
electrical system for example.
Pull down the socket cover and insert the
accessory's plug.
> The LED2 lamp on the socket indicates
the status.
2.
•
Position the accessory so that it is not at
risk of injuring the driver or passengers in
the event of heavy braking or collision.
Check that the lamp is illuminated with a
steady green light - only then is current available at the socket.
3.
•
Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can burn
passengers or the interior.
Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the
plug - do not pull on the cable.
Pull up the cover when the socket is not
being used or the socket is left unattended.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Using the glovebox
•
Only use accessories that are undamaged and fault-free. The accessories
must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with
connectors designed for the socket. The
accessories must have a CE marking, UL
marking or an equivalent safety marking.
The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
The printed owner's manual and maps can be
kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also
space for a pen and card holder.
•
Never allow sockets, connectors or
accessories to come into contact with
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be damaged or has come into contact with water
or other liquid.
•
Do not connect junction sockets, adapters or extension cables to the socket as
these can override the socket's safety
features.
•
The socket is equipped with a protective
cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or
damages the socket preventing the cover
from doing its job. Do not leave children
in the car unsupervised when the socket
is active.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 150 W.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the high-voltage
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.
Related information
•
•
Electrical sockets (p. 582)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 580)
}}
585
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
Locking and unlocking the glovebox*
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is
taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The
glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the
accompanying key.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
The key's designated storage space. The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Deactivating cooling
–
Pull out the key.
–
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Using the glovebox as a cooled area*
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the climate control system is active (i.e. when the car is
set in ignition position II or when the engine is
running).
586
Activating cooling
Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving
the control to the end position toward the
passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 580)
Private locking (p. 275)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Sun visors
Cargo area
Recommendations for loading
There are sun visors in the roof in front of the
driver and the front seat passenger which can
be folded down and angled out to the side when
necessary.
The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it
possible to transport and secure large objects.
There are a number of things to remember when
loading the car.
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat,
the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use
load retaining eyelets or bag holders to secure
the load, and the extendable cargo cover* to conceal the load if desired.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
WARNING
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor.
Related information
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
•
•
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
Bag hooks (p. 589)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 590)
Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 590)
The car’s driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.
Loading in the cargo area
•
•
•
The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically
when the lid is lifted.
The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g.
cards or tickets.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 580)
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Centre the load.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
}}
* Option/accessory. 587
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading,
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note
that objects must not prevent the function of the
WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the
rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be
folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.
Load retaining eyelets (p. 590)
Roof load and loading on load
carriers
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 190)
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers
that Volvo have developed are recommended.
•
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
(p. 590)
•
Roof load and loading on load carriers
(p. 588)
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers.
•
•
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 457)
Related information
•
•
Weights (p. 659)
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
•
If the load is longer than the car at the front,
e.g. a canoe or kayak, fit the towing eye to its
front socket and attach the bungee to this.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
Follow the car's specifications with regard to
weights and maximum permitted load.
588
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
Weights (p. 659)
Bag hooks
Under the floor hatch*
Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their
contents across the cargo area.
Along the sides
There are two bag hooks and an elastic strap3 in
the cover, which is part of the floor hatch in the
cargo area. The strap can be fitted in four different positions.
There are two bag hooks in the side panel on
each side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maximum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Lift up the cover in order to use the bag hooks.
Fasten the bags in a suitable position with the
enclosed elastic strap. If the bags have handles
and are a suitable height - hang them in the
hooks.
Related information
•
•
•
•
3
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
Fitting and removing the safety net*
(p. 594)
Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 590)
Fitting and removing safety grilles* (p. 593)
It is possible to reorder additional elastic straps at a Volvo retailer.
* Option/accessory. 589
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Load retaining eyelets
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
Fitting and removing cargo cover*
Use the load retaining eyelets to fasten straps in
order to anchor items in the cargo area.
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.
In the extended position, the cargo cover prevents visual access to the cargo area.
Fitting cargo cover
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
•
•
590
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
Weights (p. 659)
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on
car model.
1.
In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and
fold down the hatch.
2.
Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in
the recess in the side panel in the cargo
area.
If the private locking function is used then the
through-load hatch must be closed.
Then insert the other end piece in the recess
in the side panel on the opposite side.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
Private locking (p. 275)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 590)
Press down the end pieces on both sides one by one.
> When a "click" is heard and the red marking on each end piece has disappeared,
the cargo cover is attached - check that it
is affixed securely.
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
4.
Fold the cargo cover's front panel forward to
eliminate the space between the cargo cover
and the rear seat's backrests.
Removing cargo cover
Operating cargo cover*
In retracted position:
There are two extended positions for the cargo
cover - a full-cover position and a loading position, where it is partially extended to make it easier to reach further into the cargo area.
1.
Depress the button on one of the retracted
cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that
end.
2.
Angle the cover up/out carefully.
> The other end piece loosens automatically
and the cover can be lifted out of the
cargo area.
Full-cover position
Related information
•
•
Operating cargo cover* (p. 591)
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
IMPORTANT
The cover plate has two plastic parts that act
as support to hold it in place.
1.
The plastic parts must not be used to hang
bags on. They are not designed for this purpose and may break.
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
so that it slides over the side panels in the
cargo area. Pull to the end position.
2.
Guide the cover's attachment pins into the
grooves in the side panels. Release, while at
the same time angling the handle slightly
upwards so that the attachment pins hook in.
> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover
position.
If the safety net* shall be used at the same time
as the cargo cover then the safety net must be
fitted first.
IMPORTANT
Do not load objects on top of the cargo cover.
}}
* Option/accessory. 591
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
Loading mode
From the full-cover position:
With an automatic* cargo cover, the cover will be
retracted from full-cover position to loading position every time the tailgate is opened, and
extended again when the tailgate is closed. The
cargo cover detects if something is obstructing
its movement and then retracts automatically.
Retracting
1. From the full-cover position:
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to disengage the cargo cover's attachment pins
and then release.
From loading position:
WARNING
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position.
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to disengage the attachment pins and then
release.
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when
opening and closing with the automatic*
cargo cover.
Grasp the handle and pull it back until it
stops.
Angle the cover down.
Move the cover and its attachment pins carefully forward and up over the hooks.
> The cover retracts until it stops in the
loading position.
Returning to full-cover position from loading position:
592
1.
Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out
to the end position.
2.
Release the handle so that the attachment
pins hook into the hooks.
> The cover is locked in the full-cover position.
IMPORTANT
If the cargo area is loaded with a bulky load
then the automatic* cargo cover is moved to
retracted position in order to avoid it making
contact with the load.
2.
Retract the cover with its attachment pins
outside of the side panels until it stops in the
retracted position.
Remember that a retracted cargo cover may
obstruct rearward visibility.
Related information
NOTE
•
Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 590)
The cargo cover may not operate automatically in low passenger compartment temperatures.
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Fitting and removing safety grilles*
The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the
cargo area from being thrown forward in the
passenger compartment.
The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance
with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils
Volvo's strength requirements.
Installation
3.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille must only be used in the rear
position (behind the rear seat) described
here.
Before first installing the safety grille, the existing
plastic roof mountings must be replaced with
steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that
replacing roof mountings is performed at an
authorised Volvo workshop or retailer.
1.
Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2.
Make sure that the safety grille is turned in
the right direction. Lift in the safety grille
through one of the rear side doors.
Position the safety grille's brackets on the
roof mountings.
The next step is facilitated if two people hold
the safety grille in the right position.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
be attached and anchored correctly.
WARNING
Under no circumstances may anybody remain
in the cargo area while the car is moving. This
is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
}}
* Option/accessory. 593
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
Related information
4.
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 590)
Fitting and removing the safety net*
The safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
Insert the supplied screw and tighten using
the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat on the
other side. Recommended tightening torque:
20 Nm (15 foot-pounds).
> Check that the safety grille is properly fitted.
5.
Restore the backrest to the upright position.
For more information about the tools required
and methods for fitting/removal, see the installation instructions4 that were included with the initial purchase.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
4
594
For reasons of safety, the safety net must always
be fastened and anchored as described below.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can
be secured two different locations in the car:
•
•
Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
Front fitting - behind the front seats.
Installation instructions no. 31659257.
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.
4.
Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks
into the rear roof mounting and then press it
forward to the end position.
6.
5.
Hook the other of the safety net's retaining
hooks on the opposite side and press it forward to the end position.
Removing the safety net
Fitting the safety net
Rear fitting
1.
Front fitting
Hook the other of the safety net's retaining
hooks on the opposite side and press it forward to the end position.
Undo the safety net from the roof mountings
by pressing the retaining hooks backwards.
Allow the net to roll into the cassette.
2.
Rear fitting:
1.
2.
3.
If necessary, fold the rear seat backrests forward in order to facilitate installation.
Lower the safety net cassette's end pieces
over the mounting eyelets in the recess of
the side panels. Press down the end piece
one side at a time. Check that the cassette is
properly secured.
Pull up the net.
1.
Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2.
Align the safety net cassette's anchor rails in
front of the backrest's attachment lugs.
Press the button on each side of the cassette in order to release the end pieces from
the mounting eyelets. Lift out the safety net.
3.
Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs.
Front fitting:
4.
Pull up the net.
5.
Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks
into the front roof mounting and then press it
forward to the end position.
Slide the cassette from the attachment lugs
and lift out the safety net.
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 587)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 590)
595
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
First aid kit*
Warning triangle
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.
Use the warning triangle to warn other road
users if the car is stationary in traffic.
Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap, if
the car is equipped with one of these.
Related information
•
Cargo area (p. 587)
Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces
The warning triangle is located under the panel
on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle
Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
and then unhooking the panel. Place the
panel to one side.
Open the latch and take out the case.
Remove the warning triangle from the case,
unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case are
properly secured in their storage space and that
the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information
•
•
596
Cargo area (p. 587)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 156)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service programme as specified
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo
workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,
special tools and service literature to guarantee
the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
•
•
598
Car status (p. 600)
Book service and repair (p. 601)
Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 38)
•
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 606)
•
•
Brake system maintenance (p. 433)
Engine compartment overview (p. 607)
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network
for secure data transfer between your car and
the workshop. Your workshop visit will be simpler and more efficient when the transfer of diagnostic information and software can take place
via the workshop's network.
When you reach the workshop for your visit, your
service technician may want to connect your car
to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform
fault-tracing and software download. For this type
of communication, the car only connects to a
workshop's network. It is not possible to connect
the car to another Wi-Fi network, such as at
home, in the same way as to a workshop's network.
Connection with the remote control key
Connection is normally handled by the service
technician who then uses the remote control key
buttons. That's why it's important to take a key
with buttons with you for the workshop visit.
Press three times on the lock button on the
remote control key to connect the car to the
workshop's network via Wi-Fi.
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network,
the
symbol appears in the centre display.
WARNING
The car must not be driven when connected
to the workshop's networks and systems.
Related information
•
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 599)
•
Book service and repair (p. 601)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Download Center
Several of the car's systems can be updated
from the centre display with an online car1.
The Download Centre app is
started from app view in the
centre display and enables:
•
•
•
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
System updates for online car and infotainment
can be updated via the Download Centre.
Updates can be made one at a time or all at
once.
Searching for update
If an update is available, the
message New software
updates available is shown in
the centre display's status bar.
searching for and updating system software
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the ignition is switched off and the car is left.
updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
downloading, updating and uninstalling apps.
Related information
•
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 599)
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 501)
1
2
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
Updating apps (p. 502)
Deleting apps (p. 502)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is
because the update is resumed the next time
the car is used.
For system updates to be possible, the car must
be connected to the Internet2.
–
Go to Download Centre in the centre display's app view.
> If no search has been performed since
the last time the infotainment system was
started, a search is performed. No search
is performed if a software installation is in
progress.
A number on System updates shows
how many updates are available. One tap
shows a list of the updates that can be
installed in the car.
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
Update all system software
–
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then the Install all option can
be selected at System updates.
Update individual system software
programs
–
Select Install for the software required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 599
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Cancelling software download
Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced Install at the start of the download.
–
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled.
Car status
•
The car's general status can be shown in the
centre display along with the opportunity to book
service3.
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
•
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 471)
The Car Status app is started
from app view in the centre display and has four tabs:
Deactivating the background search for
software update
Automatic background search for software
updates is activated when the car is delivered
from the factory, but this function can be deactivated.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press System
3.
Deselect Auto Software Update.
Download Centre.
Related information
•
•
•
3
4
600
Download Center (p. 599)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
• Messages - status messages
• Status – checking engine oil level and
AdBlue level4
• TPMS - checking the tyre pressure
• Appointments - appointment information
and car information3.
Related information
•
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 101)
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 609)
•
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 560)
Book service and repair (p. 601)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 602)
Applies to certain markets.
AdBlue Applies to cars with diesel engines.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Book service and repair5
7.
This service provides a convenient way to book
a service and workshop visit directly in the car.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, a message will
appear in the driver display and at the top of the
centre display. The service date is determined by
how much time has passed, hours that the
engine has been running, or distance driven
since the last service.
Before the service can be used
•
•
•
To send and receive booking information, the
car must be connected to the Internet6.
Book a service
Fill in a booking request when so required or
when a message indicating that the car needs a
service or repair is shown.
You will also receive the same communication via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and log in.
1.
Open the Car Status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press Appointments.
3.
Press Request appointment.
4.
Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled
in.
8.
5.
Make sure that the desired Workshop is
filled in.
The booking enquiry sent from the car includes
car information that facilitates workshop planning.
6.
Fill in the field Tap to write information to
the workshop if there is anything you would
like done during the workshop visit or any
other important information to your workshop.
The retailer comes back with a digital booking
proposal. You also have information on your
retailer available in the car and can contact your
workshop at any time.
Create a Volvo ID and register it to the car.
Select the Volvo retailer you would like to
contact by going to www.volvocars.com and
logging in.
In certain markets, once you have sent the
appointment request, the message that
the car needs service is extinguished in
the driver display.
Applies to certain markets.
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
This time frame may vary depending on market.
Tap on Cancel request to cancel your
request.
Accept the appointment suggestion
When the car has received an appointment suggestion, a message will be shown at the top of
the centre display.
1.
5
6
7
Press Send appointment request.
> You will receive an appointment suggestion via e-mail within a couple of days7.
Tap the message.
}}
601
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
2.
If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap
on Accept. Otherwise, tap on Send new
proposal or Decline.
For certain markets, the system reminds you of a
scheduled appointment time as it approaches
and the navigation system8 can also guide you to
the workshop when the time comes.
Related information
•
•
Sending car information to a
workshop9
It is possible to send information for the car at
any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appointment and want to help your workshop by providing them with better data so that your visit can
be planned. Sending car information is not the
same as booking a service appointment.
Car status (p. 600)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 602)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
•
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
1.
Open the Car Status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press Appointments.
3.
Press Send car data.
> A message that vehicle data are being
sent is shown at the top of the centre display. You can cancel data transmission by
tapping the X in the activity indicator.
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
The information is sent via the car's Internet connection10.
8 Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
9 Applies to certain markets.
10 Data is transferred (data traffic)
11 Vehicle Identification Number.
602
This car information can be accessed by any
retailer if they have the car's identification number (VIN11).
Car information content
The data sent is the last information saved (the
last time the car was running) and includes information in the following areas:
•
•
•
•
•
•
service requirement
•
•
the car's software version
time since last service
function status
fluid levels
meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number
(VIN11)
the car's diagnostics data.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Book service and repair (p. 601)
Car status (p. 600)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 109)
Internet-connected car* (p. 534)
when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Raise the car
When raising the car it is important that the car
jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the
intended points on the car’s underbody.
For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fitted, must be switched off before the car is raised.
Deactivating the function via the centre display.
WARNING
If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this
must be placed beneath one of the four jacking points. Take care to position the workshop
jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure
that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard
so that the car remains stable and is not damaged. Always use axle stands or similar.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
}}
* Option/accessory. 603
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
Related information
•
•
•
604
Removing a wheel (p. 567)
Jack* (p. 565)
Settings for level control* (p. 459)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Opening and closing the bonnet
Close the bonnet
The bonnet can be opened using the handle in
the passenger compartment and a handle under
the bonnet.
1.
Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight.
2.
When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
Open the bonnet
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path
under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise
there is a risk of personal injury.
Turn the handle under the bonnet anticlockwise to release the bonnet from the lock
catches and lift the bonnet.
Warning - bonnet not closed
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to
release the bonnet from its fully closed position.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. The bonnet must engage at both
sides audibly.
When the bonnet is released, the warning symbol and the graphics in the
driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the car
starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will
repeat.
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning signal is heard despite the bonnet being closed
properly, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Bonnet not completely closed. The figure is schematic parts may vary depending on car model.
}}
605
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Servicing the climate control system
Related information
The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
•
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Bonnet completely closed. The figure is schematic parts may vary depending on car model.
WARNING
Never drive with an open bonnet!
If there are any signs that the bonnet is not
properly closed whilst driving, stop immediately and close it.
Related information
•
•
606
Engine compartment overview (p. 607)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 49)
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Volvo service programme (p. 598)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Head-up display when replacing the
windscreen*
Cars with head-up display are equipped with a
special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected image.
Engine compartment overview
WARNING
The overview shows some service-related components.
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start or continue to operate
automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after
the engine has been switched off.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop when replacing the windscreen. The correct version of the windscreen
must be fitted in order that the head-up display's
graphics shall be displayed correctly.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
Related information
•
•
WARNING
Head-up display* (p. 136)
The ignition system works at a very high and
hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system
must always be in ignition position 0 when
work is being performed in the engine compartment.
Cleaning the head up display* (p. 637)
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the engine is hot.
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driver's side)
Washer fluid filler pipe12
Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
12
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 605)
Filling washer fluid (p. 652)
Topping up coolant (p. 610)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 626)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 609)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.
* Option/accessory. 607
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals and warranty can be applied.
If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular
basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk
that this will cause serious damage to the engine.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
Volvo recommends:
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems to warn about the
oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low
oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil
pressure sensor, and then the driver display's
608
is
warning symbol for low oil pressure
used. Other variants have an oil level sensor,
when the driver is informed via the driver display's
warning symbol
and display texts. Certain
variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo
retailer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with the intervals specified in the Service and
Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than
specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in
adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an
oil of a higher grade than the one specified.
Related information
•
•
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 609)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 663)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 665)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
IMPORTANT
If this symbol is shown together
with a message about low oil level,
such as Engine oil level low
Refill 1 litre for example, then only
fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
See oil level in the centre display
Filler pipe13.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil
level gauge in the centre display when the car
has been started. The oil level should be checked
regularly.
No action with regard to engine oil level needs to
be taken until a message is shown in the driver
display.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km (approx.
20 miles) and have been stationary for
5 minutes with the engine switched off and
on level ground before the oil level indication
is correct.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message Engine oil level
Service required, visit a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
13
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
1.
Open the Car Status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press Status to show the oil level.
}}
609
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
met, then the message No value available
will be shown in the centre display. This does
not mean that there is something wrong in
the car's systems.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Engine oil (p. 608)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 665)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 663)
Ignition positions (p. 428)
Topping up coolant
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx.
2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery
to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a
defective cooling system when attempting to
start the car.
Car status (p. 600)
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never open the
cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is
required, unscrew the expansion tank cap
slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear.
610
Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Screw off the cap in the plastic cover.
IMPORTANT
•
Harmful if ingested. May cause organ
(kidney) damage.
•
Use ready-mixed coolant as recommended by Volvo. If concentrated liquid is
used, make sure that the ratio is 50 %
coolant to 50 % water of an approved
quality.
Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the
hatch from the plastic cover.
•
•
Do not mix different coolants.
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if
necessary. The coolant level must not exceed
the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion
tank.
•
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if
necessary. The coolant level must not exceed
the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion
tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car.
Only new coolant should be used when
replacing major cooling system components to ensure the system has sufficient
corrosion protection.
Related information
•
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 607)
Coolant — specifications (p. 666)
611
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Bulb replacement
The bulb in the halogen headlamp, reversing
lamp and rear fog lamp can be replaced without
assistance from a workshop.
Halogen headlamps are not available for all
models and markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for
more information.
An LED14 type lamp must be replaced by a
workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
For information about bulbs not covered in
this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certified Volvo service technician.
The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be
replaced without assistance from a workshop.
Before a bulb can be replaced, the plastic cover
over the headlamp must be removed.
Contact a workshop15 if faults other than bulbs
occur in lamps. If a fault occurs in LED14 lamps,
the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced.
14
15
612
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in ignition
position 0 when replacing bulbs.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Related information
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 613)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replacement (p. 613)
•
•
•
Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 614)
•
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 616)
•
•
•
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 615)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb, front (p. 615)
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb (p. 617)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 618)
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Removing the plastic cover for bulb
replacement
NOTE
Points to remember when the cover is refitted:
The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be
replaced without the help of a workshop, but the
plastic cover over the headlamp must be
removed before a bulb can be replaced.
•
The pin in the clip needs to be pressed
back fully before the clip is refitted in the
cover.
•
When the cover is refitted, the pin must
be pressed in until the end surface is
level with the surface of the clip.
Exterior lamp positions
The exterior lighting of the car uses a number of
different lamps. An LED16 type lamp must be
replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Lamps, front (car with halogen
headlamps)
Related information
•
•
•
•
–
Press down the pins into the plastic cover's
four clips using a screwdriver or similar and
lift away the cover.
Bulb replacement (p. 612)
Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 614)
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 615)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb, front (p. 615)
•
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 616)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
Dipped beam
Main beam
Daytime running lights/position lamps
Indicator
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED)
16
LED (Light Emmitting Diode)
}}
* Option/accessory. 613
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Lamps, rear
Replacing the dipped beam bulb
2.
Unplug the connector from the bulb.
The dipped beam bulb in the halogen headlamp
can be replaced without assistance from a workshop.
3.
Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards
and pulling it straight out.
4.
Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide
pin must be aimed straight upwards.
5.
Press in the connector.
6.
Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Position lamps (LED)
Fog lamp
Reversing lamp
Indicator17
Brake light (LED)
Brake light - central, high-level (LED)
Related information
17
614
Bulb replacement (p. 612)
Left-hand headlamp.
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
1.
Lighting control (p. 146)
•
•
•
Position lamps (LED)
•
•
•
Related information
Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
dipped beam bulb.
Contact a workshop for replacement - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Exterior lamp positions (p. 613)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replacement (p. 613)
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing the main beam lamp
3.
The main beam bulb in the halogen headlamp
can be replaced without assistance from a workshop.
Carefully prize the plastic cover at the connector's lock lug so that the lock lug releases.
4.
Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5.
Replace the bulb.
6.
Fit the bulb in the socket and screw in.
7.
Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Related information
•
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 613)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replacement (p. 613)
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
Replacing daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
The daytime running light bulb/position lamp
bulb in the halogen headlamp can be replaced
without assistance from a workshop.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed.
NOTE
The bulb for the daytime running light/position lamp is easier to access if the main beam
bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted
diagonally above the daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main
beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards
and then pulling straight out.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1.
Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
main beam bulb.
2.
Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling straight out.
}}
615
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
•
•
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 615)
Replacing the front direction
indicator bulb
The direction indicator bulb in the halogen headlamp can be replaced without assistance from a
workshop.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed.
Left-hand headlamp.
1.
Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
daytime running light bulb/position lamp
bulb.
2.
Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running
light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out.
3.
Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
4.
Replace the bulb.
Left-hand headlamp.
5.
Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
1.
Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
indicator bulb.
6.
If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been
removed, fit it into the socket and screw in.
2.
Press the catches together and pull the bulb
holder straight out.
7.
Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
3.
Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb.
4.
Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
5.
Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Related information
•
•
616
Exterior lamp positions (p. 613)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replacement (p. 613)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
•
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 613)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replacement (p. 613)
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
The bulbs for the reversing lamp are located
behind the panel in the tailgate.
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
Lamp housing on left-hand side.
1.
Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
anticlockwise and then unhooking the panel.
Place the panel to one side.
2.
Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
3.
Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
4.
Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
5.
Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
6.
Hook on the panel and turn the knobs a
quarter turn clockwise.
Related information
•
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 613)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replacement (p. 613)
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
617
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
Bulb specifications
The bulb for the rear fog lamp is located behind
a hatch in the tailgate panel on the driver's side.
The specifications apply to bulbs in the halogen
headlamps as well as the reversing lamp bulb
and the rear fog lamp bulb.
The rear fog lamp bulb is replaced as follows:
Contact a workshop if faults occur in other
lamps18.
Lamp housing on left-hand side.
The tailgate's inner panel.
1.
Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
anticlockwise. Then unhook the panel and
place it to one side.
2.
Undo the bulb holder by turning it a quarter
turn anticlockwise and pulling it out.
3.
Remove the blown bulb from the bulb holder
by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
4.
Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
618
Type
Dipped beam
55
H7
Main beam
65
H9
Front direction indicators
24
PY24W
21/5
W21/5W
Reversing lamp
21
H21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
H21W LL
daytime running lights/
position lamps, front
A
Watt
Wipe the bulb's lens clean of any dirt, grease
or moisture.
Related information
6.
Attach the bulb holder by turning it a quarter
turn clockwise.
•
•
7.
Refit the panel and lock it on by turning the
knobs a quarter turn clockwise.
•
•
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WA
5.
Related information
18
Function
Exterior lamp positions (p. 613)
Bulb specifications (p. 618)
Exterior lamp positions (p. 613)
Bulb replacement (p. 612)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Starter battery
The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
The starter battery is used to start up the electrical system and drive the starter motor as well as
other electrical equipment in the car.
The starter battery should be replaced by a
workshop19.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The starter battery is a 12 V battery, designed for
the carbon dioxide reducing functions Start/Stop
and regenerative charging, and to support the
functionality of the car's different systems.
The service life and function of the starter battery
is influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
•
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the starter battery
are correctly connected and properly tightened.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
Charging points
When connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger, use the car's charging points in
the engine compartment.
Positive charging point
Negative charging point
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery and the
support battery, only use a modern battery
charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast
charging function must not be used since it
may damage the battery.
The battery terminals on the car's starter battery
in the luggage/cargo area must not be used.
During charging, both the starter battery and the
support battery are charged.
19
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
619
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or
the message in the driver display about the
starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection
of an external starter battery or battery
charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
NOTE
Location
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
time or when it is only driven short distances.
Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a
battery charger with automatic trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
The starter battery is located in the cargo area.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
IMPORTANT
On certain models, the battery is attached
with a retaining strap. Make sure the retaining
strap is properly tightened.
620
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Specifications for starter battery
Battery type
H7 AGM
Voltage (V)
Cold start
capacityA
-
CCAB
(A)
H8 AGM
12
12
800
850
Size, L×B×H
315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches)
353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah)
80
95
A
B
According to EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, make sure you
replace it with a battery with the same size,
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the decal on the battery).
Related information
•
•
•
Symbols on the batteries (p. 623)
Support battery (p. 622)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 477)
621
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Support battery
NOTE
Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the
starter battery, are equipped with a support battery.
•
The higher the current take-off in the car,
the more the alternator must be working
and the batteries charging = Increased
fuel consumption.
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
cease to work after the connection of an
external starter battery or battery charger:
•
When the capacity of the starter battery
has fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is disengaged.
•
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
starter battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's
starting sequence.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to
high current take-off means:
The support battery is located in a box next to the strut
tower.
20
622
•
The engine starts automatically20 without the
driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual
gearbox).
•
The engine starts automatically without the
driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake
pedal (automatic gearbox).
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal starter battery. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
IMPORTANT
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged so
much that the car has no normal electrical
functions and the engine is then jump-started
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function may continue to be
activated. If the Start/Stop function then
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due
to insufficient battery capacity, because the
battery has not had the opportunity to
recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is
insufficient time to charge the battery with a
battery charger, the recommendation is to
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function
until the battery has been recharged by the
car. In an outside temperature of approx.
+15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to
be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a
lower outside temperature, the charging time
may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external
battery charge